CAT 6060 6060FS Hydraulic Shovel Operation & Maintenance Manual - PDF DOWNLOAD

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN 04 - 2013

Operation and Maintenance Manual 6060, 6060FS Hydraulic Shovel

No.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Important Safety Information Most accidents that involve product operation, maintenance and repair are caused by failure to observe basic safety rules or precautions. An accident can often be avoided by recognizing potentially hazardous situations before an accident occurs. A person must be alert to potential hazards. This person should also have the necessary training, skills and tools to perform these functions properly.

Improper operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair of this product can be dangerous and could result in injury or death.

Do not operate or perform any lubrication, maintenance or repair on this product, until you have read and understood the operation, lubrication, maintenance and repair information.

Safety precautions and warnings are provided in this manual and on the product. If these hazard warnings are not heeded, bodily injury or death could occur to you or to other persons.

The hazards are identified by the “Safety Alert Symbol” and followed by a “Signal Word” such as “DANGER”, “WARNING” or “CAUTION”. The Safety Alert “WARNING” label is shown below.

The meaning of this safety alert symbol is as follows: Attention! Become Alert! Your Safety is Involved.

The message that appears under the warning explains the hazard and can be either written or pictorially presented.

A non-exhaustive list of operations that may cause product damage are identified by “NOTICE” labels on the product and in this publication.

Caterpillar cannot anticipate every possible circumstance that might involve a potential hazard. The warnings in this publication and on the product are, therefore, not all inclusive. You must not use this product in any manner different from that considered by this manual without first satisfying yourself that you have considered all safety rules and precautions applicable to the operation of the product in the location of use, including site-specific rules and precautions applicable to the worksite. If a tool, procedure, work method or operating technique that is not specifically recommended by Caterpillar is used, you must satisfy yourself that it is safe for you and for others. You should also ensure that the product will not be damaged or become unsafe by the operation, lubrication, maintenance or repair procedures that you intend to use.

The information, specifications, and illustrations in this publication are on the basis of information that was available at the time that the publication was written. The specifications, torques, pressures, measurements, adjustments, illustrations, and other items can change at any time. These changes can affect the service that is given to the product. Obtain the complete and most current information before you start any job. Cat dealers have the most current informa-

tion available.

When replacement parts are required for this product Caterpillar recommends using Cat replacement parts or parts with equivalent specifications including, but not limited to, physical dimensions, type, strength and material. Failure to heed this warning can lead to premature failures, product damage, personal injury or death.

Published by:

Caterpillar Global Mining HMS GmbH Dept. Technical Publications D-44149 Dortmund, Karl-Funke-Straße 36 Tel. 49 (0) 231 922-4340 Fax 49 (0) 231 922-5005 E-Mail dokumentation.HEX@cat.com https://mining.cat.com www.bucyrus-hex.de

© Copyright Caterpillar Global Mining Hydraulic Mining Shovels GmbH 2013. The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this manual / file as well as the communication of its content to others without express authorization is prohibited. Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.

Printed in Germany

ii

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

The Operation and Maintenance Manual is in 6 sections; the sections are designed for different target groups: Operating instructions

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Part 6 INDEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

iii

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

This page intentionally left blank.

iv

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS Important Safety Information __________________________________________________________ ii 1 INTRODUCTION __________________________________________________________________ 1-1 PREFACE _______________________________________________________________________ 1-1 About this Operation and Maintenance Manual _________________________________________ 1-1 Further machine documentation _____________________________________________________ 1-1 WARRANTY______________________________________________________________________ 1-2 FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS _____________________________________________ 1-3 Warnings and symbols ____________________________________________________________ 1-3 DESIGNATED USE ________________________________________________________________ 1-4 Noise emission information _________________________________________________________ 1-5 Vibration information ______________________________________________________________ 1-5 ORGANIZATIONAL MEASURES _____________________________________________________ 1-6 Selection and qualification of personnel; basic responsibilities______________________________ 1-7 Safety instructions governing specific operational phases _________________________________ 1-7 Special work in conjunction with utilization of the machine and maintenance and repairs as well as troubleshooting during work; disposal of parts and consumables____________________________ 1-8 Warning of special dangers_________________________________________________________ 1-9 Gas, dust, steam and smoke________________________________________________________ 1-9 Hydraulic equipment _____________________________________________________________ 1-10 FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD____________________________________________________ 1-11 NOTES_________________________________________________________________________ 1-13 2 OPERATION _____________________________________________________________________ 2-1 OPERATION - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS _______________________________________________ 2-3 Operation and Maintenance Manual, where to store it in the operator’s cab ___________________ 2-4 FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD_____________________________________________________ 2-5 DESCRIPTION OF THE EXCAVATOR _________________________________________________ 2-6 Excavator layout _________________________________________________________________ 2-7 Undercarriage ___________________________________________________________________ 2-8 Superstructure___________________________________________________________________ 2-8 Drive unit _______________________________________________________________________ 2-8 Hydraulic system _________________________________________________________________ 2-8 Control and Monitoring Platform (CAMP) ______________________________________________ 2-8 Board-Control-System (BCS) _______________________________________________________ 2-9 Demand control / Zero-flow regulation ________________________________________________ 2-9 Automatic reset to idling ___________________________________________________________ 2-9 Electrical system _________________________________________________________________ 2-9 Signs _________________________________________________________________________ 2-10 Entering and leaving the machine, Safety instructions ___________________________________ 2-18 Access ladder lighting ____________________________________________________________ 2-18 Swinging ladder_________________________________________________________________ 2-19 Folding ladder (optional) __________________________________________________________ 2-20 Emergency exit in operator’s cab and escape ladder ____________________________________ 2-21 Switching the cab interior lighting on and off___________________________________________ 2-22 v

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

TABLE OF CONTENTS Switching the maintenance lights on and off ___________________________________________ 2-23 Emergency shut-off function _______________________________________________________ 2-24 Putting the machine back into operation, reset of emergency shut off function ________________ 2-25 Battery isolator switch, shutting off supply voltage ______________________________________ 2-26 Starter isolator switch, shutting off starter voltage_______________________________________ 2-26 Operator’s seat _________________________________________________________________ 2-27 Reducing operators exposure to vibrations____________________________________________ 2-29 Trainer's / instructor's seat ________________________________________________________ 2-29 Windscreen washer______________________________________________________________ 2-29 Operating hours meter ___________________________________________________________ 2-29 Fire extinguisher ________________________________________________________________ 2-30 Automatic fire-extinguishing system (optional) _________________________________________ 2-31 Harness (optional) _______________________________________________________________ 2-32 MONITORING, WARNING AND CONTROL ELEMENTS __________________________________ 2-36 Engine 1 (LH), control and monitoring________________________________________________ 2-43 Engine 2 (RH), control and monitoring _______________________________________________ 2-45 PUTTING THE MACHINE INTO OPERATION __________________________________________ 2-64 Reducing the operator's exposure to noise____________________________________________ 2-64 Refuelling _____________________________________________________________________ 2-65 Back-up heating (option), filling in fuel _______________________________________________ 2-65 Service station (tanklift) ___________________________________________________________ 2-66 Emergency off switch ____________________________________________________________ 2-68 Switching the electrical system on and off ____________________________________________ 2-73 Engines, emergency shut-off_______________________________________________________ 2-73 STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINES ___________________________________________ 2-74 Starting the engines _____________________________________________________________ 2-74 Starting the left-hand engine _______________________________________________________ 2-74 Starting the right-hand engine ______________________________________________________ 2-74 Engines – adjusting the speed _____________________________________________________ 2-75 Starting the engines at low temperatures _____________________________________________ 2-75 Shutting off the engines___________________________________________________________ 2-76 Shutting off the left-hand engine ____________________________________________________ 2-76 Shutting off the right-hand engine ___________________________________________________ 2-76 AIR CONDITIONER (OPTIONAL) ____________________________________________________ 2-77 Back-up heating operator’s cab (optional)_____________________________________________ 2-78 Back-up heating (optional) ________________________________________________________ 2-79 MAXIMUM MACHINE INCLINATIONS, INFORMATION ___________________________________ 2-80 TRAVELLING, SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ______________________________________________ 2-82 TRAVELLING____________________________________________________________________ 2-83 Superstructure basic position ______________________________________________________ 2-83 Travelling forwards/backwards _____________________________________________________ 2-83 Superstructure holding brake ______________________________________________________ 2-87 Track parking brake _____________________________________________________________ 2-87 TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE____________________________________________________ 2-88 Transport - Safety instructions _____________________________________________________ 2-88

vi

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

TABLE OF CONTENTS WORKING OPERATION - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ____________________________________ 2-89 WORKING OPERATION ___________________________________________________________ 2-91 Before starting work _____________________________________________________________ 2-91 Activating the electronic excavator control ____________________________________________ 2-91 Swinging the superstructure _______________________________________________________ 2-92 Braking the superstructure ________________________________________________________ 2-92 Working _______________________________________________________________________ 2-93 Emergency lowering of the working equipment_________________________________________ 2-94 After daily operation _____________________________________________________________ 2-95 ASSEMBLING WORKING EQUIPMENT - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ________________________ 2-96 Securing the machine ____________________________________________________________ 2-97 CORROSION PROTECTION FOR PINS AND BEARINGS (BUSHINGS AND HUBS)____________ 2-98 ON-BOARD CRANE (OPTIONAL)____________________________________________________ 2-99 On-board crane, monitoring, warning and control elements _______________________________ 2-99 On-board crane, putting into operation ______________________________________________ 2-100 On-board crane, drive unit________________________________________________________ 2-100 On-Board crane, – blocking the boom in position of rest ________________________________ 2-101 On-board crane, checking ________________________________________________________ 2-101 Monitoring cameras_____________________________________________________________ 2-102 NOTES________________________________________________________________________ 2-103 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING ______________________________________________________ 3-1 INSPECTION AND SERVICING - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS________________________________ 3-3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING WORK, FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD ____________________ 3-7 INSPECTION AND SERVICING PLANS - INSTRUCTIONS _________________________________ 3-9 Intervals________________________________________________________________________ 3-9 Change of engine oil ______________________________________________________________ 3-9 Air-intake system_________________________________________________________________ 3-9 Oils / Greases ___________________________________________________________________ 3-9 Cleaning jobs ___________________________________________________________________ 3-9 Components ____________________________________________________________________ 3-9 Plan V ________________________________________________________________________ 3-11 Plan N ________________________________________________________________________ 3-13 Plan T ________________________________________________________________________ 3-15 Plan A – E _____________________________________________________________________ 3-17 LUBRICATING CHART ____________________________________________________________ 3-24 Lubricating chart – Grease (legend) _________________________________________________ 3-25 Filling quantities - Grease _________________________________________________________ 3-25 INSPECTION PLAN - OIL __________________________________________________________ 3-26 Inspection plan – Oil (legend) ______________________________________________________ 3-27 Filling quantities - oil _____________________________________________________________ 3-28 Filling quantities – other __________________________________________________________ 3-28 LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES ____________________________________________________ 3-29 Notes on the selection of oils and greases ____________________________________________ 3-29 Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids ______________________________________________ 3-29

vii

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

TABLE OF CONTENTS I. Oils for combustion engines and compressors ______________________________________ 3-30 II. Oil for hydraulic system ______________________________________________________ 3-31 III.a Oils for pump distribution gearboxes and travel gearboxes_________________________ 3-32 III.b Oils for swing gearboxes ___________________________________________________ 3-33 V. Grease for bearings, slew rings and track system (Central lubrication system) ___________ 3-34 Grease for idlers, track rollers and support rollers (Lifetime lubrication) ______________________ 3-35 Coolant for use on all combustion engines ____________________________________________ 3-36 SERVICING WORK _______________________________________________________________ 3-37 Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes ___________________________________________ 3-37 ENGINE ________________________________________________________________________ 3-38 Engine - Safety instructions________________________________________________________ 3-38 Checking the engine oil level / Topping up ____________________________________________ 3-39 Engine oil reservoir, checking the oil level ____________________________________________ 3-40 Changing the engine oil___________________________________________________________ 3-41 Engine oil reservoir, filling in / draining off the oil _______________________________________ 3-43 Replacing the oil filter ____________________________________________________________ 3-46 Cold-starting fluid (ether) - Replacing the pressure vessel ________________________________ 3-47 COOLING SYSTEM_______________________________________________________________ 3-48 Temperature ___________________________________________________________________ 3-48 Radiators ______________________________________________________________________ 3-49 Cooling-liquid level check _________________________________________________________ 3-49 Cooling liquid, change ____________________________________________________________ 3-52 Testing the cooling liquid composition________________________________________________ 3-54 AIR-INTAKE SYSTEM _____________________________________________________________ 3-55 Dust trap, cleaning ______________________________________________________________ 3-55 Main filter elements ______________________________________________________________ 3-56 Secondary filter element __________________________________________________________ 3-58 Air-intake lines__________________________________________________________________ 3-58 FUEL SYSTEM __________________________________________________________________ 3-59 Fuel system - Safety instructions ___________________________________________________ 3-59 Fuel tank supply valve – function ___________________________________________________ 3-59 Replacing the fuel filter ___________________________________________________________ 3-60 Venting the fuel system ___________________________________________________________ 3-60 Breather filter fuel tanks, replace____________________________________________________ 3-60 Cleaning the fuel tanks ___________________________________________________________ 3-61 Water trap (option), clean / replace __________________________________________________ 3-63 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ____________________________________________________________ 3-65 Electrical system - Safety instructions________________________________________________ 3-65 Alternator - Instructions ___________________________________________________________ 3-65 Electrical circuit diagrams _________________________________________________________ 3-65 Electrical system switch-cabinets ___________________________________________________ 3-65 Replacing lamps and bulbs ________________________________________________________ 3-65 Xenon floodlight projector (optional), replacing the lamp _________________________________ 3-66 Lighting systems in LED technonogy, instructions ______________________________________ 3-68 Battery, checking the state of charge ________________________________________________ 3-69 Battery, removing and installing ____________________________________________________ 3-70 Charging batteries inside the machine, safety instructions ________________________________ 3-71 Switchgear cabinet ______________________________________________________________ 3-72

viii

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

TABLE OF CONTENTS HYDRAULIC SYSTEM_____________________________________________________________ 3-74 Hydraulic system - Safety instructions _______________________________________________ 3-74 Depressurizing the hydraulic system_________________________________________________ 3-74 Checking the hydraulic oil level _____________________________________________________ 3-75 Hydraulic oil return-flow filters, replace _______________________________________________ 3-77 Hydraulic oil return-flow filters, replace (from machine no. 340173) _________________________ 3-79 Bypass valves, clean / replace _____________________________________________________ 3-81 Hydraulic oil tank breather filters, replace _____________________________________________ 3-82 Filters (pilot control circuit), replace__________________________________________________ 3-83 Hydraulic oil filters for working hydraulics, replace ______________________________________ 3-84 Filters for swing pump charge circuit, replace __________________________________________ 3-85 Filters for swing circuits, replace ____________________________________________________ 3-86 Bearing flushing for main pumps, replace filter _________________________________________ 3-87 Changing the hydraulic oil _________________________________________________________ 3-88 Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids ______________________________________________ 3-88 Venting the hydraulic system ______________________________________________________ 3-92 Cleaning the hydraulic oil cooler ____________________________________________________ 3-93 Electronic excavator controls, clean / lubricate _________________________________________ 3-94 Pressure accumulator - Emergency lowering __________________________________________ 3-95 PUMP DRIVE GEARBOX __________________________________________________________ 3-96 Checking the gearbox oil level / Topping up with oil _____________________________________ 3-96 Pre-chambers, checking oil level / topping up with oil____________________________________ 3-97 Changing the gearbox oil _________________________________________________________ 3-98 Pre-chambers, changing the gearbox oil______________________________________________ 3-99 Pump drive gearbox breather valve, replace___________________________________________ 3-99 Pre-chamber breather valve, replace _______________________________________________ 3-100 Pump drive gearbox lube oil filters, replace __________________________________________ 3-101 SWING GEARBOX ______________________________________________________________ 3-102 Swing gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil _____________________________ 3-102 Gearbox venting _______________________________________________________________ 3-102 Changing the swing gearbox oil ___________________________________________________ 3-103 TRAVEL GEARBOX (GEARBOX P/N 3683483) _______________________________________ 3-105 Travel gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil _____________________________ 3-105 Travel gearbox - Changing oil _____________________________________________________ 3-106 Travel gearbox - Breather filter ____________________________________________________ 3-107 TRAVEL GEARBOX (GEARBOX P/N 3683496) ________________________________________ 3-108 Travel gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil _____________________________ 3-108 Travel gearbox - Changing oil _____________________________________________________ 3-110 Travel gearbox - Breather filter ____________________________________________________ 3-111 TRAVEL GEARBOX (GEARBOX P/N 3749598) ________________________________________ 3-112 Travel gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil _____________________________ 3-112 Travel gearbox - Changing oil _____________________________________________________ 3-114 Travel gearbox - Breather filter ____________________________________________________ 3-115 CRAWLER TRACKS _____________________________________________________________ 3-116 Track roller, lubricating __________________________________________________________ 3-117 Track tensioner ________________________________________________________________ 3-118 Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations _________________________________________ 3-119 Checking the gas charging pressure in the pressure accumulator _________________________ 3-119

ix

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

TABLE OF CONTENTS SWING RING ___________________________________________________________________ 3-120 Swing ring - Instructions _________________________________________________________ 3-120 Bearing races _________________________________________________________________ 3-120 CENTRAL LUBRICATING SYSTEM _________________________________________________ 3-122 Design _______________________________________________________________________ 3-122 Function _____________________________________________________________________ 3-123 Filling up the grease container ____________________________________________________ 3-124 Breather filter grease container, check / replace_______________________________________ 3-124 Checking the greasing pressure ___________________________________________________ 3-125 Unblocking a grease line _________________________________________________________ 3-125 Oilfilter replace (hydraulic circuit grease pump) _______________________________________ 3-126 Grease filter replace (filling the grease container)______________________________________ 3-127 Grease filter replace (Grease lines) ________________________________________________ 3-127 OTHER MAINTENANCE __________________________________________________________ 3-128 Engine _______________________________________________________________________ 3-128 Reservoirs for used grease at the A-frame, emptying___________________________________ 3-129 Heating and air conditioning ______________________________________________________ 3-129 Working equipment, check for cracks _______________________________________________ 3-130 HYDRAULIC LADDER____________________________________________________________ 3-131 Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations _________________________________________ 3-132 Extract from the German regulations _______________________________________________ 3-132 Checking the gas charging pressure in the pressure accumulator _________________________ 3-132 ON-BOARD CRANE, DRIVE UNIT __________________________________________________ 3-133 On-board crane, lubricating_______________________________________________________ 3-134 On-Board crane, checking tightness of fastening bolts __________________________________ 3-134 PUTTING THE EXCAVATOR OUT OF OPERATION AND RECOMMISSIONING ______________ 3-135 Putting the excavator out of operation_______________________________________________ 3-135 Battery storage ________________________________________________________________ 3-135 Recommissioning ______________________________________________________________ 3-135 NOTES________________________________________________________________________ 3-137 4 REPAIR WORK ___________________________________________________________________ 4-1 REPAIR WORK - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS_____________________________________________ 4-3 CONFINED SPACES - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ________________________________________ 4-4 REPAIR WORK, FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD _______________________________________ 4-5 REPAIR WORK, ENGINE ___________________________________________________________ 4-6 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM______________________________________________________________ 4-7 Repair instructions _______________________________________________________________ 4-7 Hydraulic hoses – Instructions ______________________________________________________ 4-7 PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ________________________________ 4-8 WELDING AND FLAME CUTTING WORKS - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ______________________ 4-9 DISPOSAL AT THE END OF THE SERVICE LIFE _______________________________________ 4-12 Dismantling and removal instructions ________________________________________________ 4-12

x

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

TABLE OF CONTENTS Risk of deflagrations _____________________________________________________________ 4-12 Risk of fire _____________________________________________________________________ 4-12 Disposing of the machine without polluting the environment ______________________________ 4-13 Further hazardous substances _____________________________________________________ 4-13 Appropriate disposal of batteries____________________________________________________ 4-14 NOTES_________________________________________________________________________ 4-15 5 ANNEX__________________________________________________________________________ 5-1 BOARD-CONTROL-SYSTEM ________________________________________________________ 5-3 BCS III, what’s that? ______________________________________________________________ 5-3 The keys on the front side __________________________________________________________ 5-4 Other elements on the front side _____________________________________________________ 5-4 BCSIII, the start screen ____________________________________________________________ 5-5 Information given on the start screen, top section________________________________________ 5-6 Information given on the start screen, central section_____________________________________ 5-7 Information given on the start screen, lower section ______________________________________ 5-8 Emergency Stop, reset function _____________________________________________________ 5-9 Swing circuit lock-out function ______________________________________________________ 5-10 Information given on the “Service” screen_____________________________________________ 5-11 Engine data screen ______________________________________________________________ 5-12 Hydraulic data screen ____________________________________________________________ 5-13 Lubrication data screen ___________________________________________________________ 5-14 Controls adjustment data screen____________________________________________________ 5-15 View documents screen __________________________________________________________ 5-16 Signal table screen ______________________________________________________________ 5-17 Signal table screen, location _______________________________________________________ 5-18 Signal table screen, diagram_______________________________________________________ 5-19 Signal table screen, diagram configuration ____________________________________________ 5-20 Code table screen _______________________________________________________________ 5-21 Slew brake test screen ___________________________________________________________ 5-22 BCS III, interfaces _______________________________________________________________ 5-23 USB interface, data storage _______________________________________________________ 5-23 Saving data to a USB stick ________________________________________________________ 5-24 Saving data to a USB stick, continued _______________________________________________ 5-25 Saving data to a USB stick, continued _______________________________________________ 5-26 BCSIII, cleaning_________________________________________________________________ 5-27 BCSIII, disposal_________________________________________________________________ 5-27 TROUBLESHOOTING _____________________________________________________________ 5-28 Instructions on troubleshooting _____________________________________________________ 5-28 Layout of the fault table ___________________________________________________________ 5-28 Possible causes ________________________________________________________________ 5-28 Measures _____________________________________________________________________ 5-28 Section _______________________________________________________________________ 5-28 FAULT TABLES __________________________________________________________________ 5-29 Combustion engine - Fault table ____________________________________________________ 5-29 Working hydraulics – Fault table ____________________________________________________ 5-30 Track drive – Fault table __________________________________________________________ 5-31 Swing mechnism – Fault table _____________________________________________________ 5-32 Central lubricating system – Fault table ______________________________________________ 5-33

xi

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

TABLE OF CONTENTS HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ____________________________________________________ 5-34 Vibration data __________________________________________________________________ 5-34 ABBREVIATIONS ________________________________________________________________ 5-35 ABBREVIATIONS _______________________________________________________________ 5-36 PRODUCT SPECIFICATION SHEET _________________________________________________ 5-37 NOTES_________________________________________________________________________ 5-39 6 INDEX __________________________________________________________________________ 6-1

xii

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction 1 INTRODUCTION Operation and Maintenance Manual

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Part 6 INDEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

1-1

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction

This page intentionally left blank.

1-2

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction PREFACE About this Operation and Maintenance Manual

All CGM HMS GmbH Operation and Maintenance Manuals are issued in German and then translated. Even a good translation may give rise to questions which CGM HMS GmbH will be pleased to answer.

These Operation and Maintenance Manual are designed to familiarize the operator with the machine and its designated use.

The Operation and Maintenance Manual contain important information on how to operate the machine safely, properly and with maximum efficiency. Observing these instructions helps to prevent hazardous situations, to reduce repair costs and downtimes and to increase the reliability and service life of the machine.

The Operation and Maintenance Manual must be supplemented by the respective national rules and regulations for accident prevention and environmental protection.

The Operation and Maintenance Manual must always be available in the operator’s cab of the machine.

The Operation and Maintenance Manual must be read and put into practice by any person in charge of carrying out work with or on the machine, such as  operation, including setting-up, troubleshooting in the course of work, care, evacuation of production waste and disposal of fuels and consumables,  maintenance (inspection, servicing, repair) and / or  transport.

In addition to the Operation and Maintenance Manual and the mandatory rules and regulations for accident prevention and environmental protection in the user's country and at the place where the machine is to be used, the generally recognized technical rules for safe and proper working must 1 be observed The Operation and Maintenance Manual are directed to the mining-machine specialist. They cannot provide basic know-how. This can be acquired, for example, in several days' instruction by a qualified CGM HMS GmbH (Caterpillar Global Mining Hydraulic Mining Shovels GmbH) mechanic or by attending an CGM HMS GmbH training course for operators or maintenance personnel.

The CGM HMS GmbH after-sales service will be pleased to deal with any queries you may have after reading through the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

The Operation and Maintenance Manual are not work instructions for carrying out major repairs.

Such work is willingly done for you by the CGM HMS GmbH after-sales service.

Further machine documentation The documentation relating to the machine is listed according to scope, quantity and language in the shipping note of the machine or in the covering letter if supplied separately. The Operation and Maintenance Manual, the spare-parts list and the „Service Manual“s are marked with the serial number of the machine.

The documentation supplied with your machine is rather comprehensive. Therefore, it has been split up in several volumes: Volume 1: the present Operation and Maintenance Manual, Volume 2:

spare-parts list of the machine,

Volume 3:

crossreference list of spare-parts,

Volume 4:

electrical circuit diagram and key,

Volume 5:

documentation of the engine and of other components,

Volume 6:

Service Manual Part 1

Volume 7:

Service Manual Part 2

Depending on the size of your machine, the documentation can also consist of more volumes.

If you cannot find the information you are looking for in the present Operation and Maintenance Manual please check also the other volumes of the documentation.

The „Service Manual“ Part 1 also provides information on how to assemble the machine, on functions of the hydraulic system, on hydraulic circuit diagrams etc.

On taking receipt of the consignment, please check that the documentation is complete and in the language requested by you.

1

Complies with VDMA recommendation "Operation and Maintenance Manual"

1-1

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction WARRANTY The warranty of CGM HMS GmbH presupposes among other things that the servicing works as described in the Operation and Maintenance Manual have been performed: 

in a workshop authorized in writing by CGM HMS GmbH,

and 



by the CGM HMS GmbH Service

or 

Do not operate the machine  when components / assemblies are defective or missing,

by using the original spare parts of CGM HMS GmbH.

The proper execution of the servicing works must be documented on the CGM HMS GmbH Service checklists.

if one or several of such components of which more than one are installed in the machine have been removed.

In cases of doubt seek advice from the CGM HMS GmbH Service.

CGM HMS GmbH refuses to assume the guarantee for damage and consequential damage caused by an abusive utilization of the machine.

Therefore: Do not operate the machine,  when several track rollers or support rollers have been removed; 

when one or several swing gearboxes have failed or been removed;



when one or several teeth on the backhoe or on the shovel are worn or missing;



when parts of the hardfacing layer on the backhoe or on the shovel are worn or missing.

Working under these circumstances results in heavy wear and possibly in severe damage and thus in high repair costs.

Such circumstances are considered by CGM HMS GmbH as "abusive utilization".

Why? The machines have been designed and built on the basis of detailed calculations and so that all of the components installed absorb the occurring forces and are thus loaded to an equal extent.

Example: If the machine is used for working with, for instance, one or even several track rollers removed, the forces must be absorbed by the remaining track rollers. These are then overloaded or loaded to a greater extent than calculated.

The consequences are higher wear and consequential damage to the track rollers, but also to other components of the machine: chassis, travel gearbox and crawler track.

1-2

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Complies with VDMA recommendation "Operation and Maintenance Manual"

Warnings and symbols The following signs are used in the Operation and Maintenance Manual to designate instructions of particular importance: Precautionary rules and measures designed to protect the machine operator and other persons from lifethreatening danger or injuries and to prevent extensive damage.

Information and precautionary measures designed to prevent damage to the machine or other property.

1-3

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction DESIGNATED USE The machine has been built in accordance with state-of-art standards and the recognized safety rules. Nevertheless, its use may constitute a risk to life and limb for the user or third parties or cause damage to the machine and to other material property (acceptable risk) An acceptable risk is present, e.g.: loose material or material to be loaded may drop out of the bucket or backhoe while the working equipment is being swivelled.

The machine must be used only in technically perfect condition in accordance with its designated use and the instructions set out in the Operation and Maintenance Manual, and only by safetyconscious persons who are fully aware of the risks involved in operating the machine. Any functional disorders, especially those affecting the safety of the machine, should therefore be rectified immediately.

With attached shovel equipment, the machine is to be used solely for loosening and loading of:

Using the hydraulic shovel or its attachments for purposes other than or extending beyond those stated above, e.g.:  for lifting or transporting persons, 

as a working platform,



for lifting crane loads without the equipment being approved for this purpose,



for driving in posts, sheetpiles supports, etc. without the equipment being approved for this purpose,



for moving material to the side (sweeping),



for breaking down rocks by beating with the shovel or the backhoe,



for fitting or reparing of other machines

 sand, oil sand,  gravel,

is contrary to its designated use and considered as "unauthorized use".

 blasted rock,  ore,

Lifting eyes on the lower carriage

 coal,

-

are settled for transporting with a crane only.

and other raw materials.

-

must not be used for towing a machine.

With attached backhoe equipment, the machine can additionally also be used for excavating and loading of excavatable soils and other raw materials.

Operating the machine within the limits of the desigated use also involves observing the instructions set out in the Operation and Maintenance Manual and complying with the inspection and maintenance directives.

1-4

Improper use may involve a life-threatening risk for operators or other personnel or may cause injury or extensive damage.

The manufacturer/supplier cannot be held liable for any damage resulting from other than the designated use. The risk involved in such misuse lies with the user.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction Noise emission information

Vibration information

Noise emission data are specified in acc. with ISO 6394.

On the condition that the hydraulic shovel is used within the limits of its designated use, the installation of seats for operators in conformity with ISO 7096 ensures that the weighted vibration accelerations awz (measured in compliance with ISO 2631 Part I) fulfil the requirements with respect to the protection against whole-body vibrations in acc. with EC Vibration Directive 2002/44/EG.

Time-averaged A-weighted emission sound pressure level at operator’s position with the machine running at high idle: LAeq = XX dB.

The vibrations transferred are indicated in acc. with EC Machine Directive 2006/42/EG, Annex I; Section 3.6.3.1, resp. with the "Regulations for noise and vibration at the place of work", Section 4, as of 18.12.2008.

The effective value of the weighted acceleration to which the wole body is exposed, does not exceed 0.5 m/s2.

The measurement uncertainty is ±3% (tolerance of the measuring instruments).

1-5

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction ORGANIZATIONAL MEASURES The Operation and Maintenance Manual must always be at hand at the place of use of the machine, e.g. by stowing them in the place provided for such purpose.

In addition to the Operation and Maintenance Manual, observe and instruct the user in all other generally applicable legal and other mandatory regulations relevant to accident prevention and environmental protection.

Personal protective equipment and the working clothing Depending on the cleaning, servicing and/or repair activities to be performed, the personal protective equipment and the working clothing may consist of the following items: 

fall arresters,



protective suit,



helmet,



goggles - e. g. for cleaning work - or for welding work,

The Operation and Maintenance Manual must be supplemented by instructions covering the duties involved in supervising and notifying special organizational features, such as job organization, working sequences or the personnel entrusted with the work.



protective gloves - e.g. for work on hot units - for grinding and welding work,



protective working gloves - e.g. for fitting work - for grinding and welding work,

Personnel entrusted with work on the machine must have read the Operation and Maintenance Manual and in particular the chapter on safety before beginning work. Reading the Operation and Maintenance Manual after work has begun is too late. This applies especially to persons working only occasionally on the machine, e.g. during setting up or maintenance.



ear protectors.

These compulsory regulations may also deal with the handling of hazardous substances, issuing and/or wearing of personal protective equipment or traffic regulations.

Observe all safety instructions and warnings attached to the machine.

See to it that safety instructions and warnings attached to the machine are always complete and perfectly legible.

Check - at least from time to time - whether the personnel is carrying out the work in compliance with the Operation and Maintenance Manual and paying attention to risks and safety factors.

In the event of safety-relevant modifications or changes in the behaviour of the machine during operation, stop the machine immediately and report the malfunction to the competent authority/person.

For reasons of security, long hair must be tied back or otherwise secured, garments must be close-fitting and no jewellery, such as rings, may be worn. Injury may result from being caught up in the machinery or from rings catching on moving parts.

Never make any modifications, additions or conversions which might affect safety without the supplier's approval. This also applies to the installation and adjustment of safety devices and valves as well as to welding work on load-bearing elements.

Use protective equipment wherever required by the circumstances or by law.

Use only the original sparts parts of CGM HMS GmbH. They are the only ones to fulfill the technical specifications of the machine.

Replace hydraulic hoses within stipulated and appropriate intervals, even if no safety-relevant defects have been detected.

Adhere to prescribed intervals or those specified in the Operation and Maintenance Manual for routine checks and inspections.

For the execution of maintenance work, tools and workshop equipment adapted to the task on hand are absolutely indispensable.

The personnel must be familiar with the location and operation of fire extinguishers.

Observe all fire-warning and fire-fighting procedures.

1-6

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction Selection and qualification of personnel; basic responsibilities

In the event of malfunction, stop the machine immediately and lock it. Have any defects rectified immediately.

Any work on and with the machine must be executed by reliable personnel only. Statutory minimum age limits must be observed.

Start the machine from the operator's seat only.

Employ only trained or instructed staff and set out clearly the individual responsibilities of the personnel for operation, set-up, maintenance and repair.

Make sure that only authorized personnel works on or with the machine.

Define the machine operator's responsibilities giving the operator the authority to refuse instructions by third parties that are contrary to safety.

Do not allow persons to be trained or instructed or persons taking part in a general training course to work on or with the machine without being permanently supervised by an experienced person.

Work on the electrical system and equipment of the machine must be carried out only by a skilled electrician or by instructed persons under the supervision and guidance of a skilled electrician and in accordance with electrical engineering rules and regulations.

Work on chassis and brake systems must be performed by skilled personnel only, which has been specially trained for such work.

Work on hydraulic systems must be carried out only by personnel with special knowledge and experience of hydraulic equipment.

Safety instructions governing specific operational phases Standard operation

During start-up and shut-down procedures always watch the indicators in accordance with the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Before setting the machine in motion, make sure that nobody is at risk.

Before starting work or travelling with the machine, check that braking, signalling and lighting systems are fully functional.

Before setting the machine in motion always check that the accessories have been safely stowed away.

In conditions of poor visibility and after dark always switch on the lighting system.

Persons accopanying the operator must be seated on the passenger seat provided for this purpose.

When crossing underpasses and bridges or when passing under overhead lines always make sure that there is sufficient clearance.

Always keep a distance from the working face and from slopes.

Avoid any operation that might be a risk to machine stability.

Never travel across slopes; always keep the working equipment and the load close to the ground, especially when travelling downhill.

On sloping terrain always adapt your travelling speed to the prevailing ground conditions.

Before leaving the operator's seat always secure the machine against inadvertent movement and unauthorized use. Shut off the engines.

Avoid any operational mode that might be prejudicial to safety.

Before beginning work, familiarize yourself with the surroundings and circumstances of the site, such as obstacles in the working area and the bearing capacity of the soil.

Take the necessary precautions to ensure that the machine is in a safe and reliable state.

Operate the machine only if all protective and safety-oriented devices, such as removable safety devices, emergency shut-off equipment, soundproofing elements and exhausters, are in place and fully functional.

Check the machine at least once per working shift for obvious damage and defects. Report any changes (incl. changes in the machine's working behaviour) to the competent organization/person immediately. If necessary, stop the machine immediately and lock it.

1-7

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction Special work in conjunction with utilization of the machine and maintenance and repairs as well as troubleshooting during work; disposal of parts and consumables Observe the adjusting, maintenance and inspection activities and intervals set out in the Operation and Maintenance Manual, including information on the replacement of parts and equipment.

These activities may be executed by skilled personnel only.

Brief operating personnel before beginning special operations and maintenance work, and appoint a person to supervise the activities.

In any work concerning the operation, conversion or adjustment of the machine and its safetyoriented devices or any work related to maintenance, inspection and repair, always observe the start-up and shut-down procedures set out in the Operation and Maintenance Manual and the information on maintenance work.

Ensure that the maintenance area is adequately secured.

If the machine is completely shut down for maintenance and repair work, it must be secured against inadvertent starting by:  removing the ignition key and  attaching a warning sign.

Carry out maintenance and repair work only if the machine is positioned on stable and level ground and has been secured against inadvertent movements.

To avoid the risk of accidents, individual parts and large assemblies being moved for replacement purposes should be carefully attached to lifting tackle and secured. Use only suitable and technically perfect lifting gear and suspension systems with adequate lifting capacity. Never work or stand under suspended loads.

The fastening of loads and the instructing of crane operators should be entrusted to experienced persons only. The marshaller giving the instructions must be within sight or sound of the operator.

For carrying out overhead assembly work always use specially designed or otherwise safetyoriented ladders and working platforms. Never use machine parts as a climbing aid Wear a safety harness when carrying out maintenance work at heights above 1 m.

Wear an approved harness equipped with fall arresters and safety lines.

1-8

Keep all handles, steps, handrails, platforms, landings and ladders free from dirt, snow and ice.

Clean the machine, especially connections and threaded unions, of any traces of oil, fuel or preservatives before carrying out maintenance/repair.

Never use aggressive detergents. Use lint-free cleaning rags.

Before cleaning the machine with water, steam jet (high-pressure cleaning) or detergents, cover or tape up all openings which - for safety and functional reasons - must be protected against water, steam or detergent penetration. Special care must be taken with electric motors and switch-gear cabinets.

Ensure during cleaning of the machine that the temperature sensors of the fire-warning and firefighting systems do not come into contact with hot cleaning agents as this might activate the firefighting system.

Exhaust pipes and turbo chargers in the engine compartments are covered with special heatinsulating material. This material must not be spray-washed with steam-jet cleaners or highpressure cleaners. It will be damaged. Therefore cover all the insulating material with plastic foils before using steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure cleaners inside the engine compartments.

After cleaning remove all covers and tapes applied for that purpose.

After cleaning, examine all fuel, lubricant, brake and hydraulic fluid lines for leaks, loose connections, chafe marks and damage. Any defect found must be rectified without delay.

Always tighten any screwed connections that have been loosened during maintenance and repair.

Any safety devices removed for set-up, maintenance or repair purposes must be refitted and checked immediately upon completion of maintenance and repair work.

Ensure that all consumables and replaced parts are disposed of safely and with minimum environmental impact.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction Warning of special dangers

Gas, dust, steam and smoke

Electric energy

Always start and operate the engine in a wellvented area;

Use only original fuses with the specified current rating. Switch off the machine immediately if trouble occurs in the electrical system.

When working with the machine, maintain a safe distance from overhead electric lines. If work is to be carried out close to overhead lines, the working equipment must be kept well away from them.

Caution, danger! Check out the prescribed safety distances.

If your machine comes into contact with a live wire  do not leave the machine  drive the machine out of the hazard zone; warn others against approaching and touching the machine  have the live wire de-energized  do not leave the machine until the damaged or contacted line has been safely de-energized.

The electrical equipment of machines is to be inspected and checked at regular intervals. Defects such as loose connections or scorched cables must be rectified immediately.

High-voltage system Floodlamps equipped with gaz discharge lamps require a high-voltage supply (ca. 25 kV).

If in an enclosed area, vent the exhaust to the outside; Do not modify or tamper with the exhaust system Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm Operate fuel-operated heating systems only on adequately ventilated premises. Before starting the machine on enclosed premises, make sure that there is sufficient ventilation.

Observe the regulations in force at the respective site.

Carry out welding, flame-cutting and grinding work on the machine only if this has been expressly authorized, as there may be a risk of explosion and fire.

Before carrying out welding, flame-cutting and grinding operations, clean the machine and its surroundings from dust and other inflammable substances and make sure that the premises are adequately ventilated (risk of explosion).

CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning Diesel fuel and Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constituents are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm.

The high voltage is generated by a ballast unit.

Switch off the electrical system of the excavator before touching the lamp or the ballast unit.

Battery Warning! Battery Posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to cause cancer and reproductive harm. Wash hands after handling.

1-9

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction Hydraulic equipment

Ether

Check all lines, hoses and screwed connections regularly for leaks and obvious damage. Repair damage immediately. Splashed oil may cause injury and fire.

The machine can be equipped with pressure vessels for cold-starting fluid (ether) installed in the engine compartment. Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage. Protect the vessels against damage and high temperatures.

Depressurize all system sections and pressure pipes (hydraulic system) to be removed in accordance with the specific instructions for the unit concerned before carrying out any repair work.

Hydraulic lines must be laid and fitted properly.

Ensure that no connections are interchanged. The fittings, lengths and quality of the hoses must comply with the technical requirements.

Noise During operation, all sound baffles of the machine must be closed.

Always wear the prescribed ear protectors.

Oil, grease and other chemical substances When handling oil, grease or other chemical substances, observe the product-related safety regulations (see safety specifications).

Be careful when handling hot consumables (risk of burning or scalding).

Do not store pressure vessels with cold-starting fluid (ether) on the excavator.

Do not eat, drink or smoke when replacing pressure vessels with cold-starting fluid (ether). Observe the instructions on the pressure vessels.

Provide for sufficient ventilation (see also Part 3 "Inspection and servicing").

Do not open empty cold-starting fluid pressure vessels (ether). Have the vessels disposed of properly.

For further details please refer to the instructions and safety data-sheets of the manufacturer / supplier of pressure vessels with cold starting fluid (ether).

Transporting and recommissioning The machine must be loaded and transported only in accordance with the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Use only appropriate means of transport and lifting gear of adequate capacity.

The recommisioning procedure must be strictly in accordance with the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

1-10

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD Prior to commencing work, obtain informationon the national and corporate rules for the prevention of accidents and avoiding fires.

Pay particular attention to hazards caused by combustible and easily flammable substances.

Obtain information on the safe handling of the fire extinguishers to be used.

Avoid smoking and open fire on, next to and below the excavator.

Place suitable fire guardings (fire barriers) if open fire or flying sparks cannot be avoided during repair work.

Apply special protection to cables, cable ducts as well as to hose and pipe lines.

If necessary, also cover the ground with fireprotective blankets.

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether). Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Combustible and easily flammable substances or liquids increase the fire and explosion hazard.

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Do not store or transport flammable substances on the excavator during the work. This is also valid for pressure vessels containing flammable substances as, for instance, spray oil or cold-starting fluid (ether). They are heat-sensitive and can explode even if exposed only to intensive sunlight.

Do not keep any fire extinguishers that are not suitable or have not been tested.

Clean the excavator carefully, if oil, grease, fuel, detergents or cold-starting fluid have been spilt over the machine. If possible, use a steam-jet cleaner for cleaning.



carbon-dioxide or



foam extinguishing compounds.

These substance can also ignite themselves if they come close to hot units or objects as, for instance, a turbocharger.

Even battery gases can ignite in open flames or fire.

Avoid parking the excavator in places where  combustible substances such as coal dust or tar are present. 

Clean the excavator before starting a job.

Do not extinguish flammable liquids with water.

Use:  dry-powder,

When getting into contact with burning substances, the fire-fighting water would abruptly evaporate and distribute the substance such as oil over a wide area. Water causes short-circuits in the electrical system thus possibly entailing new hazards.

Call the fire brigade.

Have all your welding, flame cutting and grinding work approved.

open or smouldering fire may occur.

Remove the excavator from such an area where combustible or easily flammable liquids have spilled from the excavator onto the ground.

Flying sparks (caused by welding, flame cutting, grinding, electrical short-circuit) may cause fire on the ground that can spread to the excavator.

1-11

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction

This page intentionally left blank.

1-12

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction NOTES ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................

1-13

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Introduction

This page intentionally left blank.

1-14

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation 2 OPERATION Operation and Maintenance Manual

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Part 6 INDEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

2-1

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

This page intentionally left blank.

2-2

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation OPERATION - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Operation and Maintenance Manual Never operate the machine before having read and understood the Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Safety belt For machines with a safety belt for operating personnel: Check the safety belt attached to the operator's seat. In the event of damage or after an accident, have it replaced immediately.

Apply the safety belt before starting work.

Pay special attention to: the "Fundamental Safety Instructions" and to all warning and instruction signs attached to the machine.

Familiarize yourself with the layout, the functioning and the sense of actuation of the control elements prior to starting up the machine.

Activate the control elements from the operator's seat only.

Keep the Operation and Maintenance Manual with the machine at all times.

Operating personnel The operating personnel must be fully informed of the operation and application of this or comparable machines.

The necessary know-how can be acquired in several days' instruction, e.g. by an CGM HMS GmbH mechanic or by attending an CGM HMS GmbH operator's training course.

Personal protective gear and working clothing Wear a safety helmet and working footwear with non-slip soles. Smooth soles may slip from steps and pedals resulting in injury or incorrect operation.

Wear closely fitting working clothing when operating the machine. Loose, wide garments may result in control levers being inadvertently activated

State of the machine Operate the machine only in a safe state and only in accordance with its designated use. Always observe the safety instructions.

Always have inspection and maintenance work carried out on schedule.

Operate the machine only with the equipment and component combinations approved by CGM HMS GmbH. Clear-cut data are given in the technical specification.

Never install and commission other equipment and component combinations without CGM HMS GmbH having first inspected and approved the project.

Before starting work or travelling with the machine, check that the braking, signalling and lighting systems are fully functional.

Poor visibility may result in accidents. Always clean the windows and the glass covers of all lamps before starting the machine.

Check that all warning and instruction signs attached to the machine are present and legible.

Entering and leaving the machine Always face the machine when entering or leaving it.

Use only the ladders, steps, platforms and grab handles provided when entering and leaving the machine.

Always maintain a three point contact with the steps and grab handles.

Always keep ladders, steps and platforms in a non-slip, safe state and remove any oil, grease, soil, snow, ice and other foreign matter immediately.

Hazard range The hazard range is that zone around the machine in which persons are within reach of loads or attachments falling as a result of operational movements by the machine, of its equipment and attachments or of swinging loads.

2-3

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Persons within the hazard zone Always use the horn to warn persons in the immediate vicinity of the machine before starting up the machine.

Ensure that no one sets foot in the hazard zone of the machine. Interrupt work until such persons have left the hazard zone.

Marshallers

Operation and Maintenance Manual, where to store it in the operator’s cab One copy of the Operation and Maintenance Manual for the machine must be available in the operator’s cab during operation.

Replace Operation and Maintenance Manual if lost, damaged or unreadeable.

The binder with the Operation and Maintenance Manual can be stored in the tray (Fig. 2-1:).

The marshaller must keep outside the hazard zone.

Have a marshaller to assist you: 

when you have no clear overview over the hazard zone of the machine,



when reversing,



when shunting.

Use only those communication signals which you and the marshaller understand, or use aids for communication (e.g. walkie-talkie/camera).

Calls cannot be understood by the marshaller because of the noise made by the machine during operation.

Keep in constant contact with the marshaller.

Stop the machine immediately if you lose contact with the marshaller.

Securing the machine Secure the machine as described under "Securing the machine" before: 

mounting or dismantling the attachment,



parking the machine after daily operation,



carrying out any servicing or repair work.

2-4

Fig. 2-1:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD Safety instructions Prior to commencing work, obtain informationon the national and corporate rules for the prevention of accidents and avoiding fires.

Pay particular attention to hazards caused by combustible and easily flammable substances.

Obtain information on the safe handling of the fire extinguishers to be used.

Avoid smoking and open fire on, next to and below the excavator.

Combustible and easily or highly inflammable substances or liquids increase the risk of fire and explosion Do not store or transport flammable substances on the excavator during the work. This is also valid for pressure vessels containing flammable substances as, for instance, spray oil or cold-starting fluid (ether). They are heat-sensitive and can explode even if exposed only to intensive sunlight.

Remove the excavator from such an area where combustible or easily flammable liquids have spilled from the excavator onto the ground.

Flying sparks (caused by welding, flame cutting, grinding, electrical short-circuit) may cause fire on the ground that can spread to the excavator.

Clean the excavator before starting work.

Place suitable fire guardings (fire barriers) if open fire or flying sparks cannot be avoided during repair work.

If necessary, also cover the ground with fireprotective blankets.

Apply special protection to cables, cable ducts as well as to hose and pipe lines.

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether). Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Clean the excavator carefully, if oil, grease, fuel, detergents or cold-starting fluid have been spilt over the machine. If possible, use a steam-jet cleaner for cleaning.

Do not keep any fire extinguishers that are not suitable or have not been tested.

These substance can also ignite themselves if they come close to hot units or objects as, for instance, a turbocharger.



Clean rubber or electrical with compressed air only.

When getting into contact with burning substances, the fire-fighting water would abruptly evaporate and distribute the substance such as oil over a wide area. Water causes short-circuits in the electrical system thus possibly entailing new hazards.

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Even battery gases can ignite in open flames or fire.

Avoid parking the excavator in places where 

combustible substances such as coal dust or tar are present.



open or smouldering fire may occur.

Do not extinguish flammable liquids with water.

Use: dry-powder, carbon-dioxide or foam extinguishing compounds.

Call the fire brigade.

Have all your welding, flame cutting and grinding work approved before starting work.

2-5

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation DESCRIPTION OF THE EXCAVATOR

Fig. 2-2:

2-6

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Excavator layout Fig. 2-2:

Undercarriage 1 – Track drive 2 – Idler 3 – Track roller 4 – Support roller 5 – Crawler track 6 – Track tensioner 7 – Swing ring 8 – Emergency ladder

Superstructure 11 – Engine 12 – Radiator (engine cooling liquid) 13 – Air-intake system 14 – Exhaust system 15 – Fuel Tank 16 – Engine oil reservoir (optional) 17 – Hydraulic oil reservoir 18 – Hydraulic oil cooler 19 – Reservoir (engine cooling liquid) 20 – Pump drive gearbox

38 - Service-station (tank lift) 39 – On-board crane (optional) 40 – Energy station for on-board crane (optional) 44 – Grease container of central lubricating system 45 – Tool cabinet (optional) 46 – Hydraulic ladder 47 – Ladder 48 – Control cabinet 50 – Counterweight 52 – 54 Ladder

Loading bucket 61 – Boom 62 - TriPower linkage 63 – Stick 64 - Bottom-dump bucket 65 - Boom cylinder 66 - Stick cylinder 67 - Tipping cylinder 68 - Bottom-dump cylinder 74 - Control valves 75 - Quick-action valve

21 – Working pump 22 – Swing pump

Backhoe bucket

23 – Servo system pump

63 - Stick

24 – Gearbox circulating pump

65 - Boom cylinder

25 – Filling pump (swing circuit)

66 - Stick cylinder

26 – Fan drive pump (engine radiator)

69 - Monoblock boom

27 – Pump for fan drive and hydraulic oil cooling

70 - Backhoe bucket

28 – Air conditioner (inside cab)

71 - Backhoe cylinder

29 – Swing gear

72 - Toggle link

30 – Travel block and rotor

73 - Toggle lever

31 – Operator's cab

74 - Control valves

32 – Control column

75 - Quick-action valve

33 – Control-cabinet with CMS 34 – 24Volt control-cabinet 35 – Fire-extinguisher 37 – Batteries

2-7

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Undercarriage The undercarriage of the hydraulic excavator serves as a stable base and for travelling. The crawler tracks are driven hydraulically with oil motors and travel gearboxes. Undercarriage and superstructure are connected by means of a swing ring.

Superstructure The superstructure accommodates the drive and part of the hydraulic and electrical equipment.

Drive unit The drive unit comprises diesel engines, pump drive gearboxes, hydraulic pumps, hydraulic cylinders and hydraulic motors.

Hydraulic system All working and travelling movements are performed hydraulically. The movements are controlled by servovalves. The working commands are initiated by hand and transmitted to the valves via control circuits. The oil supply from the superstructure to the undercarriage is ensured by the rotor.

The hydraulic system is overload-protected by pressure-relief valves. The hydraulic pumps are supplied with oil from a hydraulic reservoir.

2-8

Control and Monitoring Platform (CAMP) The electronic CAMP system ensures the control and monitoring of all electrical and hydraulical functions of the excavator.

Four interconnected electronic units ensure optimal use of the installed engine power. Microprocessors are used to adapt the power output of the hydraulic pumps optimally to actual operating conditions. The machine is thus prevented from demanding more hydraulic power than the diesel engines can provide.

The desired working movements are detected by microcontrollers which permanently sense the position of hand levers and pedals.

As soon as movement is detected, the corresponding signals are transmitted to the electronic units. These units activate the drive control in order to provide the hydraulic energy needed for working. Only then do they activate the electrohydraulic valves which control the execution of the working movements.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Board-Control-System (BCS) The BCS is a micro-processor-controlled system for the acquisition and processing of measuring data.

It's function consists in collecting data of the excavator operating conditions and to evaluate, store and display these data to the excavator operator.

For this purpose, the BCS is connected via a bus system to the Control and Monitoring Platform (CAMP). An interface with the outside world ensures the transfer of stored data and software updating.

The measured values (actual values) from the sensors and transducers installed in the excavator are compared to the predefined reference values. Inadmissible deviations are indicated as fault messages on a display screen. Sensor or transducer defects or defective connecting cables are detected and indicated by plain-text messages.

The data from the engine electronics are acquired, processed and displayed in the same way.

Critical states of operation are brought to the operator's attention by means of optical and acoustic warning signals.

The display screen of the BCS is a touch-screen with a surface sensitive to the touch. This feature supports the excavator operator or the service technician in navigating through the menus of the BCS sorftware.

For further information in this respect, please refer to section 5 in this Operation and Maintenance Manual or to the brochure "Board-Control-System – Operation and Maintenance Manual"

Demand control / Zero-flow regulation In the fine-control range, swivelling of the hydraulic pumps, and thus the variation of oil flow, are proportional to control lever and pedal valve travel. This means that during the work, the pumps supply only as much hydraulic oil as required to perform the working movement. In the neutral position of the control levers, the pumps are automatically swivelled to zeroflow.

These special features offer the following advantages: 

reduced fuel consumption



minimum power losses



reduced temperature of the hydraulic oil



greater service life of hydraulic pumps and diesel engines.

Automatic reset to idling If no servovalves are actuated by the control pedals or levers for more than 8 seconds (factory-set value, adjustable), the engine is automatically set back to idling speed (factory setting ca. 1000 rpm, adjustable). This feature, too, contributes to reducing the fuel consumption.

Electrical system The electrical system operates on 24 volts.

2-9

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Signs Warning and instruction signs Observe the warning and instruction signs attached to the machine.

Keep all the signs legible and clean.

Replace signs immediately if they have become illegible.

New warning and instruction signs can be ordered from the CGM HMS GmbH Spare Parts Service.

The ordering part numbers are set out in the spareparts list of the machine.

Fig. 2-3: - Fig. 2-8: show the location of warning and instruction signs on the machine.

2-10

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-3:

2-11

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-4:

2-12

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-5:

2-13

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-6:

2-14

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-7:

2-15

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-8:

2-16

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Machine number

Engine serial number

The identification plate with the machine number (Fig. 2-10:) is attached to the front side of the Aframe (arrow, Fig. 2-9:).

The serial number plate (arrow, Fig. 2-11:) for the diesel engines are located on the diesel engines.

Fig. 2-9: Fig. 2-11:

Engine Information Plate The Information Plate is on the left side top surface of the cylinder block in front of the front cylinder head (arrow, Fig. 2-11:).

Fig. 2-10:

Fig. 2-12:

Component numbers Other larger units also have identification plates indicating, among other things, their serial number.

On steel components, the CGM HMS GmbH part number or the serial number may be stamped into the metal at a clearly visible place.

2-17

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Entering and leaving the machine, Safety instructions Clean off oil, grease, soil, mud, snow, ice and other substances from footwear, grab handles, ladders and steps.

Keep ladders, steps, platforms and grab handles in a non-slippery condition.

Access ladder lighting The access ladder of the machine can be illuminated.

From outside: The pull-switch (2, Fig. 2-14:) of the lighting system is located beneath the superstructure. The lights are switched on from the ground by means of the pull-rope.

Risk of injury due to slipping.

From the cab: The switch is located besides the door (arrow, Fig. 2-15:).

For entering and leaving use only the ladders, steps, platforms and grab handles provided (see: illustration in Fig. 2-13:).

The lighting remains on during a presettable ON time. The ON time of the lighting is factory-adjusted to three minutes.

Always face the machine when entering or leaving it.

Always maintain a three point contact with the steps and the grab handles.

Fig. 2-14:

Fig. 2-13:

Fig. 2-15:

2-18

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Swinging ladder

Lowering the swinging ladder (from the upper carriage)

Raising resp. lowering the swinging ladder (Fig. 2-16:).

 Start engine.  Push lever (1, Fig. 2-17:) on control valve (2) downwards to position “ II “.

The swinging ladder is lowered (Fig. 2-16:).

The swinging ladder can also be lowered when the engine ist stopped.

Fig. 2-16:

Raising the swinging ladder (from the upper carriage)  Start engine.  Pull lever (1, Fig. 2-17:) on control valve (2) upwards to position “ I “.

The swinging ladder is raised (Fig. 2-18:).

Fig. 2-18:

Lowering the swinging ladder (from the bottom)  Pull down rope (3, Fig. 2-19:).

The swinging ladder is lowered (Fig. 2-16:).

Fig. 2-17:

The upper carriage can only be swung when the folding ladder is raised completely (Fig. 2-18:).

Fig. 2-19:

2-19

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Folding ladder (optional) Raising resp. lowering the folding ladder (Fig. 2-20:).

Lowering the folding ladder (from the upper carriage)  Start engine.  Push lever (1, Fig. 2-21:) on control valve (2) downwards to position “ II “.

The folding ladder is lowered (Fig. 2-20:).

The folding ladder can also be lowered when the engine is stopped.

Fig. 2-20:

Raising the folding ladder (from the upper carriage)  Start engine.  Pull lever (1, Fig. 2-21:) on control valve (2) upwards to position “ I “.

The folding ladder is raised (Fig. 2-17:).

Fig. 2-22:

Lowering the folding ladder (from the bottom)  Pull down rope (3, Fig. 2-23:).

The folding ladder is lowered (Fig. 2-20:).

Fig. 2-21:

The upper carriage can only be swung when the folding ladder is raised completely (Fig. 2-22:).

2-20

Fig. 2-23:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Emergency exit in operator’s cab and escape ladder The sliding window (arrow, Fig. 2-24:) on the lefthand side of the operator’s cab serves as an alternative opening / emergency exit.

To open the sliding window from inside the cab:  Lift latch (1).  Grasp handle (2) and slide window pane to the left.

The escape ladder (arrow, Fig. 2-25:) is located beside the operator´s cab.

Function of ladder locking as well as free movement of the ladder must be regularly checked according to the maintenance plans.

Before unlocking the ladder: Be sure that no person is near to the position the ladder moves to.

Fig. 2-25:

 Kick down locking lever (1, Fig. 2-26:). The escape ladder is now unlocked and moves down quickly to the ground.  Swing barrier (2, Fig. 2-26:) to the right and use the ladder to escape downwards.

Fig. 2-26:

Fig. 2-24:

2-21

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Switching the cab interior lighting on and off The cab interior lighting can be switched on and off with the switches (arrow, Fig. 2-27:), (96, Fig. 2-28:) and (arrow, Fig. 2-29:) The cab interior light is supplied with power even when the electrical system is shut down.

When leaving the machine, the interior light must therefore be switched off. The batteries could be discharged if the interior light is allowed to remain on for a prolonged period.

Fig. 2-27:

Fig. 2-28:

Fig. 2-29:

2-22

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Switching the maintenance lights on and off The maintenance lights in the various modules can be activated from a central point with the switches (arrow, Fig. 2-30:) or (95, Fig. 2-31:).

The invidual modules are also equipped with switches, for example the engine module: Switch at the switchgear cabinet behind the hydraulic oil reservoir (1, Fig. 2-32:).

Fig. 2-30:

Fig. 2-31:

Fig. 2-32:

2-23

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Emergency shut-off function The emergency shut-off function can be triggered from six different places on the machine:

Emergency shut off switch in the operator’s cab

 by pressing the switch (red) on the front panel of the control column (35, Fig. 2-33:),  by pressing the switch (red) on the drive regulators on the right-hand and on the left-hand side (Fig. 2-34:),  by pressing the switch (red) on the control cabinet in the engine module (Fig. 2-35:),  by pulling the pull-switch below the counterweight on the left (5, Fig. 2-36:),  by pressing the switch (red) on the control box at the Servicestation (Fig. 2-37:).

The emergency shut-off function disconnects all power outputs of the electronic control units. In this case, all engines are shut off and all valves are deenergized so that no working movements can be performed anymore.

Fig. 2-33:

Emergency shut off switch at the engine compartments

The power supply of the electronic control units of the engines (ECM) and of the machine (BCS, PLC) is, however, not interrupted. For this reason, the monitoring functions continue to remain active.

Other auxiliary functions such as:  the fire extinguishing system,  the service station (tank-lift) and,  the radio, the cab interior lighting and the access ladder lighting remain functional as well.

The emergency shut-off function can also be triggered before maintenance operations are performed on the machine. For this purpose, one of the switches is depressed and secured with a padlock. Any inadvertent starting of the engine is thus prevented.

Fig. 2-34:

Emergency shut off switch on the control cabinet engine module

(continued next page)

Fig. 2-35:

2-24

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Emergency shut off switches (continued) Emergency shut off pull switch between left fuel tank and counterweight

Putting the machine back into operation, reset of emergency shut off function The machine can only be put back into operation when all switches listed above are again in their basic position (i.e. not actuated).

Additionally the Reset button (arrow, Fig. 2-38:) has to be pushed. The Reset button is located in the front door of the 24Volt-control cabinet in the cab module.

Fig. 2-36:

Emergency shut off switch on the Servicestation (tanklift) Fig. 2-38:

Fig. 2-37:

2-25

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Battery isolator switch, shutting off supply voltage The battery isolator switch (1, Fig. 2-40:) is located inside the control cabinet on the deck of the engine module (Fig. 2-39:).

The supply voltage is shut off when the battery isolator switch has been turned to position “OFF”.

This function shuts off the complete electrical system of the machine by disconnecting the two poles from the batteries (battery main switch).

In this case, all engines are shut off so that no working movements can be performed anymore.

The power supply of the electronic control units of the engines and of the machine is shut off after a brief delay. The delay ensures that the current operating data can be saved and the systems shut down properly.

Lock the battery isolator switch in position “OFF” by means of a padlock.

The machine can only be put back into operation when the battery isolator switch is unlocked and switched in the “ON” position. A green LED located near the switch comes on.

Fig. 2-39:

Starter isolator switch, shutting off starter voltage The starter isolator switch (2, Fig. 2-41:) is located inside the control cabinet on the deck of the engine module (Fig. 2-39:).

After turning the “Starter Isolator” switch to position “OFF” the engines could not be started.

All other sections of the electrical system are supplied with voltage.

Fig. 2-40:

This is to ensure personal safety during testing and trouble shooting purposes.

Lock the starter isolator switch in position “OFF” by means of a padlock.

The engines can only be put back into operation when the starter isolator switch is unlocked and switched into the “ON” position. A green LED located near the switch comes on.

Fig. 2-41:

2-26

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Operator’s seat The operator’s seat (Fig. 2-42: and Fig. 2-43:) can be adjusted in several positions.

Never adjust the seat while driving. Concentrate on the road to avoid accidents.

Before carrying out any seat adjustments stop the machine and set the control levers to "0"

Fig. 2-42:

2-27

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-43:

2-28

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Reducing operators exposure to vibrations Vibrations, oscillations and movements of the machine cannot be avoided when the machine is in operation. They also have an effect on the operator.

Windscreen washer The fluid reservoir (1, Fig. 2-45:) of the windscreen washer is located in the cab module. The capacity of the reservoir is indicated under "Refilling quantities - Other".

These effects on the operator can however be avoided, if the operator's seat is adjusted correctly.

Therefore, make use of the seat's various adjustment features (see Fig. 2-42: and Fig. 2-43:): 

shock absorption (Absorber),



body weight setting (Weight adjustment),



horizontal movement damping (Fore/aft isolator).

Adjust the seat before beginning work to suit your personal requirements. Check whether all adjustments are functional. If this is not possible, have the seat checked and repaired as soon as possible.

Fig. 2-45:

Trainer's / instructor's seat For operator training / instructing purposes it is often required that a trainer / instructor accompanies the operator in the cab.

For the safety of the trainer / instructor during excavator operation the cab is equipped with a second seat. This seat is installed behind the operator's seat (Fig. 2-44:).  Sit down on this seat and do not forget to fasten the seat-belt, if installed (arrow, Fig. 2-44:).  Do not leave this seat during the training / instruction session and /or as long as the machine is in operation.

Operating hours meter Three operating hours meters (Fig. 2-46:) are located in the left front door of the “24 Volts switchgear cabinet” in the cab module.

1

LH engine hours meter

2

RH engine hours meter

3

Travel hours meter

Fig. 2-46: Fig. 2-44:

2-29

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Fire extinguisher

Handling

The excavator is equipped with two fire extinguishers (arrow Fig. 2-47:).

Fig. 2-48: Fig. 2-47:

The excavator operator and the maintenance personnel must inform themselves about how to handle the fire-extinguisher in order to be able to act fast and efficiently in case of beginning fires. Such instruction should be given by a qualified instructor.

Extinguishing agent Each fire-extinguisher is filled with 12 kg (26.4 lb) Glutex. This extinguishing agent is used for fighting fires of classes A, B and C. Fires are extinguished fast, perfectly and without residues.

2-30

 Pull out securing pin (2, Fig. 2-48:).  Strike knob (3) hard, then release again.  Operate the extinguishing gun.

Inspection Have the extinguisher inspected at regular intervals by an expert. This is required by local authorities and insurance companies and is in the interest of your own safety.

Have the fire-extinguisher checked at the prescribed intervals by authorized testing agencies.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Automatic fire-extinguishing system (optional) The automatic fire-extinguishing system prevents fire from spreading. It is, however, assumed that the machine is thoroughly cleaned of combustible and easily flammable substances.

The excavator operator and the maintenance personnel must familiarize themselves with the automatic fire-extinguishing system.

Such instruction should be given by a qualified instructor.

The fire-extinguishing system is activated automatically in an emergency.

Refill extinguishers immediately after use ready for further deployment.

Inspection Have the extinguishing system inspected regularly by an expert. This is required by authorities and insurance companies and is in the interest of your own safety.

Have the fire-extinguishing system checked at the prescribed intervals by authorized testing agencies.

Manual activation  Pull out ring (1, Fig. 2-49:) on activating unit for the corresponding extinguishing circuit.  Strike knob (2) hard.

(Fig. 2-50:) shows an activating unit in the operators cab.

In an emergency the fire-extinguishing system is actuated automatically.

Nevertheless particular extinguishing circuit e. g. engine 1 or 2 (LH or RH) can be actuated manually.

Fig. 2-49:

Fig. 2-50:

2-31

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Harness (optional) Elements of the harness (Fig. 2-51:- Fig. 2-53:) Pos. Designation 1

Back support

2

Shoulder belt

3

Shoulder belt

4

Loop (chest belt)

5

Loop (chest belt)

6

Loop (back support)

11

Holding device

12

Fall arrester

13

Guidance line

14

Hanging up line

15

Handbag with harness

16

Snap hook

17

Hook safety device

Fig. 2-52:

Fig. 2-53:

Important hints Read and observe also: Operation and Maintenance Manual of the supplier.

Fig. 2-51:

Before using operator shall have received adequate training.

The harness must be used by one person only.

He is responsible for the appropriate use and maintenance.

Visual inspection is recommended prior to each use; if necessary it must be checked by an expert.

Harness must be checked annualy (every 12 month) by an expert.

2-32

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Taking on harness  Take harness out of handbag (15, Fig. 2-54:).

 Pull loop (6) of the back support (1) between your legs to the front (Fig. 2-56:).  Pull loop (5, Fig. 2-57:) through loop (6).

Fig. 2-54:

 Take on shoulder belts (2 and 3, Fig. 2-55:).

Fig. 2-57:

 Pull loop (4, Fig. 2-57:) through loop (5).  Press the hooking safety device (17, Fig. 2-57:) of the snap hook (16).

Fig. 2-55:

 Pull back support (1, Fig. 2-55:) behind your body (Fig. 2-56:).

The loops (4 and 5) are in front of your body.

Fig. 2-58:

Fig. 2-56:

2-33

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

 Hang up loop (4, Fig. Fig. 2-59:) into snap hook (16).

If you have the harness put on in such a way in case of danger you can escape from the excavator (Fig. Fig. 2-61:).

Fig. 2-59:

 Release hooking safety device (17, Fig. 2-60:).

Fig. 2-60:

2-34

Fig. 2-61:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

This page was intentionally left blank.

2-35

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation MONITORING, WARNING AND CONTROL ELEMENTS

Fig. 2-62:

2-36

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-62:) BCS, Board-Control-System No. 1

2

3

4

Element BCS

Function Electronic system for measured data acquisition and processing

Board Control System, acquisition and display of important operating data of the excavator

Monitor

BCS

The monitor displays collected operating data, warning messages and – if needed – instruction for help.

Push-button

Navigation in menus Control of cursor movements, program selection within the BCS, confirmation of inputs / displayed values (Enter), quitting of menus / sub-menus Numeric keypad Input of numeric values.

Push-button

Symbol

The surface of the monitor is sensitive to the touch (touch-screen technology). A touchscreen permits selecting menus and programs by touching graphic control symbols and to recall, for instance operating data of the excavator.

For further information please refer to section 5 of this Operation and Maintenance Manual, chapter “Board-Control-System”.

2-37

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-63

2-38

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-63) BCS, Board Control System, display screen example (For further information please refer to section 5 of this Operation and Maintenance Manual, chapter “BoardControl-System”).

No. 1

2

3

4 5 6

Element

Function

Status line

Indicates activated functions and operating hours.

The symbols displayed are those of the switches in the control column

Touch-screen Monitor

BCS

Indicates collected operating data graphically and / or numerically, displays warning messages, fault messages and – if needed – instructions for help.

Pushbutton

Navigation in menus

Control of cursor movements, program selection within the BCS, confirmation of inputs / displayed values (Enter), quitting of menus / sub-menus

Push-button

Numeric keypad

Input of numeric values.

Touch-screen buttons Status line

Examples Fault messages

Symbol

Displays fault messages as a code number and as plain text. The "Fault" button permits displaying further fault messages stored in the system.

2-39

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-64:

2-40

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-64:)

No.

Element

Function

Key-switch

Switches the electrical system on and off.

33

Buzzer (inside the control column)

Gives three acoustic warning signals if a fault is reported. The signals appear every 30 seconds.

34

Socket connectors

Connection of electronic devices for fault diagnosis purposes.

32

35

Switch

Emergency shut-off

Symbol

De-energizes the outputs of the electronic control units: The engines are shut off, all valves are deenergized, working movements no longer possible. (see: "Emergency shut-off function").

2-41

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-65:

2-42

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-65:)

Engine 1 (LH), control and monitoring All switches and pushbuttons have an illuminated symbol face.

The opposite side is equipped with an LED. The LED lights up when the switch / pushbutton is actuated.

No. 41

42

43

44

45

46

47

48

Element

Function

Push-button

Start

Starting of the engine. For starting, press the push-button face with the symbol.

Push-button

Stop

Stopping of the engine. For stopping, press the push-button face with the symbol.

Push-button

Idle

Stopping of the engine with an after-run delay of 5 min. For delayed stopping, press the push-button face with the symbol.

Warning lamp

Engine oil pressure

Lit up when the engine oil pressure is too low.

Warning lamp

Alternator

Lit up when the batteries are not being charged or in the event of an alternator defect.

Warning lamp

Engine oil temperature

Lit up when the engine oil temperature is too high.

Warning lamp

Cooling liquid temperature

Lit up when the engine cooling liquid temperature is too high.

Switch

Engine speed

Press switch face without symbol: the speed of the engine increases.

Symbol

Press the switch face with the symbol: the speed of the engine reduces.

49

Warning lamp

Engine monitoring

STOP! Lamp is lit up in the event of a critical fault on the left engine 1.

Shut off engine immediately.

Check the BCS display for further fault messages and give an information to the responsible service personnel immediately.

50

Warning lamp

Engine monitoring

Not used on this machine.

2-43

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-66:

2-44

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-66:)

Engine 2 (RH), control and monitoring All switches and pushbuttons have an illuminated symbol face.

The opposite side is equipped with an LED. The LED lights up when the switch / pushbutton is actuated.

No. Element Function Symbol Starting of the engine.

For starting, press the Push-button Start 51 push-button face with the symbol.

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

Push-button

Stop

Stopping of the engine. For stopping, press the push-button face with the symbol.

Push-button

Idle

Warning lamp

Engine oil pressure

Stopping of the engine with an after-run delay of 5 min. For delayed stopping, press the push-button face with the symbol..

Lit up when the engine oil pressure is too low.

Warning lamp

Alternator

Warning lamp

Engine oil temperature

Lit up when the batteries are not being charged or in the event of an alternator defect.

Lit up when the engine oil temperature is too high.

Warning lamp

Cooling liquid temperature

Lit up when the engine cooling liquid temperature is too high.

Switch

Engine speed

Press switch face without symbol: the speed of the engine increases.

Press the switch face with the symbol: the speed of the engine reduces.

Warning lamp

Engine monitoring

STOP! Lamp is lit up in the event of a critical fault on the right engine 2.

Shut off engine immediately.

Check the BCS display for further fault messages and give an information to the responsible service personnel immediately.

60

Warning lamp

Engine monitoring

Not used on this machine.

2-45

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-67:

2-46

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-67:) All switches and pushbuttons have an illuminated symbol face.

The opposite side is equipped with an LED. The LED lights up when the switch / pushbutton is actuated.

No. 61

Element Push-button

Function Superstructure holding brake

Symbol

Blocks the superstructure.

Press this button when the superstructure is stationary.

Do not use this button while the superstructure is still in motion.

Risk of damage to the brake and the swing gearboxes.

Not connected.

62 63

Switch

Excavator parking brake

Not actuated: The parking brake is applied automatically ca. 5 secs after the excavator has stopped moving.

The parking brake is released automatically when the "Travel" function is activated.

Press the switch face with the symbol: The parking brake is applied permanently.

The excavator cannot be moved.

Actuate this switch only when the excavator is stationary.

Do not use this switch while the excavator is still in motion. Risk of damage to the brakes and the travel gearboxes.

64

Push-button

Central greasing system reset

Reset function of the central greasing system control (Press for at least 3 sec.).

Press switch face without symbol: Resets the control of the superstructure.

Press the switch face with the symbol: Resets the control of the undercarriage.

65

Push-button

Emergency lowering

Lowering of the working equipment in an emergency situation. For instance, if the engines have failed.

For more information refer to chapter “Emergency lowering of the working equipment”.

66

Switch

Automatic speed reduction

Reduces the speed of the diesel engines to about 1000 min-1, if no working movement is being executed during about 8 seconds.

2-47

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-68:

2-48

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-68:) All switches and pushbuttons have an illuminated symbol face.

The opposite side is equipped with an LED. The LED lights up when the switch / pushbutton is actuated.

No. 71

72

Element

Function

Switch

Servo-control

Press the switch face with the symbol: The electro-hydraulic servo-control is enabled.

Switch

Travelling speed

Not actuated: 1st travelling stage travelling forwards / backwards is possible

Symbol

Press the switch face with the symbol: 2nd travelling stage, only parallel forward travel is possible. in case of backward travel and cornering, the machine switches back automatically into the 1st travelling stage.

Not connected.

73 74

Monitoring lamps

Engine oil interval prolongation

Not connected.

75 76

81 82 83 84 85 86

Lamp is lit up, when the right or the left pump of the prolongation system is running.

Push-button

When the machine has to be manoeuvered out of dangerous situations

Press the switch face with the symbol: The machine can be driven and the superstructure be swung although these functions are automatically deactivated.

Use this function only in dangerous situations to manouever yourself or the machine out of hazard zones. Risk of damaging parts of the machine, e.g. the hydraulic ladder or the tanklift.

Switch

Floodlamps

Switches the floodlamps on the operator´s cab on and off.

Switch

Floodlamps

Switches the floodlamps on the hydraulic oil cooler module on and off.

Switch

Floodlamps

Switches the floodlamps on the cab module on and off.

Switch

Floodlamps

Switches the floodlamps on the boomon and off.

Switch

Floodlamps rear

Switches the floodlamps on the counterweight on and off.

Switch

Not connected.

2-49

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-69:

2-50

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-69:) All switches and pushbuttons have an illuminated symbol face.

The opposite side is equipped with an LED. The LED lights up when the switch / pushbutton is actuated.

No.

Element

Function

91

Push-button

Dumper count

Press the switch face with the symbol: Resets the loaded dumper count.

92

Switch

Windscreen wiper

Press the switch face with the symbol: Windscreen wiper in intermittent operation mode.

Symbol

Press the switch face without symbol: Windscreen wiper in permanent operation mode.

93

Pushbutton

Windscreen washer

Press the switch face with the symbol: Windscreen wiper in wipe/wash operation.

94

Switch

Rotary beacon (option)

Press the switch face with the symbol: Rotary beacon ON.

95

Switch

Lighting

Press the switch face with the symbol: Switches on the maintenance lights in the modules.

96

Switch

Lighting

Press the switch face with the symbol: Switches on the lights in the operator's cab.

97

Outlet

For connecting electrical driven devices, e. g. for charging small accumulators.

Operating voltage: 12 Volts.

Maximum power output: 120 Watts.

2-51

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-70:

2-52

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-70:) No. Element 101 Push-button

(Free for options)

102 Push-button

Stick floating position (shovel equipment only)

103 Push-button

Boom floating position

104 Push-button

Warning signal

105 Push-button inside the seat

111 Pedal 112 Pedal 113 Pedal

116 Control lever

119 Push-button

120 Thumb wheel

Button is pressed: The boom cylinders are pressurized on retracting.

Press button (103) only in position "0" of control lever (116).

Button is pressed: Acoustic warning signal / horn is activated.

Electronic excavator Button in the seat.

The electronic excavator control (servocontrol (servocontrol) is activated when the operators sits control) down on the seat.

The electronic excavator control (servocontrol) is deactivated when he leaves the seat.

Shovel trap (shovel Forwards – shovel trap is opened; Backwards – shovel trap is closed. equipment only) Forwards – forward travel; Travel, left track Backwards – backward travel.

Forwards – forward travel; Travel, right track Backwards – backward travel.

114 Footrest 115 Control lever

117 Push-button 118 Thumb wheel

Function Symbol Can be used as a push-to-speak button on a radio, or to switch over from one camera to another one.

Button is pressed: The stick cylinders are pressurized on retracting.

Press button (102) only in position "0" of control lever (115).

Shovel trap (shovel equipment only)

By-pass for the automatically switch off for stickand /or backhoe cylinders (Option)

Forwards – raising the stick Backwards – lowering the stick.

To the left / right – swinging and braking of the superstructure.

Forwards – lowering the boom; Backwards – raising the boom.

To the left – backwards tipping of shovel / bucket; To the right – dumping of shovel / bucket.

Not used on this machine.

Turn Forwards – shovel trap is opened; Turn Backwards – shovel trap is closed.

Function can be overridden by Pedal 111.

(Thumb wheel is spring centered).

Lower half pushed – automatically stopped stick- and/or backhoe cylinders can be driven slowly to the limit stopps.

Upper half pushed – Each press on the button increments the loaded dumper count for by "1". (Count reset with button (91)).

Not used on this machine.

2-53

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-71:

2-54

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-71:) (Engine 1 (left) monitoring) Function

No.

Element

121

Monitoring device

Engine monitoring Indicates different parameters on the display (E) (engine 1 left) Use push buttons (C and D) to scroll through parameter list.

Indicator lamps (A and B) lit when an active fault occurs.

122

Thermometer

Engine temperature (engine 1 left)

123

Pressure gauge

Engine oil pressure Indicates the oil pressure in the diesel engine lubricating system. (engine 1 left)

124

Warning device

Engine monitoring (engine 1 left)

Symbol

Indicates the cooling-water temperature.

Gives an acoustic warning signal if a fault is reported, e.g. 

Engine oil pressure too low,



Engine temperature too high.

Lower the equipment to the ground and shut off engine immediately if the warning device (124) sounds. The warning device (124) continues to sound until the fault has been rectified.

Lits up when engine is in idle phase.

125

Indicator lamp

Idle (engine 1 left)

126

Warning lamp

Cooling water level Lits up when the cooling-water level is too low. (engine 1 left)

127

Warning lamp

Alternator (engine 1 left)

Lits up when the batteries are not recharged.

2-55

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-72:

2-56

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-72:) (Engine 2 (right) monitoring) Function

No.

Element

131

Monitoring device

Engine monitoring Indicates different parameters on the display (E) (engine 2 right) Use push buttons (C and D) to scroll through parameter list.

Indicator lamps (A and B) lit when an active fault occurs.

132

Thermometer

Engine temperature (engine 2 right)

133

Pressure gauge

Engine oil pressure Indicates the oil pressure in the diesel engine lubricating system. (engine 2 right)

134

Warning device

Engine monitoring (engine 2 right)

Symbol

Indicates the cooling-water temperature.

Gives an acoustic warning signal if a fault is reported, e.g. 

Engine oil pressure too low,



Engine temperature too high.

Lower the equipment to the ground and shut off engine immediately if the warning device (134) sounds. The warning device (134) continues to sound until the fault has been rectified.

Lits up when engine is in idle phase.

135

Indicator lamp

Idle (engine 2 right)

136

Warning lamp

Cooling water level Lits up when the cooling-water level is too low. (engine 2 right)

137

Warning lamp

Alternator (engine 2 right)

Lits up when the batteries are not recharged.

2-57

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-73:

2-58

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-73:)

Optional equipment: Auxiliary heating; Fuel Pre-heating (Depending on the options ordered with the machine, the described elements can be found on different positions on the control column).

Nr. 140 141 142 143 144

Funksjon

Element Switch Switch Switch Switch Switch

Auxiliary heating (option) Auxiliary heating blower (option) Auxiliary heating (option) Fuel Pre-heating (option) Fuel Pre-heating (option)

Symbol

Auxiliary heating for operator's cab ON / OFF. Blower levels 1,2,3.

Auxiliary heating for operator's cab ON / OFF. Automatic regulation.

Switches the fuel pre-heating function of RH engine on and off.

Switches the fuel pre-heating function of LH engine on and off.

2-59

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-74:

2-60

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-74:)

Optional equipment: Air conditioning (Depending on the options ordered with the machine, the described elements can be found on different positions on the control column).

No. 150 151 152

Function

Element

Blower levels 1,2,3.

Knob

Blower of air conditioner Thermostat

Rotary switch

Selector

Selects the following functions: heating, cooling, ventilation, defrosting.

Rotary switch

Symbol

Presetting of desired temperature.

2-61

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Fig. 2-75:

2-62

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation (Fig. 2-75:)

Optional equipment: Air filter monitoring (Depending on the options ordered with the machine, the described elements can be found on different positions on or near the control column).

Function

No.

Element

191

Underpressure gauge

Air filters (left engine 1, outside)

192

Underpressure gauge

Air filters (left engine 1, inside)

193

Underpressure gauge

Air filters (right engine 2, outside)

194

Underpressure gauge

Air filters (right engine 2, inside)

Symbol

Indicates the underpressure in the air filters.

Underpressure must be less than 25 inches (635 mm) water column.

Otherwise clean / replace the filterelement.

Indicates the underpressure in the air filters.

Underpressure must be less than 25 inches (635 mm) water column.

Otherwise clean / replace the filterelement.

Indicates the underpressure in the air filters.

Underpressure must be less than 25 inches (635 mm) water column.

Otherwise clean / replace the filterelement.

Indicates the underpressure in the air filters.

Underpressure must be less than 25 inches (635 mm) water column.

Otherwise clean / replace the filterelement.

2-63

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation PUTTING THE MACHINE INTO OPERATION

Reducing the operator's exposure to noise

Before daily start-up, carry out works in accordance with servicing plan T (see: Part 3 "Inspection and servicing")

All noise protection devices of the machine must be in place and fully functional when the machine is in operation.

Increased fire and explosion hazard will exist.

Prior to your daily start-up, make sure the machine has been cleaned of combustible and easily flammable substances.

e.g. 

doors, flaps and cover of the engine compartments must be closed,



access doors to the compartments of the radiator fans must not be left open,



the cab door must be closed,



the exhaust silencer must be checked for holes,



the screwed conections of all components fastend with bolts must be checked for tightness. Loose components tend to vibrate and to rattle, thus increasing the noise level.

Wear ear protectors when leaving the operator's cab with the engines on and running.

2-64

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Refuelling Refuelling - Safety instructions

Back-up heating (option), filling in fuel

Fuels and fuel gases are inflammable.

 The fuel reservoir for the back-up heating system is located in the module below the operator’s cab (Fig. 2-76:).

Avoid open flames and stop smoking.

 Fill in clean fuel through the filler neck.

Explosion hazard. Risk of fire.

Fuel may cause skin injury. Wear protective gloves or use a barrier cream.

Stand working equipment on the ground.

Shut off the engines.  Fuel is to be filled in using the service station (tanklift), see the following chapter "Service station (tanklift), Fuel Tank".

Do not spill fuel and do not allow fuel to penetrate into the soil. Fuel pollutes the environment.

Wipe off spilt fuel immediately with cleaning rags or soak up with binding agents.

Fuel and cleaning material must be disposed of without polluting the environment.

Report fuel accidents immediately to the responsible person.

Fig. 2-76:

Check the grounding straps (equipotential bonding) at the tank lift regularly for proper fastening.

Grounding straps can remove voltages and prevent fire during refuelling only when properly fastened.

2-65

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Service station (tanklift) The hydraulic shovel is equipped with a central service station (Fig. 2-77: resp. Fig. 2-78:) for refuelling. A service vehicle is needed for filling and/or draining of the fluids.

The service station is accessible from the ground below the uppercarriage.

Risk of injury. Always stay clear of the moving service station.

The service station is moved downwards and upwards by means of a hydraulic driven cylinder.

The up and down movement of the service station is initiated the switch (1, Fig. 2-78:). The switch is located in a control box at the hydraulic ladder (arrow).

To lower the service station:

Fig. 2-77:

 Push momentary switch (1, Fig. 2-78:) downwards and hold until the service station is in its lower position.

To bring the service station in the upmost position:  Push switch (1) upwards. Service station is moved upwards until it reaches its upmost position.

With switch (1) in its middle position, movement of the service station is stopped.

Fig. 2-78:

2-66

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Express couplings are provided for refilling / draining the following consumables (fluids).

Note: Connections used may vary depending on how the machine is equipped.

Pos. Fig. 2-79: 1

2 3 4 5 6

7

8 9 10

Consumable

Express coupling for

Diesel fuel for lefthand and righthand fuel tank Cooling fluid for lefthand engine Cooling fluid for righthand engine Gearbox oil for left pump drive gearbox Gearbox oil for right pump drive gearbox Tank for engine oil interval prolongation lefthand engine.

Tank for engine oil interval prolongation lefthand engine.

Engine oil for lefthand engine Engine oil for righthand engine Hydraulic oil tank

Filling

11 Grease container 12 Swing gear 13-15 Not used

Refilling and draining For filling in or for draining consumables / fluids, unscrew the cap of the corresponding express coupling (Fig. 2-79:).

Attach express coupling of filling hose from the service vehicle to the corresponding express coupling at the service station. Fill in or drain off consumable / fluid.

Take off filling hose and refit cap on the express coupling.

Filling and/or draining Filling and/or draining Filling and/or draining Filling and/or draining Filling and/or draining Filling and/or draining Filling and/or draining Filling and/or draining Filling and/or draining Filling Filling

Fig. 2-79:

2-67

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Emergency off switch The control box at the service station is equipped with an emergency off switch (arrow, Fig. 2-80:).

In case of emergency press the button. The electrical system is switched off.

Fig. 2-80:

2-68

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Assemblies resp. Measuring device reservoirs Fuel tank BCS fuel indicator (Fig. 2-81:)

Remarks Switch on the monitoring system by using toggle switch (23, Fig. 2-82:). The indicator light (22) comes on.

Fill in fuel using express coupling (1).

The indicator light (32) comes on when the LH fuel tank is full.

Stop filling when the fuel tank is full.

The indicator light (33) comes on when the RH fuel tank is full.

Stop filling when the fuel tank is full.

Switch off the monitoring system by using toggle switch (23), indicator light (22) is off.

Fig. 2-82: Fig. 2-81:

2-69

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Assemblies resp. Measuring device reservoirs Pump drive gearDipstick (1, Fig. 2-83:) boxes

Engines

Dipstick (1, Fig. 2-85:)

Engine oil tank (option)

Monitoring lamps (1 and 2, Fig. 2-86:)

Remarks Fill in gear oil using express couplings (4 and 5, Fig. 2-84:).

Stop filling when the oil reaches the "max" mark on the dipstick (see: Part 3, chapter "Pump drive gearbox Checking the gearbox oil level/Filling in oil").

Fill in engine oil using express couplings (8 and 9, Fig. 2-86:).

Stop filling when the oil reaches the "max" mark on the dipstick (see: chapter "Engine - engine oil level/filling in oil").

Small amounts of oil can be filled in through the filler neck (2, Fig. 2-85:) at the engine.

Fill in engine oil using express couplings (6 and 7, Fig. 2-86:).

Stop filling when monitoring lamps (1 and / or 2) lit up, (see: chapter "Engine , filling in oil").

Fig. 2-85: Fig. 2-83:

Fig. 2-86: Fig. 2-84:

2-70

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Assemblies resp. Measuring device reservoirs

Remarks

Hydraulic oil tank

Checking the oil level: Extend the piston rods of stick and bucket cylinders halfway.

Stand working equipment on the ground.

Check oil level at an oil temperature of ca. 50 °C / 122°F, with the engines stationary.

Fill in oil through express coupling (10, Fig. 2-89:) when the oil level in the inspection glass has dropped below the "min" mark on sign (2).

Stop filling if the acoustic warning signal “Travel Alarm” sounds and oil reaches the "max" mark on sign (2) near the inspection glass (see: chapter "Hydraulic system Checking the hydraulic oil level / Refilling hydraulic oil").

Fig. 2-87:

Inspection glass (1, Fig. 2-87:), sign (2. Fig. 2-87: and Fig. 2-88:)

Fig. 2-89:

Fig. 2-88:

2-71

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Assemblies resp. Measuring device reservoirs

Remarks

Cooling system reservoir

Level indicator (4, Fig. 2-90:) Fill in cooling fluid using express couplings (2 and/or 3, Fig. 2-92:). Stop filling when the level indicator indicates maximum filling level. (see: chapter "Cooling system Cooling liquid").

Grease container BCS display (Fig. 2-91:) BCS gives a warning if the grease container is nearly – cental lubricating empty. system Switch on the display system (optional) with the toggle switch (23), indicator lamp (22) comes on.

Fill in grease using express coupling (11, Fig. 2-93:).

Stop filling when the grease container is full, the indicator lamp (34) lights up.

On completion of filling, switch the display system off again with the toggle switch (23), indicator lamp (22) is off.

Fig. 2-90:

Fig. 2-92:

Fig. 2-93: Fig. 2-91:

2-72

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Switching the electrical system on and off The electrical system is switched on with keyswitch (32, Fig. 2-94:).  Insert key into key-switch and turn to the right.

If the electrical system cannot be switched on, check first whether the battery main switch is on (see: "Battery isolator switch, shutting off supply voltage").

Engines, emergency shut-off In an emergency, the engines can be stopped out of full load.

To do so:  Depress the emergency shut-off switch (35, Fig. 2-95:). The engines are stopped. (see the chapter "Emergency shut-off function").  Switch off the electrical system with key-switch (32).

Fig. 2-95: Fig. 2-94:

2-73

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation STARTING AND STOPPING THE ENGINES Starting the engines

Starting the left-hand engine

Exhaust gases from diesel engines and some of their constituents may cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm.

Start and operate combustion engines only on well-ventilated premises. In closed rooms, exhaust gases must be evacuated to the outside.

Do not work on the exhaust system an do not make any modifications to it.

All control levers and pedals must be in position "0".

Pull out all emergency shut-off switches.

Pull out both switches for the battery main switch.

Check for persons on the machine. Do not start engines until all persons have left the machine.

Fig. 2-96:

Starting the right-hand engine

Activate the horn before you start the engines to give a warning signal to people around.

Start the engines one after another.  Switch on the electrical system with key-switch (32).

Warning lamps (44 – 47, Fig. 2-96:) and (54 – 57, Fig. 2-97:) light up.

The engine starts up only after the lubrication pressure has built up inside the engine.

An acoustic warning signal sounds.  Press button (41, Fig. 2-96:) to start the lefthand engine. Release button (41) as soon as the engine has fired.

Warning lamps (44 – 47) go out.  Press button (51, Fig. 2-97:) to start the righthand engine. Release button (51) as soon as the engine has fired.

Warning lamps (54 – 57) go out.

2-74

Fig. 2-97:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Repeat the starting procedure if one of the engines does not fire. Repeat starting procedure not more often than three to four times. Do not operate the starter for more than 10 seconds.

Engines – adjusting the speed

If warning lamps (44 – 47, Fig. 2-96:) or (54 – 57, Fig. 2-97:) do not go out or when the BCS (Fig. 2-98:) displays a fault message after starting, the engine concerned must be stopped immediately.

Adjust the speed of the right-hand engine with switch (58, Fig. 2-97:).

Locate the cause of the fault and rectify before restarting the engine.

Adjust the speed of the left-hand engine with switch (48, Fig. 2-96:).

 Press the switch face without symbol the engine speed is raised up to maximum speed.  Press the switch face with the symbol the engine speed is reduced to idling speed.

Starting the engines at low temperatures If the machine is used in low temperatures, the engine may be equipped with a cold-starting device.

The pressure vessel containing the cold-starting fluid (ether) can be installed in or near the engine compartment.

Fig. 2-98:

The vessel is screwed into an electro-mechanical metering valve. When the engine is started at temperatures below 0°C (32°F), this valve is activated automatically by the engine electronics and injects a precisely metered amount of cold-starting fluid into the air intake duct of the engine.

Ether is toxic and highly inflammable. Safety instructions and information concerning the handling of pressure vessels for cold-starting fluids (ether) can be found in the following chapters: "Fundamental safety instructions", "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions", "Cold-starting fluid (ether) - Replacing the pressure vessel".

2-75

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Shutting off the engines

Shutting off the left-hand engine

During interruptions of the work and after the work, stand working equipment on the ground.

Do not shut off the engines before the working equipment rests on the ground.

Do not shut off the engine out of full load. The engine should be run at no more than one-half of the rated rpm for another 5 minutes to allow the lubricating oil and the cooling liquid to dissipate the combustion heat from the combustion chamber and from bearings and shafts.  Reduce the speed of the engines to idling by pressing the left side of the speed adjusting switches (48, Fig. 2-99:) and (58, Fig. 2-100:).  Press button (42, Fig. 2-99:) for the left-hand engine. The left-hand engine is stopped.

Warning lamps (44 – 47) light up.  Press button (52, Fig. 2-100:) for the righthand engine. The right-hand engine is stopped.

Warning lamps (54 – 57) light up.

Fig. 2-99:

Shutting off the right-hand engine

 Switch off the electrical system with key-switch (32).

Warning lamps (44 – 47, Fig. 2-99:) and (54 – 57, Fig. 2-100:) go out.

The engines will be shut off with a delay of a few seconds. During this time, the current operating data are saved and the electronic units shut down.

Fig. 2-100:

2-76

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation AIR CONDITIONER (OPTIONAL) Control unit (SIGMA dual) The air conditioning system (single or dual) is installed under the cab roof (Fig. 2-101:).

The illustration (Fig. 2-102:) shows a control unit for a dual air conditioner.

The control unit of a single air conditioning system contains the control elements only once.

Do not switch on the air conditioner when the backup heating is set to ”heating”.

Unit 1 Pos. Element 1 Rotary switch 2

Thermostat

3

Rotary switch

Unit 2 Pos. Element 4 Rotary switch 5

Thermostat

6

Rotary switch

Function selects the intensity level of the blower (3 levels) sets the desired temperature inside the cab selects the desired control function (heating, cooling, ventilation, defrosting)

Fig. 2-101:

Function selects the intensity level of the blower (3 levels) sets the desired temperature inside the cab selects the desired control function (heating, cooling, ventilation, defrosting) Fig. 2-102:

2-77

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Back-up heating operator’s cab (optional) The back-up heating for the operator’s cab is located in the module below the operator’ cab (Fig. 2-103:). The heating consists of one or two heating units (1) and the fuel reservoir (2).  Switch on the back-up heating using switch (142, Fig. 2-104:). The pilot lamp above switch (142) lights up.

The heating system has an automatic regulation.

Do not switch on the back-up heating when the air conditioner is set to ”cooling”.

Fig. 2-103:

Fig. 2-104:

2-78

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Back-up heating (optional)

Control unit

The back-up heating is located in the module below the operator’ cab (Fig. 2-105:).

(Fig. 2-107:):

The heating system uses the engine cooling fluid.

Therefore full heating power is available after the engines reach their operating temperature.

Before switching on the blower, turn the valves (arrow, Fig. 2-105:) into direction of flow.

The back-up heating control elements are located at the control column unit (Fig. 2-107:).

Do not switch on the back-up heating when the air conditioner is set to ”cooling”.

Fig. 2-107:

Pos. Element

Fig. 2-105:

Function

1

Indicator lamp heating ON

2

Indicator lamp blower ON

3

Indicator lamp heating

4

Indicator lamp cooling

5

Switch

heating ON

6

Switch

blower ON

7

Indicator lamp blower level 3

8

Indicator lamp blower level 2

9

Indicator lamp blower level 1

Fig. 2-106:

2-79

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation MAXIMUM MACHINE INCLINATIONS, INFORMATION The machine must not exceed the inclinations indicated for working, travelling and servicing operations and during downtimes. The values specified in the tables below (next page) are valid for all types of working equipment.

If the maximum inclinations are exceeded, there is a risk of severe damage to the engines due to insufficient lubrication. In the event of extreme inclinations the machine can topple over.

Instruction sign “Maximum inclination” This sign (Fig. 2-108) is attached inside the operators cab.

Observe all the warning and instruction signs attached to the machine.

Keep the signs legible and clean.

Replace signs immediately if they have become illegible.

The working performance of the machine is especially economical when the machine stands on firm and level ground.

A loss of performance and higher wear must be accepted when the machine works in an inclined position, e.g. when building a ramp or when slewing uphill.

For the building of ramps, the values specified in the table "Maximum inclinations during working operations" may be exceeded. In this case, however, a reduced service life of the components can be expected.

During downtimes, the machine must be parked in such a way that its inclination does not exceed 3° / 5.2 %.

Fig. 2-108

2-80

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

Maximum machine inclinations during working operations:

forward inclination

rearward inclination

side inclination

5° / 8.7%

5° / 8.7%

5° / 8.7%

Maximum machine inclinations during travelling: Type

Engine

Forward deg / %

Rearward deg / %

Side deg / %

6060, 6060FS

QSK45

20° / 36.4%

20° / 36.4%

20° / 36.4%

C3512C

24° / 44.5%

24° / 44.5%

24° / 44.5%

Maximum machine inclinations during maintenance operations:

forward inclination

rearward inclination

side inclination

0° - 2° / 3.4%

0° - 2° / 3.4%

0° - 2° / 3.4%

2-81

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation TRAVELLING, SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Have the attachment raised only so far as to permit the machine to be driven under overhead power lines without any risk.

Close the cab door.

If the machine is fitted with a safety belt for the operator, fasten the belt.

If the superstructure is turned by more than 90° from the BASIC POSITION, the hydraulic shovel travels in the opposite direction to that selected.

If the position of the superstructure in relation to the undercarriage is not exactly known, touch the accelerator lightly to see which direction the machine takes, before initiating the full travelling movement.

Fig. 2-110:

Never drive across slopes.

Take the utmost care on slippery, greasy ground.

The engines must be at operating temperature before being subjected to full load.

If the machine is to be driven a longer distance, the superstructure must be secured against turning by means of the superstructure holding brake.

Running-in specifications for components of the crawler tracks: Prior to initial commissioning and/or after repair work, run in the idlers, track rollers and support rollers as follow:  Raise the working equipment (Fig. 2-109: and Fig. 2-110:).

Sound the horn to warn persons in the immediate vicinity before starting travelling.

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter).

 Drive the hydraulic shovel in reverse approx. 50 m (164 ft).  Drive the hydraulic shovel in forwards approx. 50 m (164 ft).  Stop the hydraulic shovel.  Measure the temperature at each idler, track roller and support roller with an infrared thermometer. At a temperature of approx. 100° C (212°F) wait for idlers, track rollers and support rollers to cool down.  Repeat this running-in procedure up to 10 times.  Check all idlers, track rollers and support rollers for leaks.

Fig. 2-109:

2-82

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation TRAVELLING Superstructure basic position Travel direction and sense of actuation of pedals (112 and 113, Fig. 2-112:) are identical only when the hydraulic shovel is in its BASIC POSITION (Fig. 2-111:).

Travelling forwards/backwards Travelling forwards:  depress pedals (112 and 113) forwards.

The hydraulic shovel travels in the direction of the idler (2, Fig. 2-111:).

Travelling backwards:  depress pedals (112 and 113, Fig. 2-112:) backwards.

The hydraulic shovel travels in the direction of the drive sprocket (4, Fig. 2-111:).  During travelling, an acoustic warning signal sounds (Travel Alarm).

Fig. 2-111:

If the superstructure is swung out of its basic position by more than 90° (Fig. 2-113:), the hydraulic shovel moves in a direction opposite to that expected when pedals (112 and 113, Fig. 2-112:) are depressed.

Fig. 2-113:

The pedals return automatically to their "0" positions when released.

Reverse the hydraulic shovel only over short distances and with the assistance of marshallers because of restricted rear-view conditions.

Do not travel across slopes.

When travelling uphill or downhill, the travel drive must always be at the rear.

Travel only in the basic position of the hydraulic shovel and only forwards.

Be extremely careful on slippery and greasy ground.

Fig. 2-112:

If the operator is not completely sure of the position of the superstructure with regard to the undercarriage, pedals (112 and 113) should be depressed slightly in order to find out which way the hydraulic shovel moves before initiating the full travelling movement.

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter).

All instructions with regard to travelling speed regulation and travel direction control are applicable only as long as the crawler tracks have sufficient grip and do not slip.

2-83

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Regulating the travelling speed Travelling on level ground.

Regulate the travelling speed with  pedals (112 and 113, Fig. 2-114:) and  Switch (72, Fig. 2-115:) to the left (slow gear).

All forward/reverse travel movements are possible with this gear.  Switch (72, Fig. 2-115:) to the right (fast gear).

The hydraulic shovel can be driven only parallel forwards with this fast gear.

The travel gearbox changes automatically into the 1st gear as soon as another travelling function (e.g. reversing, cornering) is initiated.

Change speed range only when the hydraulic shovel is stationary.

Press engine speed regulator switches (48 and 58) to the left (full-throttled position).

Fig. 2-115:

Travelling uphill and downhill Read and observe the "Travelling Safety instructions" chapter.

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter).  Depress padals (112 and 113, Fig. 2-114:) fully to the limit stop.  Regulate the travel speed only with the engines speed control.

When travelling downhill, the travel retarder valve acts as a speed limiter.

The travel retarder valve works correctly if pedals (112 and 113) are fully depressed down to the limit stop.

Fig. 2-114:

2-84

Should the travelling speed become too high when travelling downhill release pedals (112 and 113) to stop the hydraulic shovel.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Cornering To take a right-hand corner forwards

Never use the working equipment to raise one side of the undercarriage and then turn the undercarriage by initiating the swinging and/or the travelling function.

 depress only pedal(112, Fig. 2-116:) forwards.

To take a lefthand corner forwards  depress only pedal (113) forwards. 

This way of working is contrary to the hydraulic shovel 's designated use.

Turning To turn to the right  depress pedal (112) forwards and pedal (113) backwards.

To turn to the left

There is a risk of accident. Moreover, the tracks, swing gear, roller bearing swing ring, backhoe or bucket back-wall and the front part of the bucket are subjected to inadmissibly high stresses.

 depress pedal (113) forwards and pedal (112) backwards.

Fig. 2-117:

Fig. 2-116:

Note Change the position of the undercarriage - parallel or perpendicular to the working face - only by cornering forwards/backwards (Fig. 2-117:).

Cornering to the left: forwards

from pos. 1 to pos. 2

backwards

from pos. 2 to pos. 3

forwards

from pos. 3 to pos. 4

Fig. 2-118:

The same procedure should be adopted if the hydraulic shovel is to be driven out of depressions (Fig. 2-118:): Cornering to the left

from pos. 1 to pos. 2

Cornering to the right

from pos. 2 to pos. 3

2-85

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Travelling over long distances Travel only forwards with the hydraulic shovel in its basic position.

Travelling backwards over longer distances could damage parts of the undercarriage.

Read and observe the "Travelling – Safety instructions" chapter.

Backhoe equipment (Fig. 2-120:):  Fully extend boom cylinder (1),  extend backhoe cylinder (2),  extend stick cylinder (3) to such an extent as to reach the position of the working equipment shown in (Fig. 2-120:).

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter).

When travelling, pay attention to sufficient headroom, e. g. under cable bridges or high-tension cables.

Keep the loading or the backhoe bucket close to the ground. For a more uniform loading of the tracks, the equipment must, however, be kept at a steep angle (Fig. 2-119: and Fig. 2-120:).

Fig. 2-120:

Lower the equipment when travelling underneath obstacles.  If the equipment position must be changed:  stop the hydraulic shovel,  change the position,  continue to travel.

Fig. 2-119:

After travelling for 15 minutes without interruption, stop the hydraulic shovel and check the temperature of the track rollers.

If the temperature does not exceed approx. 100° C (212°F):

Face shovel equipment (Fig. 2-119:):

 continue travelling.

 Fully extend boom cylinder (1),

In case of higher temperatures:

 retract bucket cylinder (2),

 Stop travelling. Resume travelling only after the track rollers have cooled down to approx. 40° C (104°F).

 retract stick cylinder (3) to such an extent as to reach the position of the working equipment (Fig. 2-119:).

2-86

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Superstructure holding brake

Track parking brake

The hydraulic shovel is equipped with four superstructure holding brakes which are integrated in the swing gearboxes. The superstructure holding brakes lock the superstructure with respect to the undercarriage.

The hydraulic shovel is equipped with four travelling gear brakes which are integrated in the travel drives.

The gearbox brakes are holding brakes.

Do not press the button unless the superstructure is stationary. Do not use this button while the superstructure is still in motion. Risk of damage to the brakes and the swing gears.

Apply the holding brake:  when the hydraulic shovel is parked,  when travelling longer distances.  To apply the holding brakes, press switch (61, Fig. 2-121:).

The travelling gear brakes are parking brakes.

They protect the hydraulic shovel from rolling forwards or backwards. When the machine is parked, travel brakes are activated automatically. The brakes are deactivated during operation of the machine.

Note: As travel brakes are deactivated, machine could slightly move in direction of excavating during operation.

Whenever loading operation is interrupted, stand working equipment on the ground. This avoids slight movement of the machine and possible consequential damage of lowered ladder, in case ignition remains engaged.

Fig. 2-121: Fig. 2-122:

For Service and Maintenance purposes the travelling gear brakes can also be applied with switch (63, Fig. 2-122:).

Actuate this switch only when the hydraulic shovel is stationary. Do not use this switch while the hydraulic shovel is still in motion. Risk of damage to the brakes and the travel gearboxes.

Press the switch face with the symbol (63): The parking brake is applied permanently. The hydraulic shovel cannot be moved.

For more detailed information refer to the Service Manual, chapters eight and nine.

2-87

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation TRANSPORTING THE MACHINE Transport - Safety instructions The machine must be loaded and transported only after all safety regulations have been observed and complied with.

Entrust loading and transporting of the machine to a company experienced in the transport of heavy equipment.

The responsability for loading and transporting lies with the transport company or their representative.

Remove oil, grease, soil, mud, snow, ice and other materials from the hydraulic shovel's crawler tracks and from ramps and loading platforms of the transport vehicle to minimize slipping.

Secure the transport vehicle against rolling away.

Transport The dimensions and the service weight of the fully assembled hydraulic shovel do not allow the hydraulic shovel to be transported in an undismantled state on a low-bed trailer over public roads.

Therefore, the components and modules must be dismantled beforehand.

Suspensions points as well as the center of gravity are marked on the modules (see example, Fig. 2-123:).

Dimensions and weights of the machines modules can be found in the annex, chapter “Product Specification Sheet” as well as in the “„Service Manual“”.

Detailed instructions for disassembling and assembling the machine can be found in the Service Manual.

Use only tying equipment of sufficient strength (the weights and dimensions of the hydraulic shovel are set out in the "Product Specification Sheet”, which can be found in the annex).

Fig. 2-123:

2-88

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation WORKING OPERATION - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Read the sections "Fundamental safety instructions" and "Operation, safety instructions" carefully and observe the instructions given in them.

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter.

Inspect the site for underground gas, power and water lines before starting work. Any damage to such lines is a risk to life!

Clean off any earth, mud, snow, ice, grease and oil adhering to your working footwear before operating the machine. There is otherwise a risk of slipping off the pedals and initiating inadvertent movements.

Sound the horn to warn persons in the immediate vicinity before starting work.

Stop work if anyone is in the hazard range of the machine. Make sure they have left the hazard range before resuming work.

Never operate the machine unless it is standing on a reasonably horizontal, flat surface. The stability of the machine is otherwise at risk.

Ensure that the attachment has adequate clearance below overhead power lines and structures.

Trenches and working faces may give way. Keep well clear of them.

As travel brakes are deactivated, machine could slightly move in direction of excavating during operation.

Whenever loading operation is interrupted, stand working equipment on the ground. This avoids slight movement of the machine and possible consequential damage of lowered ladder, in case ignition remains engaged.

Do not operate the machine, 

when several track rollers or support rollers have been removed;



when one or several swing gearboxes have failed or been removed;



when one or several teeth on the backhoe or on the shovel are worn or missing;



when parts of the hardfacing layer on the backhoe or on the shovel are worn or missing.

Such circumstances are considered by CGM HMS as "abusive utilization".

CGM HMS refuses to assume the guarantee for damage and consequential damage caused by an abusive utilization of the machine.

Running-in instructions for hydraulic cylinders Compression of an oil/air compound in a hydraulic cylinder may result in detonations which might damage pistons and sealing rings.

Prior to initial commissioning and/or after repairs, run in the hydraulic cylinders as follows:  Start up the engines and run at low speed.

The pressure-limiting valve in the hydraulic system must not respond  In the first two working cycles, retract and extend the pistons of the hydraulic cylinders to max. ½ to ¾ (not to the limit stop).

Never change direction suddenly. The waiting time between changes of direction must be at least 4 seconds.  In the next eight working cycles, retract and extend the pistons of the hydraulic cylinders to the limit stop. The waiting time between changes of direction must be at least 4 seconds.  When all hydraulic cylinders have been run in, the hydraulic shovel can operate at a higher engine speed.

Warming up the hydraulic system At low temperatures, bring the engines down to moderate speed, then activate all hydraulic functions for about 10 minutes (bring to service temperature). For further instructions, see section "LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

If the BCS indicates problems with the cooling liquid temperature, engine oil pressure, coolant level, alternator or hydraulic oil filter control (with hydraulic oil at service temperature) light up:  Lower the working equipment to the ground and shut off engines.

Working under these circumstances results in heavy wear and possibly in severe damage and thus in high repair costs.

2-89

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Avoid extreme positions of the attachment Parts of the attachment may damage the machine if they are moved into extreme positions (see illustrations Fig. 2-124 - Fig. 2-125).

Work carefully, avoiding extreme positions of this kind.

Fig. 2-124

Fig. 2-125

2-90

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation WORKING OPERATION Before starting work Prior to initial commissioning and after repairs on the central lubricating system or the hydraulic cylinders, move the unloaded equipment for abt.

5 minutes.

This is required to ensure an adequate supply of grease to the cylinder bearings when the work starts.

Warming up: At low outside temperatures it is necessary to run the hydraulic system up to operating temperature.

The temperatures at which warming up is necessary depend on the type of hydraulic oil used; see also "Oils for hydraulic systems".

Activating the electronic excavator control The hydraulic shovel can execute working movements only after the electronic excavator control (servo-control) has been activated.

The servo-control block is enabled by switch (71, Fig. 2-126:).

At the beginning of the work, the electronic excavator control (servo-control) is activated by a contact in the operator's seat (105):  Electronic excavator control ON The operator is sitting on his seat.  Elektronic excavator control is OFF The operator's seat is empty.

 Run the diesel engines at ca. 2/3 full speed and start to perform no-load working movements for abt. 10 minutes with the hydraulic shovel.

Fig. 2-126:

2-91

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Swinging the superstructure Swinging of the superstructure is possible onlywhen: 

the superstructure holding brake is released and



the hydraulic shovel operator is sitting on his seat and



the hydraulic ladder is raised and



the servicestation (tanklift) is raised and



the BCS swing circuit test was successful.

 To swing the superstructure to the right move control lever to the right (115, Fig. 2-127:).  To swing the superstructure to the left move control lever to the left (115).

After releasing, the control lever returns automatically to position "0".

Releasing the control lever (115) is not sufficient to brake the superstructure automatically. In order to brake the superstructure, the control lever must be moved in the direction opposite the swinging movement (reversing).

Fig. 2-127:

Braking the superstructure The superstructure can only be braked by moving control lever (115) in the direction opposite the swinging movement (reversing).

The superstructure does not stop automatically by simply releasing the swing control lever (115).

To brake the superstructure, the swing control lever (115) must be moved in opposite direction.

In an emergency, activate the holding brake by pressing switch (61, Fig. 2-128:).

Fig. 2-128:

2-92

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Working When released, all control levers for working operation return automatically to position "0".

Sound the horn to warn persons in the immediate vicinity before starting work.

Do not exceed the maximum machine inclination (see “Maximum machine inclinations, information” chapter).

Level a surface only in the bucket's digging direction. Never "beat" or "sweep" with the bucket.

Do not level off a surface with the front shell of the bucket open.

Close bucket completely before beginning to dig.

Fig. 2-129:

Extending and retracting the bucket or backhoe bucket stick  To extend the stick: push control lever (115, Fig. 2-129:) forwards.  To retract the stick: pull control lever (115) backwards.  To retract the stick with pressure: (only on bottom-dump bucket equipment) depress button (102) and push control lever (115) backwards.

Opening and closing the bottom-dump bucket  To open the bucket: press pedal (111, Fig. 2-129:) forwards or turn thumb wheel (118) forwards.  To close the bucket: press pedal (111) backwards or turn thumb wheel (118) backwards.

Pressing pedal (111) overrides turning the thumb wheel (118).

Fig. 2-130:

Raising and lowering the boom

Filling and emptying the bucket or the backhoe

 To raise the boom: pull control lever (116, Fig. 2-130:) backwards.

 To fill/tip back the bucket: shift control lever (116, Fig. 2-130:) to the left.

 To lower the boom: push control lever (116) forwards.

 To empty the bucket by dumping/tipping: shift control lever (116) to the right.

 To lower the boom with pressure: depress button (103) and push control lever (116) forwards.

2-93

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Emergency lowering of the working equipment In case of a failing out of the electronic hydraulic shovel control and / or the engines, lower the equipment as follows:  Sit down on the operator’s seat. Switch inside seat (105, Fig. 2-131:) is activated then.  Switch on the electric system with key-switch (32).  Operate switch (71), hydraulic servo system is activated then.  Operate switch (65, Fig. 2-132:) and hold.  Push control lever (116) forwards to lower the working equipment to ground.  Contact the responsible service personnel as soon as possible.

Fig. 2-131:

Fig. 2-132:

2-94

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation After daily operation Parking the machine

Escaping oil pollutes the environment.

 Park the machine on level and stable ground.

This is particularly important in winter to avoid freezing of the tracks.  Stand the working equipment on the ground.  Shut off the engines.  Shift both control levers into all directions todepressurize the hydraulic cylinders.  Withdraw the key from the electrical system key-switch.

 Repair leaks immediately (or have them repaired).  Report oil accidents to the responsible person.  Check the superstructure, undercarriage and the working equipment for damage and all steel components for cracks or fractures.

 Close the cab window.

 Report detected damage immediately to the responsible person.

 Lock the cab door and all lockable hatches and covers on the machine.

 Clean off gross dirt, ice and snow from the fins and the fan wheel of the hydraulic oil cooler.

 Clean the machine of coarse dirt as well as of combustible and easily flammable substances, if possible with a stream jet (rubber parts and electric components with compressed air - refer to information label). Otherwise, the fire and explosion hazard will exist.  Fill up the fuel tanks.  Inspect the engines, the hydraulic system, the track rollers, support rollers, idlers and gearboxes visually for leaks.

2-95

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation ASSEMBLING WORKING EQUIPMENT - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Personel Assembly work may be carried out only by operating or maintenance personnel who have the necessary know-how at their disposal.

If such know-how is lacking, meticulous instruction must be given by experienced personnel, e.g. from CGM HMS GmbH. The Operation and Maintenance Manual, and in particular the section headed "Fundamental Safety Instructions", must have been read and understood.

Only such persons may start up the machine during assembly work in order to adjust the attachments.

Incorrect operation of the machine or the attachments may give rise to life-threatening situations.

Personal protective gear and working clothes Wear closely fitting working clothing when working on the machine. Loose, wide garments may catch on machine parts and result in injury.

Wear your personal protective equipment: a safety helmet, safety goggles, safety footwear and gloves.

When carrying out work on the working equipment, f.ex. on the monobloc boom (Fig. 2-133:), use a fall arrester. Falling down from great hight may cause severe injuries. Connect the fall arrester to the safety line on the boom (arrow, Fig. 2-133:).

Tools and auxiliaries Tools, hoists, slings, trestles and other devices must be in a reliable, safe state.

Metal splinters may cause injury when accessory bolts are being driven in or out. A brass or copper mandrel should therefore be used for this purpose, and goggles must be worn.

Use only the steps, platforms and handrails when climbing onto or off the machine.

Always keep steps and platforms in a non-slip state. Remove any oil, grease, earth, clay, snow, ice and other foreign matter immediately.

Securing the working equipment Stand working equipment on the ground in such a way that no movements can be made if mechanical or hydraulic connections become detached.

Secure any equipment or component which is to be mounted or dismantled, or whose position is to be changed, with hoists or appropriate slinging/supporting devices to prevent them from moving, slipping or falling inadvertently.

Securing the machine Carry out work on the attachment only if the machine is secured as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Selecting the attachments The machine can be equipped with various attachments. The components of the attachments are assembled with hydraulic cylinders and connectors. Components can be combined in various ways for optimum adaptation of the attachments to the specific application.

Operate the machine only with the equipment and component combinations expressly approved by CGM HMS GmbH for this type of machine.

Never install and commission other equipment and component combinations without CGM HMS GmbH first having inspected and approved the project in writing.

Protective roof against falling objects Fig. 2-133:

2-96

The machine is equipped with an integrated cabprotection roof (FOPS).

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Securing the machine Risk of injury The machine must not be started by unauthorized persons.

Secure the machine as described below: 

before carrying out any fitting and modification work on the working equipment,



before carrying out any servicing and repair work on the machine.

Therefore, secure the machine.

Observe the accident prevention regulations.

 Park the machine on level and stable ground.

Depressurize pipeline systems, on which work is to be carried out, by appropriate measures.

 Stand the working equipment on the ground.

Protective shrouds of moving machine parts may only be opened or removed when the drive unit is stationary and protected against inadvertent starting.

 Depressurize the hydraulic system.

 Shut off the engines.  Withdraw the key from the key-switch.

Before carrying out fitting works, the machine and the equipment must be protected against inadvertent starting by placing chocks under the tracks and by standing the working equipment on the ground.

Hydraulic and lubricating systems: Close all open bores, pipe and hose connections with pressureresistant plugs.

Refill collected hydraulic oil back into the hydraulic system only through the return-flow filters. Dispose of non re-usable oils without polluting the environment.

All components of CGM HMS GmbH machines have been carefully purpose-coordinated. Troublefree operation and a long service life can only be achieved with original CGM HMS GmbH spare parts.

Respect the sequence of working operations when fitting or replacing the attachments. The sequence has been determined and tested by qualified experts.

2-97

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation CORROSION PROTECTION FOR PINS AND BEARINGS (BUSHINGS AND HUBS) Use "GLEITMO 815" anti-corrosive agent only.

Other agents are not approved by CGM HMS GmbH. All pins and bearings (bushings and hubs) of the working equipment or in equipment componenents must be treated with "GLEITMO 815" anticorrosive agent before fitting.

Doing so 

permits easy fitting and dismantling



protects against rust, oxidation and similar wear



prevents seizing and fretting corrosion in nonmoving parts of bearings.

This is achieved by aluminium and copper particles forming a protective layer on the metal. This layer removes surface irregularities and does not sweat, seize or harden.

Part no. for "GLEITMO 815" is 2764305, available from CGM HMS GmbH Spare-Parts Service.

2-98

Application of GLEITMO 815  Clean off grease, oil, dirt and corrosion protection agents from pins and bearings using white spirit or diesel fuel.

Rust patches must be thoroughly removed, if any.

All parts must present a dry, bright metal surface.  Apply a thin layer of GLEITMO 815 on pins and all bearings using a brush or a spray can.

Pin shafts and bearings must be completely co-vered by the protective layer.

If the protective layer of a pin already treated with GLEITMO 815 is damaged, these areas must be touched up before fitting the part.  Fitting and securing of pins If the pin is too heavy to be fitted manually, apply GLEITMO 815 at first only on abt. a quarter of the pin's length Then position pin by means of a lifting gearready for fitting.

Apply GLEITMO 815 on the remaining length of pin shaft, fit pin and secure.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation ON-BOARD CRANE (OPTIONAL) The on-board crane is designed for lifting heavy parts only.

On-board crane, monitoring, warning and control elements (Fig. 2-134:)

Do not lift persons.

Observe all national directives as well as specific regulations relevant to crane operation.

Personel Crane work may be carried out only by operators who have the necessary know-how and the permission to operate cranes.

If such know-how or such permission is lacking, meticulous instruction must be given by experienced personnel, e.g. from CGM HMS. Incorrect operation of the crane may give rise to life-threatening situations.

Fig. 2-134:

Pos. Element 1 Monitoring lamp 2 Warning lamp 3 Warning lamp 4 Monitoring lamp 5 Key-switch

10 11 12

Button Monitoring lamp Knob Monitoring lamp Warning lamp Button Button

21

Control lever

22 23 24

Control lever Control lever Control lever

6 7 8 9

Function Alternator Engine oil pressure Engine temperature Air filter Electrical system ON/OFF Start engine of drive unit Preheating system (option) Engine speed variation Crane in operation Malfunction EMERGENCY STOP Emergency lowering of winch Extending and retracting of boom extension Folding the boom Swinging the boom Winch up / down

2-99

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation On-board crane, putting into operation Risk of serious injuries due to movements of the crane.

Put the crane into operation only after all persons have left the danger area.

Do not exceed the maximum lifting capacity (observe the lift capacity chart attached to the boom).

On-board crane, drive unit The drive unit (Fig. 2-135:) supplies the crane with hydraulic power. So the on-board crane is functional without the shovel’s engines running.

The drive unit comprises the diesel engine, fuel tank, starter batteries and the hydraulic system.

The drive unit is equipped with an Emergency OFF push switch (arrow, Fig. 2-135:).

In case of emergency push the switch, the engine of the drive unit comes to standstill.

Prior to each deployment: Carry out all maintenance work as listed in the “Inspection and Servicing Plans “T” and “W”.

To start the drive unit:  Turn key-switch (5, Fig. 2-134:) to position ON.  Press button (6), engine will start.

The crane control unit is equipped with an Emergency OFF push switch (11).

In case of emergency push the switch, the engine of the drive unit comes to standstill.

After finishing work block the boom, then stop the engine (see chapter “On-board crane, - blocking the boom in position of rest”).

2-100

Fig. 2-135:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation On-Board crane, – blocking the boom in position of rest Movements and accelerations produced by working operations of the machine can cause damage to the swing drive of the on-board crane, if the crane is not blocked.

The hydraulic on-board crane must therefore be blocked in its position of rest.

Risk of serious injuries due to movements of the crane.

Put the crane into operation only after all persons have left the danger area.

To block the boom:  Retract the boom completely.  Swing the boom in the direction of the blocking device (Fig. 2-136:) and lower it.  Withdraw the cotter pin at the tip of the boom.  Extend the boom carefully until the tip engages the blocking device (arrow, Fig. 2-136:).  Reinsert and lock the the cotter pin.

On-board crane, checking Extract from the inspection and testing regulations The on-board crane is approved in accordance with the Accident Prevention Regulations for Cranes (BGV D6, applicable only in Germany).

The on-board crane must be inspected regularly in accordance with the regulations in force in the country of use.

The inspections must be requested by the user of the crane. The expert or specialist entrusted with the inspection can be appointed at the user's discretion.

The user must ensure, however, that the appointed person meets the requirements.

The user is obliged to make available all documents required for the inspection and to ensure the smooth running of the inspection. He is furthermore obliged to provide, if required, crane operators and auxiliary personnel and the required test loads.

The result of the inspection is to be documented in an inspection record signed by the inspector.

The inspection record serves as proof on the part of the user that the inspections have been carried out. The inspection record must contain all data required for crane identification and for the performance of further regular inspections.

Fig. 2-136:

2-101

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation Monitoring cameras This excavator is equipped with two monitoring cameras:  one mounted on the counterweight, looking backwards;  one mounted on the hydraulic oil cooler module, looking to the right.

The two cameras and the belonging LCD-diplay are operational after the electrical system of the machine has been activated with the key operated switch.

Both cameras transmit their images to the same LCD-display. The display is mounted near the control column.

For toggling between the camera images beeing displayed, press the key in the left joystick (arrow, Fig. 2-137:).

Additional information can be found in the manuals of the camera manufacturer (see Volume 5 of the Technical Documentation "Components").

2-102

Fig. 2-137:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation NOTES ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ................................................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................................................

2-103

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Operation

This page intentionally left blank.

2-104

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING

Operation and Maintenance Manual

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Part 6 INDEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

3-1

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

This page intentionally left blank.

3-2

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing INSPECTION AND SERVICING SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Operation and Maintenance Manual No inspection and servicing work must be carried out until the Operation and Maintenance Manual has been read and understood.

Pay special attention to: „Fundamental safety instructions" and all warnings and safety instructions attached to the machine.

Securing the machine Carry out servicing work only if the machine is secured as described in the section "Securing the machine".

Climbing onto and off the machine Use only the ladders, steps, platforms and handrails provided when climbing onto or off the machine.

The Operation and Maintenance Manual lists all jobs to be done. The descriptions of job sequences, however, provide only

Always keep ladders, steps, platforms and handrails in a non-slip, safe state and remove any oil, grease, soil, clay, snow, ice and other foreign matter immediately.

Experienced personnel with the necessary instructions.

Always maintain a three point contact with the steps and grab handles.

The Operation and Maintenance Manual must be kept with the machine at all times.

Always face the machine when climbing on and off.

Inspection and servicing personnel

Checking the state of tools

Inspection and servicing personnel must have the necessary know-how on the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Use only fully functional, reliable tools.

The necessary know-how can be acquired in a several day's instruction, e.g. by an CGM HMS GmbH mechanic or by attending an CGM HMS GmbH training course.

Personal protective equipment and working clothing Wear closely fitting working clothing when working on the machine. Loose, wide garments may catch on machine parts and result in injury.

Wear a safety helmet, safety footwear, gloves and, in the event of high noise levels, ear protectors.

Securing the working equipment Stand working equipment on the ground in such a way that no movements can be made if mechanical or hydraulical connections become detached.

Secure any equipment or component which is to be mounted or dismantled, or whose position is to be changed, with hoists or appropriate slinging / supporting devices to prevent them from moving, slipping or falling inadvertently.

Select the right tool for the job.

Wrenches of the wrong size, for example, may slip and cause injury.

Cleaning jobs Prior to commencing work, clean your working area, if necessary and possible, with a stream jet (rubber parts and electric components with compressed air - refer to information label).

Use only lint-free cleaning rags when working on the hydraulic system or the engines.

Cleaning agents and solvents may give off harmful, readily flammable vapours. Never work with such agents except on well ventilated premises; never inhale the vapours and never smoke.

Prevent solvents and cleaning agents from coming into contact with your skin.

Wear gloves.

Observe the instructions on the packaging.

3-3

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Handling flammable liquids

Visible oil losses

When handling flammable liquids:

Have any visible leakage repaired immediately.



never smoke,

Escaping oil is an environmental hazard.



keep away from unshielded light sources and naked flames,

Fuel and other consumables often have low flash points and are readily ignited. Never attempt to extinguish burning liquids with water.

Use: 

dry powder,



carbon dioxide or



foam extinguishers.

Water used for extinguishing purposes would vapourize instantaneously on contact with burning substances and spread burning oil, for example, over a wide area. Water generates short circuits in the electrical system, possibly producing hazards.

Soak up any oil that has escaped with a binding agent.

Sweep up binding agent and dispose of it separately from other waste.

Relieving residual pressure in the hydraulic system Only unpressurized hydraulic systems may be opened. Even when a machine is parked on a horizontal surface with ist attachments supported on the ground and its driving motors switched off, there may still be substantial residual pressure in parts of the hydraulic system, e.g. primary pressure from the last hydraulic movements prior to stopping the machine.

Notify the fire brigade.

Residual pressure is reduced only gradually. If an intervention into the hydraulic system is to be undertaken immediately after stopping, the system must be depressurzized:

Fastening and securing elements

(do not leave the operator's seat)

Check fastening and securing elements, e.g. bolts, nuts, washers, before using them again.

 Stand working equipment on the ground,

Replace any damaged parts.

 Shut off the engines,

Spare parts Use only the original sparts parts of CGM HMS GmbH. They are the only ones to fulfill the technical specifications of the machine.

Handling oils and greases Hot lubricant or hydraulic oil emerging uncontrolled from the system may result in severe burns.

 Move all control levers and pedals repeatedly into all ndirections.

Screwed connections, piping, hydraulic hoses Repair any leakage in the piping and hose system immediately.

A fine, highly pressurized jet of hydraulic oil can penetrate the skin.

Never set foot withing reach of the emerging oil jet.

Never search for leakages with the fingers, but use a piece of cardboard and always wear goggles.

Avoid contact with the skin. Wear gloves and firm protective clothing.

If oil has penetrated into the skin, consult a doctor immediately.

Used oil may be harmful to the skin.

Never repair damaged piping; always replace them.

Clean soiled skin thoroughly with warm soapy water and apply a barrier cream. Never use fuels or solvents for cleaning the skin.

If you have swallowed any oil, avoid vomiting but consult a doctor immediately.

Replace hydraulic hoses immediately on detecting any damage or moist areas.

Tighten leaking screw plugs only when the system is depressurized.

Escaping oil is an environmental hazard.

3-4

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

Non-polluting disposal Dispose of oils, greases, cooling liquids, detergents, solvents and oil-containing components, such as filters, cleaning rags, replaced wearing parts and unusable machine parts, without polluting the environment and separately from other waste.

Do not dispose of these substances together with household wastes.

Fill these substances into the containers provided for such purposes.

Like any other oil, also bio-degradable, "environmental-friendly" hydraulic oil must be disposed of separately.

Do not allow oils and oily wastes to penetrate into the soil or into water. They are an environmental hazard.

Used pressure vessels for cold-starting fluid (ether) must be disposed of properly. Contact the supplier with regard to disposal / return of the vessels.

Even apparently empty pressure vessels can contain rests of ether and therefore explode if they are damaged or heated up above 49°C / 120°F. They must therefore be handled in the same way as full pressure vessels. 

Do not keep them on the machine.



Do not damage or open the vessels.



Do not expose the vessels to great heat or direct sunlight.



Do not dispose of in fire.



Keep the vessels in a place inaccessible to unauthorized persons.



Dispose of the vessels properly.

Seals After replacing parts or after opening housings replace seals. Always use new seals and gaskets.

Clean sealing faces prior to assembly.

Individual spares may contain asbestos. Such spares or their packaging are marked with: Never process spares containing asbestos mechanically. Inhaling asbestos dust is a health hazard.

Engine exhaust gases Start and operate combustion engines only on well-ventilated premises.

In closed rooms, exhaust gases must be evacuated to the outside; Do not work on the exhaust system an do not make any modifications to it;.

Exhaust gases from diesel engines and some of their constituents may cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm.

Handling batteries Battery Posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Wash hands after handling.

Batteries give off explosive gases.

Never handle batteries close to naked flames and unshielded light sources, never smoke.

Battery acid is toxic and corrosive.

Avoid any contact with the skin, mouth, eyes and clothing. Avoid spilling battery acid or inhaling the vapours.

Wear gloves, firm protective clothing and goggles when handling batteries.

If the skin is splashed with acid, rinse thoroughly with running water and consult a doctor.

If the eyes are splashed with acid, rinse thoroughly with running water and consult a doctor immediately.

Never set tools down on the battery. They may induce a short circuit, causing irreparable damage to the battery and injuring persons.

Never wear metal necklaces, bracelets or watchstraps when working on the battery. The metal parts may induce a short-circuit resulting in burns.

Dispose of used batteries separately from other waste in the interests of environmental protection.

Before working on the electrical system Before performing work on the electrical system where tools, spare parts, etc. can come into contact with electrical conductors or contacts, the battery must be disconnected.

Disconnect first the negative and then the positive terminal.

After the work: Reconnect first the positive and then the negative terminal.

Clean sealing faces prior to assembly.

3-5

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Handling of cold-starting fluid (ether) The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether).

Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Read and observe the instructions on the pressure vessels.

For further details please refer to the instructions and safety data-sheets of the manufacturer / supplier of pressure vessels with cold starting fluid (ether).

Selecting oils and greases Use the recommended qualities only, matching viscosities with the temperature level.

Filters Replace / clean all filter elements or filter cartridges within the specified periods.

All filters are coordinated carefully with the equipment. Original CGM HMS GmbH parts must be used to ensure smooth running and a long service life of the engine and the hydraulic units.

Sealing elements

Provide for sufficient ventilation.

When dismantling parts, watch for sealing elements.

Do not eat, drink or smoke when replacing an empty vessel.

Check sealing elements prior to installation and replace any that are even slightly damaged.

Do not inhale the vapours of escaping cold-starting fluid.

When assembling, ensure a perfect fit.

In contact with the skin, ether can cause frostbites and irritations. Avoid skin contact.

Wear suitable protective gloves and goggles.

Even apparently empty pressure vessels can still contain rests of ether and therefore explode if they are damaged or heated up above 49°C / 120°F. They must therefore be handled in the same way as full pressure vessels. 

Do not keep them on the machine.



Do not damage or open the vessels.



Do not expose the vessels to great heat or direct sunlight.



Do not dispose of in fire.



Keep the vessels in a place inaccessible to unauthorized persons.



Dispose of the vessels properly.

Oil-level check and oil change Position the machine horizontally.

Change the oil when the machine is at operating temperature. Warm oil flows better and carries suspended particles (carbon or abraded matter) better.

Lubricating Clean the lubricating nipple, then lubricate as scheduled.

After servicing To prevent corrosion, coat all bright metal parts with a grease film.

On completing work, re-install all protective devices.

Never start up the drive motors while work is being done on the machine.

Carry out performance tests with the machine.

3-6

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing INSPECTION AND SERVICING WORK, FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD Prior to commencing work, obtain informationon the national and corporate rules for the prevention of accidents and avoiding fires.

Pay particular attention to hazards caused by combustible and easily flammable substances.

Obtain information on the safe handling of the fire extinguishers to be used.

Avoid smoking and open fire on, next to and below the excavator.

Even battery gases can ignite in open flames or fire.

Combustible and easily or highly inflammable substances or liquids increase the risk of fire and explosion. This is also valid for pressure vessels containing flammable substances as, for instance, spray oil or cold-starting fluid (ether). They are heat-sensitive and can explode even if exposed only to intensive sunlight.

These substance can also ignite themselves if they come close to hot units or objects as, for instance, a turbocharger.

Do not store these substances on the excavator. If combustible, easily or highly flammable substances or liquids were used during maintenance operations, they must be completely removed from the excavator at the end of the work.

Avoid parking the excavator in places where 

combustible substances such as coal dust or tar are present.



open or smouldering fire may occur.

Place suitable fire guardings (fire barriers) if open fire or flying sparks cannot be avoided during repair work.

If necessary, also cover the ground with fireprotective blankets.

Apply special protection to cables, cable ducts as well as to hose and pipe lines.

Have all your welding, flame cutting and grinding work approved before starting work.

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether). Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Do not keep any fire extinguishers that are not suitable or have not been tested.

Do not extinguish flammable liquids with water.

Use: 

dry-powder, carbon-dioxide or foam extinguishing compounds.

When getting into contact with burning substances, the fire-fighting water would abruptly evaporate and distribute the substance such as oil over a wide area. Water causes short-circuits in the electrical system thus possibly entailing new hazards.

Call the fire brigade.

Clean the excavator carefully after the maintenance, if oil, grease, fuel, detergents or coldstarting fluid have been spilt over the machine. If possible, use a steam-jet cleaner for cleaning.

Remove the excavator from such an area where combustible or easily flammable liquids have spilled from the excavator onto the ground.

Flying sparks (caused by welding, flame cutting, grinding, electrical short-circuit) may cause fire on the ground that can spread to the excavator.

3-7

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

This page intentionally left blank.

3-8

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing INSPECTION AND SERVICING PLANS - INSTRUCTIONS Intervals The inspection and Servicing plan lists all jobs which have to be done on the machine at regular intervals.

The individual inspection and Servicing plans are marked with letters providing a link between the operating hours (OH) recorded by the hours-run meter of the machine and the inspection and Servicing plans.

Plan V N

Do all jobs .... ...once prior to initial commissioning. ...after initial commissioning and during the running-in period (after 100 OH). ...every 10 OH or every working shift 2) T ...every 60 OH or weekly . 2 ) W ...after every 250 OH. A ...after every 500 OH. B ...after every 1000 OH. C ...after every 5000 OH. D ...after every 10000 OH. E OH = Bh = Operating hours

Change of engine oil The intervals stated for changing the engine oil apply to fuels with a sulphur content of  0.5% and a permanent ambient temperature down to –10° C (14 °F).

In case of higher sulphur content and/or a permanent ambient temperature of below –10° C (14 °F), shorter intervals are required.

Air-intake system The air filter must be serviced only if the BCS so indicates. Replace the filter elements after one year at the latest.

Oils / Greases For the specification of oils and greases to be used refer to the "Lubricants" section.

The numerals mentioned in the "Oil / Grease" column in the inspection and Servicing plans have the following meaning: Oils for combustion engines and comI pressors Oils for hydraulic systems II IIIa, b, c Oils for gearboxes Greases for bearings and swing rings V

Cleaning jobs Cleaning jobs, especially on cooling systems, must be done at shorter intervals if the machine is exposed to severe dust build-up.

Components The maintenance intervals for components, e.g. engine and gearbox, are listed in the following CGM HMS GmbH maintenance schedules.

It is possible that the manufacturer's documentation for these components states intervals deviating from the above-mentioned intervals.

In such case, only the maintenance intervals specified by CGM HMS GmbH shall apply.

If the engine oil change intervals are not reached within 6 months, the oil must be changed at least after 6 months.

2

Whichever comes first.

3-9

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

This page intentionally left blank.

3-10

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Plan V Plan V - Once prior to initial commissioning Page 1 of 2 Location

Servicing work

Engine Engine oil reservoir (optional) Cooling system Cooling liquid Electrical system Battery Lighting Monitoring, warning and control elements

Check oil level Check oil level

BCS Slewing system Hydraulic system

Hydraulic oil reservoir Hydraulic cylinders Pump drive gearbox - Pre-chambers, expansion reservoir Swing gearbox Travel gearbox (PN 3683483 only) - Spur gear section - Brake-chambers Travel gearbox (PNs 3683496 and 3749598 only) - Hydraulic motor chambers Swing ring Internal gearing Undercarriage Track roller Support roller Track Idler

3

Quantity/ No. 2 2

Check

2

Check liquid level Check operation Check function of monitoring, warning and control elements Check emergency OFF function Check function Perform „Slew brake test“ (see chapter „Service – Slew brake test screen“) Check function of working and travelling movement Check pressure (see „Service Manual“) Check oil level Vent (see chapter “Venting hydraulic system“) Check oil level Check oil level Check oil level Check oil level Check oil level Check oil level Check oil level

6

2 2 4 2 2x1 2x2 2

Check oil level

2x2

Check grease filling Check for leaks and free movement Check grease filling, fill with grease 3 Check for leaks and free movement Check grease filling, fill with grease 3 Check pressure (see „Service Manual“) Check oil level and free movement

1

1

1 2x7 2x2 2 2

Only machines with undercarriage greasing system

3-11

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Plan V - Once prior to initial commissioning Page 2 of 2 Location Central lubricating system Grease container Greasing and pause cycles Level control Service – Station (tanklift) - Arm bearing grease nipple - Hydr. cylinder bearing grease nipple Air conditioner (optional) Compressor Hydraulic ladder On-board crane (optional) - Fastening bolts - Bearings - Joint (column / boom) - Cylinder bearing - Swing ring Hydraulic oil reservoir

Crane drive engine

- Battery Escape ladder - Locking device - Ladder Harness (optional) - Harness holding device on cab roof All lines, fittings and connections All articutated joints and hinges

3-12

Servicing work

Check filling level Check setting Check function Check operation Lubricate Lubricate

Quantity/ No.

1 1 2

Check oil level Lubricate Check for tightness Lubricate Lubricate Lubricate Grease Check oil level (see “On-Board Crane“ Operation and Maintenance Manual) Check oil level (see “Crane drive Engine“ Operation and Maintenance Manual) Check liquid level Check function Check function Check free movement Check completeness and condition Check for tightness Inspect visually for leaks, wearing marks Grease

16 4 2 5 1 1

1

2

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Plan N Plan N – After initial commissioning and during the running-in period (after 100 OH) Page 1 of 2 Location

Servicing work

Engine

Carry out service and maintenance work listed in the „Operation and Maintenance Manual“ for the engine“

- Bearing - Fastening bolts - V-belts, Poly-V-belts Cooling system Cooling fluid Radiator - Bearing - Fastening bolts Hydraulic system Oil cooler - Bearing - Fastening bolts Return-flow filter Magnetic rod Pressure accumulator – emergency lowering Pressure accumulator - ramp-type ladder Pressure accumulator – track tensioner Pump drive gearbox - Pre-chambers, expansion reservoir - Gearbox oil filter (cooling circuit) Fastening bolts Swing gearbox Fastening bolts Travel gearbox (PN 3683483 only) - Spur gear section - Brake-chambers - Magnetic plugs Fastening bolts Travel gearbox (PNs 3683496 and 3749598 only) - Hydraulic motor chambers - Magnetic plugs Fastening bolts

4

Quantity/ No.

Check for tightness (see „Service Manual“) Check tension, check condition Check level

Check for tightness (see „Service Manual“)

Check for tightness (see „Service Manual“) Replace Clean Check function Check function Check function Change oil Change oil Replace Check for tightness (see „Service Manual“) Change oil Check for tightness (see „Service Manual“) Change oil Change oil Change oil Clean Check for tightness (see „Service Manual“) Change oil Change oil Clean Check for tightness (see „Service Manual“)

2x7 1 1 1 2x1 24 2x14 2x1 44 24 2x14 2x24 24 2x24

see “Refilling quantities – Oil“ table

3-13

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Plan N – After initial commissioning and during the running-in period (after 100 OH) Page 2 of 2 Location Swing ring Fastening bolts (swing ring, undercarriage and superstructure) Superstructure Fastening bolts, especially at superstructure / pedestal / operator´s cab All lines, fittings and connections

3-14

Servicing work

Check for tightness (see „Service Manual“)

Check for tightness (see „Service Manual“) Inspect visually for leaks, wearing marks

Quantity/ No.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Plan T Plan T - Every 10 OH or every working shift (whichever comes first) Plan W - Every 60 OH or every working week (whichever comes first) Location

Servicing work

Engine Engine oil reservoir (optional) Engine monitoring, BCS

Check oil level Check oil level Check monitoring lamps and BCS display for fault messages

Cooling system Cooling fluid level Radiator Fuel system Fuel filter Water trap (optional) Fuel reservoir Air-intake system Intake and clean-air lines Electrical system Lighting Switchgear cabinet - Breather filter - Dust trap - EMERGENCY OFF button Monitoring, warning and control elements BCS Hydraulic system

Hydraulic oil reservoir Oil cooler Fan wheel Pump drive gearbox - Pre-chambers - Expansion reservoir Oil filter (tell-tale) Reservoirs for used grease at the A-frame

Check Check / clean Drain off water Drain off water Drain off water and sediment (if necessary) Check BCS - indication Check for tightness and leaks

Page 1 of 2 Quantity/ No. 2 2

Plan T   

Plan W   

2 2

 

 

2x1 2x1 2x1

  

  

Check operation

Remove dust Check function Check function of monitoring, warning and control elements Check function Check function of working and travelling movement Inspect visually for leaks Check oil level Check / clean Check condition Check oil level Check oil level Check Check, depollute used grease

 

1

1 6





 

  

 

 

1 4 4 2



2 2x1 2





       

3-15

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Plan T – Every 10 OH or every working shift (whichever comes first) Plan W – Every 60 OH or every working week (whichever comes first)

Page 2 of 2

Location

Servicing work

Quantity/ No.

Plan T

Plan W

Swing gearbox

Check oil level

4





Travel gearbox

Check for leaks

2





Service station (tanklift)

Inspect visually for leaks and damages









Undercarriage Tracks

Inspect track tension visually

Track roller

Check for leaks and free movement

2x7



Support roller

Check for leaks and free movement

2x2



Idler

Check for leaks and free movement

2



Face shovel

Inspect clam cylinders chambers, remove all accumulated debris, rocks, soil and so on.

Central lubricating system Grease container Lubricating points Air conditioner (optional) On-board crane (optional) 5 - Fastening bolts Crane drive engine

Hydraulic oil reservoir - Reflow filter (contamination indicator) Fire extinguisher Automatic fire-extinguishing system (optional) Escape ladder - Locking device - Ladder Emergency escape device / seat (optional) - Harness holding device on cab roof All lines, fittings and connections Hydraulic shovel Operator’s cab - Window panes - ROPS structure - Operator’s seat belt - Trainer’s seat belt

5 before each deployment

3-16

2

2x1

Check filling level Check visually Carry out all servicing work (see “Air Conditioning manual“)

1

Check for tightness Check oil level (see “Crane drive Engine“ Operation and Maintenance Manual) Check oil level Check

16 1

Check condition Check control module

2 1









 

  

1 1  

 

Check function Check function Check free movement Check completeness and condition

   

   

Check for tightness Inspect visually for leaks, wearing marks Check visually / Overall cleaning

 

  

Clean Inspect visually for damage Check condition Check condition

   

   

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Plan A – E Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH)

Page 1 of 7 Location Servicing in acc. with W or T Monitoring, warning and control elements - Joystick, plate, cardan joint - and control spool - Pedal - Control spool (machine with loading shovel) - Control spool (machine with backhoe bucket) Operator’s cab - Fastening bolts to cab module

6

Servicing work

Menge / No.

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E     

Clean, then grease lightly

26







Clean, then grease lightly

3x26







Clean, then grease lightly

2x26













Check for tightness (see “Service Manual” for tightening torque)

apply a thin layer of low temperature grease

3-17

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH) Page 2 of 7 Location Engine Inspection and servicing

Servicing work

See: Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual Change oil Take an oil sample Clean Replace Check / replace Check tension Check condition

Oil filter Hoses and clamps V-belt V-belt - Bearing - Fastening bolts - Rubber bearing Crank case breather

Check tightness Check condition Clean

Starter Water pump

Check Check

After 2000 OH:

See: Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual Check Inspect Vibration damper Inspect/Adjust Check Further maintenance work see “Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual”

Engine mounts Crankshaft Electronic Unit Injector Turbo charger

7

see: “Filling quantities – Oil“ table

3-18

Menge / No.

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E

2











27 2x1

 

 

2x3

   

   

      

      

      

  

  

  

  

  

  

2x1   

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH) Page 3 of 7 Location

Servicing work

Cooling system Radiator - Check tightness - Fastening bolts - Rubber bearing Cooling liquid (ELC)

Inspect visually for leaks

Anti-freeze Lines Hose clamps Fuel system Fuel filter Water trap (optional) - Filterelement Breather filter fuel tank Fuel tank Air-intake system Main filter element Secondary filter element Air-intake lines and clean-air lines Hoses Electrical system Battery cable connections Battery Switchgear cabinet - Breather filter - Filter element

Check tightness Check condition Check SCA-concentration (see: Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual) Change see: Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual) Check Check for leaks Check tightness

Menge / No.

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E     



  

  



18

Replace Clean Replace Replace Clean

2x3 2x1 2x1 2x1 2

Check / replace Replace Check for tightness and leaks

2x49 2 x 4 10





 

 

  

  

  

   

   

    

  

  

  





Replace 

Check for tightness Check fluid level

6

Clean Replace

1 1

  

 

 

 

 



 

 

 

8

Cooling-liquid replacement after 6000 OH at the latest

9

Replacement of main filter element after one year resp. after 3 cleaning cycles at the latest

10

Replacement of secondary filter element after one year resp. after 3 cleaning cycles of the main filter element at the latest 3-19

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH) Page 4 of 7 Location

Servicing work

Hydraulic system

Check pressure (see „Service Manual“)

Menge / No.

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E   

Oil cooler bearing - Fastening bolts

Check for tightness







- Rubber bearing

Check condition







Return-flow filter

Replace

2x7







High-pressure filter for working hydraulics Magnetic rod

Replace

4





Check / clean

1







Bypass valve (hydraulic oil reservoir) Filter for pilot control circuit

Check / clean filter sieve

4







Filter for swing pump charge circuit Filter for swing circuit Filter for bearing flushing of main pumps Hydraulic oil reservoir

Replace

4x1





Replace

2x2





Replace

2x1





Replace

2x1









Carry out oil analysis

1

Change oil

1 11 12

Breather filter

Replace

2

Pressure accumulator

Check pressure (see „Service Manual“) Replace

1

Cylinder (seals and guide rings)

11







 



  

see “Refilling quantities – Oil“ table

12

Unless it is regulary analyzed, the hydraulic oil must be changed every 5000 OH or after 3 years at the latest

3-20

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH) Page 5 of 7 Location

Servicing work

Pump drive gearbox

Carry out oil analysis Change oil Clean Change oil

- Breather filter Pre-chambers and expansion reservoirs - Breather filter Oil filter

Swing gearbox

Menge / No. 2 2 13 2x1 13 2x5

Plan A

Plan B 

2x1







2x1















2x1

Carry out oil analysis

4

Change oil

13























 



 



 

         

         







 

     

     

Carry out oil analysis

2



Check oil level Change oil Clean Check oil level Change oil Clean Check oil level Change oil Clean / replace Carry out oil analysis

2 2 13 2x6 2x1 2 x 1 13 2x1 2x2 2 x 2 13 2x3 2

Check oil level Change oil Clean Check oil level Change oil Clean / replace

2 2 13 2x6 2x2 2 x 2 13 2x3

- Magnetic rod Hydraulic motor-chambers Breather filter

13

 

4 4 x1

Travel gearbox (PN 3683483 only)

Breather filter Travel gearbox (PNs 3683496 and 3749598 only)

Plan E    

Check for contamination and damage Replace

Clean / replace

- Magnetic rod Brake-chambers

Plan D    

Clean

Breather filter

- Magnetic rod Spur gear section

Plan C    



see “Refilling quantities – Oil“ table

3-21

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH) Page 6 of 7 Location

Servicing work

Swing ring Gearing / pinion Fastening bolts (swing ring, undercarriage and superstructure)

Check grease filling Check condition Check for tightness (see „Service Manual“)

Menge / No. 1

Replace (see „Service Manual“) 14 Check wear (see „Service Manual“) Check pressure (see „Service Manual“) Replace

2

Track roller (if not connected to the central lubricating system) Central lubricating system

Check grease filling, lubricate

2x7

Oilfilter (hydraulic circuit grease pump) Grease filter (filling grease container) Grease filter (grease lines) Breather filter

Replace

Air conditioner resp. heating - Air suction filter mat

Undercarriage Diaphragm accumulator - Diaphragm

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E          





























1





Replace

1





Replace Check / replace

2 1



 

 

(see „Air Conditioner Manual“) Clean, replace if necessary

1







3













2



Check function

Hydraulic ladder - greasing point

14

Lubricate

Replace fastening bolts first time after 40 000 OH, then after every 10 000 OH

3-22

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Plan A - after every 250 OH (at 250, 750, 1250 ... OH)

Plan B - after every 500 OH (at 500, 1500, 2500 ... OH)

Plan C - after every 1000 OH (at 1000, 2000, 3000, 4000 ... OH)

Plan D - after every 5000 OH (at 5000, 15000, 25000 ... OH)

Plan E - after every 10000 OH (at 10000, 20000, 30000, ... OH) Page 7 of 7 Location On-board crane (Option) 15 - Bearing - Joint (column / boom) – Cylinder bearing – Swing ring Hydraulic system – Return-flow filter – Breather filter

Crane drive engine - Oil filter – Fastening bolts – Fuel filter – Air filter – Battery cable connection

Steel components

Modules - Fastening bolts All articulated joints and hinges

Servicing work

Lubricate Lubricate Lubricate Grease Change oil Replace Replace (see “On-Board Crane Operation and Maintenance Manual”) Clean Change oil Replace Check for tightness Replace Replace Check for tightness (see “Crane Drive Engine Operation and Maintenan”)ce Manual Visual inspection acc. to “Structural Inspection Report every 500 OH” 17 If any suspect areas have been found additional testing is required: For detailed crack analysis prepare the surface of the relevant area to be inspected and carry out the dye penetrant, magnetic powder or ultrasonic test.

Check for tightness (see “Service Manual”) Grease

15

Do all servicing jobs at least once a year and when necessary

16

see “Refilling quantities – Oil“ table

Menge / No.

Plan Plan Plan Plan Plan A B C D E

4 2 5 1 1 16 1 1 















































1 1 16 1 1 1 1 2

17

„Structural Inspection Reports“ for inspections every 500 OH can be downloaded from the CGM HMS GmbH website www.bucyrus-HEX.de, section „Support, Warranty“.

3-23

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing LUBRICATING CHART

Fig. 3-1:

3-24

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Lubricating chart – Grease (legend) No. Greasing point 1 3

4 5

6

Number

Lubricant properties

Central lubricating system – grease container

1

V 18

Track roller (if not connected to the central lubricating system)

2x7

Tribol 19 CGM HMS GmbH part no. 2764564

Hydraulic ladder On-board crane

Grease every .... operating hours 10 1000

V 18

1000 250

V 18

250 250

- Bearing - Joint (column / boom)

4 2

- Cylinder bearing

5

- Swing ring

1

Graphite spray

250

- Joystick: plate, cardan joint, control spool - Pedal (machine with shovel attachment)

2 20 3 x 2 20

V 18

1000 1000

- Pedal (machine with backhoe attachment)

2 x 2 20

250

Monitoring, warning and control elements

1000

All other greasing points are supplied with grease by the central lubricating system.

Filling quantities - Grease Greasing point Central lubricating system – grease container (different containers available) Internal gearing – Roller-bearing swing ring Idler (permanent grease filling)

Track rollers (permanent grease filling 19) Support rollers (permanent grease filling 19)

Lubricant properties

V 18 Tribol 19 CGM HMS GmbH part no.

2764564 Tribol 19 CGM HMS GmbH part no.

2764564

Filling quant. kg

lb

approx.1000

approx. 2204.6

approx. 300 2 x approx. 25

approx. 661 2 x approx. 55

14 x approx. 21

14 x approx.

46.3 4 x approx. 30.9

4 x approx. 14

18

see "LUBRICANTS" section.

19

Not in use when machine is equipped with undercarriage greasing system

20

apply a thin layer of low temperature grease 3-25

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing INSPECTION PLAN - OIL

Fig. 3-2:

3-26

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Inspection plan – Oil (legend) No. Location

Number

Lubricant properties 21

I II III.a

1

Engine

2

3

Hydraulic system

1

4

Pump drive gearbox

2

5

- Pre-chambers, expansion reservoirs Swing gearbox

6

Travel gearbox - Spur gear section

2x1 4 2 2x1

(Travel gearbox P/N 3683483 only)

- Hydraulic motor chambers 7

21

III.b III.a

2x2

Check oil level every ... OH 10

Change oil every ... OH 250

10

10000 22

60

1000

10

1000

10

1000

500

5000

500

5000

500

5000

10

250 23

10

1000 24

On-board crane (optional) - Crane drive engine

1

- Hydraulic oil reservoir

1

I II

see "LUBRICANTS" section

22

Change hydraulic oil every 5000 OH unless the oil is analyzed at regular intervals, but not later than every 3 years.

23

Change oil at least once a year.

24

Change hydraulic oil at least once a year.

3-27

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Filling quantities - oil Location

Filling quantity

Oil

litres

gal

Engine

2 x approx. 152

2 x approx. 40.2

Engine oil reservoir (optional)

2 x approx. 500

2 x approx. 132

Hydraulic system

approx. 9400

approx. 2483

Hydraulic oil reservoir

approx. 7100

approx. 1876

Pump drive gearbox - Pre-chambers (working pumps)

2 x approx. 85 8 x approx. 1,5

2 x approx. 22.5 8 x approx. 0.4

- Pre-chambers (hydraulic pumps) - Pre-chambers (cooling oil pumps) Swing gearbox

4 x approx. 0.4 2 x approx. 0.2 4 x approx. 38

4 x approx. 0.1 2 x approx. 0.05 4 x approx. 10

Travel gearbox (PN 3683483) - Spur gear section

2 x approx. 145 2 x approx. 10

2 x approx. 38.3 2 x approx. 2.6

- Brake chambers Travel gearbox (PNs 3683496 and 3749598) - Hydraulic motor chambers On-board crane (optional) - Crane drive engine

4 x approx. 0,5 2 x approx. 165

4 x approx. 0.13 2 x approx. 43.5

4 x approx. 3,5

4 x approx. 0.93

approx. 5.5

approx. 1.45

approx. 50

approx. 13.2

- Hydraulic oil reservoir

I I II II III.a III.b III.a III.a I II

Filling quantities – other Location

Filling quantity litres

gal

Cooling system - engine

2 x approx. 300

2 x approx. 79.3

Fuel tank (enlarged)

2 x approx. 6494

2 x approx. 1715.5

Fuel tank, crane drive engine (optional)

approx. 20

approx. 5.3

Screen washer

approx. 13

approx. 3.4

3-28

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES Notes on the selection of oils and greases Original CGM HMS GmbH oils and greases Besides regular and careful maintenance, the quality of the oils and greases used in the machine has a decisive influence on high performance, reliability and long service life of a machine and of its units and assemblies.

The lubricants tables in the CGM HMS GmbH Operation and Maintenance Manual contain specifications for the oils and greases that are approved for use in CGM HMS GmbH machines. These oils and greases are especially adapted to CGM HMS GmbH machines and their units and assemblies.

Other oils and greases which do not fulfil the requirements of the specifications can be the cause of premature wear or of damage to and failures of machine units and assemblies.

For this reason, CGM HMS GmbH only approves the use of the specified oils and greases.

All other qualities are not approved.

Alternative oils and greases The oils and greases filled into the machine must meet at least the specifications mentioned in the lubricants tables of the CGM HMS GmbH Operation and Maintenance Manual.

In the event of damage to the machine or to its units and assemblies caused by the use of alternative oils and greases that are not compatible with CGM HMS GmbH specifications, CGM HMS GmbH does not assume any responsibility and does not accept any warranty claims.

Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids The machine has been run in at the factory with BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid HSS (Part-No. 2482971). CGM HMS GmbH recommends using this high-grade hydraulic fluid also in operation as it has been made especially for use in these machines to which it is also perfectly adapted.

If oil analyses are performed regularly and with positive results, the BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid can remain in the machine for up to 10 000 operating hours.

If an alternative hydraulic fluid is to be used, it must fulfil the same specifications. Please note that the change interval for alternative fluids is fixed at 5 000 operating hours.

There is an increased risk of damage to hydraulic components, if different hydraulic fluids are mixed during topping up as well as when changing over to a fluid of a different type or from another manufacturer.

For topping up, it is therefore necessary to use only same hydraulic fluid as the one that is already in the hydraulic system.

When changing over to an alternative hydraulic fluid, please observe that there is always a small amount of old fluid remaining in the hydraulic system even after the system has been emptied. The mixing of this residual amount of old fluid with the new alternative fluid reduces the properties of the fluid dramatically and can cause damage to components of the hydraulic system in operation.

To avoid this result, the change-over to the alternative fluid must be performed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's prescriptions. The manufacturer must confirm that his hydraulic fluid is compatible with the BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid.

The remaining amount of old fluid must not exceed 2% of the total volume. This can only be achieved by repeated flushing with the total fluid volume.

If the remaining amount of fluid exceeds 2% of the total volume, the fluid becomes a detrimental "mixed fluid".

The operation of the system with mixed fluids must by all means be avoided.

CGM HMS GmbH assumes no warranty for damage caused as a result of the machine having been operated with consumables of inappropriate specification or with mixed fluids.

3-29

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

I.

Fig. 3-3:

3-30

Oils for combustion engines and compressors

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

II.

Oil for hydraulic system

Fig. 3-4:

3-31

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing III.a Oils for pump distribution gearboxes and travel gearboxes

Fig. 3-5:

3-32

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing III.b Oils for swing gearboxes

Fig. 3-6:

3-33

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing V. Grease for bearings, slew rings and track system (Central lubrication system)

Fig. 3-7:

3-34

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Grease for idlers, track rollers and support rollers (Lifetime lubrication)

Fig. 3-8:

3-35

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Coolant for use on all combustion engines

Fig. 3-9:

3-36

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing SERVICING WORK Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes Collect escaping oil and cooling liquid and discard without polluting the environment.

The engines, the hydraulic oil reservoir, the pump drive gearboxes, the swing gearboxes and the radiators (engine cooling liquid) are moreover equipped with automatic drain valves (1, Fig. 3-11:) These automatic drain valves permit oil- and cooling-liquid changes without polluting the environment.

Carry out oil changes when the machine is at operating temperature; warm oil drains away more easily.

Filling and draining can be done by means of a hose through the service station (tanklift) (Fig. 3-10:).

For filling and draining, a flexible hose is connected to the express coupling on the service station and to the service vehicle at the other end.

The filling operations require an overpressure, whereas the draining operations require low pressure.

Fig. 3-11:

Change oil or cooling liquid as follows:  Place a collecting recipient for used oil or cooling liquid under the corresponding automatic drain valve. For the recipient capacity refer to the "Re-filling quantities - Oil" table or to the "Refilling quantities - Other" table.  Unscrew protective cap from automatic drain valve.  Screw on hose line (2) to open the valve, so that the oil or the cooling liquid can flow out.  When the oil or the cooling liquid has drained away, unscrew hose line to allow the valve to close automatically.  Screw protective cap back in place.

Fig. 3-10:

3-37

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing ENGINE Engine - Safety instructions Start and operate combustion engines only on well-ventilated premises.

In closed rooms, exhaust gases must be evacuated to the outside.

Do not work on the exhaust system an do not make any modifications to it.

Exhaust gases from diesel engines and some of their constituents may cause cancer, birth defects and other reproductive harm.

Read and observe: "Inspection and Servicing – Safety Instructions" and the engine Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Risk of injury from hot or rotating parts of the engine.

Shut off engines and allow to cool down.

Secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Skin contact with cooling liquid is a potential health hazard.

Protect the skin from potentially harmful contact with engine oil.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Attention, Ether!

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether).

Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

“Retensioning the alternator/fan belt”, “Checking and adjusting the valve clearance”, these and other servicing works are described in the engine manufacturer's Operation and Maintenance Manual.

Before cleaning the engines Exhaust pipes and turbo chargers in the engine compartments are covered with special heat-insulating material.

This material must not be spraywashed with steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure cleaners. It will be damaged.

Therefore cover all the insulating material with plastic foils before using steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure cleaners inside the engine compartments.

3-38

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Checking the engine oil level / Topping up The engine oil temperature and oil temperature are constantly monitored by the BCS (Fig. 3-12:) when the machine is in operation.

 Draw out dipstick a second time. The oil level should now lie between the marks (arrows, Fig. 3-13:). If the oil level is at the "min" mark or below, top up with engine oil through filler tube (2, Fig. 3-14:).

The actual engine oil pressure is constantly displayed by the screen (Fig. 3-12:).

BCS gives acoustic warnings to the operator if the engine oil temperature too high or the oil pressure is too low.

Fig. 3-14:

Engine oil can also be filled in from the service station (Fig. 3-15:) through: 

express coupling (8) for the lefthand engine,

Fig. 3-12:



express coupling (9) for the righthand engine,

 Park the machine on a horizontal surface and secure against inadvertent movements.

(see chapter "Changing the engine oil").

 Shut off engines.  Draw out oil dipstick (1, Fig. 3-14:).  Wipe oil off the dipstick with a clean, lintfree cleaning rag and re-insert.

Fig. 3-15:

Fig. 3-13:

3-39

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Engine oil reservoir, checking the oil level The hydraulic shovel is equipped with an engine oil change interval prolonging mechanism (optional).

The engine oil reservoirs are located in the counterweight.

If required the oil pans of the engines are automatically filled up with engine oil from the engine oil reservoirs.

That means the engine oil pans of the engines are sufficient filled up with engine oil as long as engine oil is in the engine oil reservoirs.

Check oil level in the engine oil reservoirs regulary and fill up if neccessary.  Park the machine on a horizontal surface and secure against inadvertent movements.

Fig. 3-16:

 Shut off engines.  Check oil level at the inspection glass (arrow, Fig. 3-16:). The level should be between the “min” and “max” signs near the inspection glass.  If the oil level is below, the engine oil is filled in from the service station (Fig. 3-17:) through 

express coupling (6) for the lefthand engine oil reservoir,



express coupling (7) for the righthand engine oil reservoir.

(see chapter "Engine oil reservoir - Changing the oil").

Fig. 3-17:

3-40

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Changing the engine oil Risk of scalding from hot engine oil.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions".

The engines may also be hot.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping oil and discard without polluting the environment.

A description of the service station (tanklift) can be found in Part 2 of this manual, chapter “Service station (tanklift)”.

Drawing off engine oil with the service station  Bring engine oil to operating temperature.  Park the machine on a horizontal surface and secure.  Shut off the engines.

Draw off the engine oil through 

express coupling (8, Fig. 3-18:) for the lefthand engine



express coupling (9) for the righthand engine.

 Unscrew cap of express coupling and connect hose line of the service vehicle.  Draw off engine oil.

After the engine oil has been drawn off:  Remove the hose line. The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.

Fig. 3-18:

3-41

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Filling in engine oil  Fill in engine oil through filler tube (2, Fig. 3-19:) until the oil level has reached the "max" mark (Fig. 3-20:) on dipstick (1).

Filling in engine oil through the service station Fill in engine oil through 

express coupling (8, Fig. 3-21:) for the lefthandengine,



express coupling (9) for the righthand engine,

until the oil level has reached the "max." mark (Fig. 3-20:) on dipstick (1, Fig. 3-19:).  Unscrew cap of epress coupling and connect filling hose of the service vehicle.

Fig. 3-19:

 Start the engines and allow to run at idling for abt. 2 minutes.  Check oil level at dipstick (1, Fig. 3-19:) and top up with oil to the "max" mark (Fig. 3-20:) if required.  Remove the filling hose.

The epress coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.

Fig. 3-20:

Fig. 3-21:

3-42

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Engine oil reservoir, filling in / draining off the oil

Draining off the oil  Park the machine on a horizontal surface and secure the machine.

Risk of scalding from hot engine oil.

 Shut off the engines.

The engines oil reservoirs may also be hot.

 Draw off engine oil with the service station through

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions".



express coupling (6, Fig. 3-22:) for the lefthand engine oil reservoir,



express coupling (7) for the righthand engine oil reservoir.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping oil and discard without polluting the environment.

A description of the service station (tanklift) can be found in Part 2 of this manual, chapter “Service station (tanklift)”.

To do so  Unscrew cap of express coupling and connect hose line of the service vehicle.  Drain off engine oil.  Remove the hose line.

The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.  After the engine oil has been drawn off: Replace the oil filters for the “Oil change interval prolongation system”.

Fig. 3-22:

3-43

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Engine oil reservoir, filling in engine oil Oil grade see “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES” section.

The engine oil is filled in with the service station (Fig. 3-23:) through 

express coupling (6) for the lefthand engine oil reservoir,



express coupling (7) for the righthand engine oil reservoir.

To do so  Switch on the display system with toggle switch (23, Fig. 3-23:), indicator lamp (22) lits up.  Unscrew cap of express coupling and connect hose line of the service vehicle.

Fig. 3-23:

^

 Fill in engine oil until the oil reservoirs are filled. Monitoring lamp (1) for the lefthand oil reservoir, or monitoring lamp (2) for the righthand reservoir lit up when the reservoirs are filled.  The oil level in the reservoir can also be checked at the inspection glass (arrow, Fig. 3-24:).  Remove the hose line.

The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.  Switch off the display system with toggle switch (23, Fig. 3-23:), indicator lamp (22) is off.

Fig. 3-24:

3-44

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Filters for the “Oil change interval prolongation system”, replace Risk of scalding from hot engine oil.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions".

The filter housing may also be hot. Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping oil and discard with-out polluting the environment Oil filters Carry out servicing of the full-flow oil filters (engine oil change interval prolongation) in accordance with the engine operating instructions.

Fig. 3-25:

The filterelements (two for each engine) are placed in the engine compartment, at the rear wall of the hydraulic tank.

Replacement:  Shut off the engines.  Unscrew the filters (arrow, Fig. 3-25:).  Install new filter together with slightly oiled sealing ring and tighten by hand.

Thereafter:  Allow engines to run at idling for a short while and check filters for tightness and leaks before shutting off the engines.  Check oil level after abt. 10 minutes and top up, if required.

3-45

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Replacing the oil filter Risk of scalding from hot engine oil.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions".

Oil filters Carry out servicing of the oil filters (arrow, Fig. 3-26:) in accordance with the engine operating and maintenance instructions.

Replacement:  Shut off the engines.

The filter housing may also be hot.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping oil and discard with-out polluting the environment.

 Unscrew the filters.  Install new filter together with slightly oiled sealing ring and tighten by hand.

Thereafter:  Allow engines to run at idling for a short while and check filters for tightness and leaks before shutting off the engines.  Check oil level after abt. 10 minutes and top up, if required.

Fig. 3-26:

3-46

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Cold-starting fluid (ether) - Replacing the pressure vessel

If the machine is used in low temperatures, the engine may be equipped with a cold-starting device.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing Safety instructions"

The pressure vessel containing the cold-starting fluid (ether) can be installed in or near the engine compartment.

Risk of injury Cold-starting fluid is composed mainly of ether.

Ether is toxic when the mists and vapours are inhaled. Ether is harmful to the eyes, the skin, the respiratory system and the central nervous system.

Prolonged inhalation of ether can be fatal.

The vessel is screwed onto an electro-mechanical metering valve. At temperatures below 0°C (32°F), this valve is activated automatically by the engine electronics and injects a precisely metered amount of cold-starting fluid into the air intake duct of the engine.

Replacing the pressure vessel:  Remove the clamp around the pressure vessel.

In contact with the skin, ether can cause frostbites and irritations.

 Unscrew the pressure vessel carefully from the metering valve.

Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure.

 Remove the used seal from the metering valve.

These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

 Insert a new seal into the valve (supplied with the new pressure vessel).

Before replacing an empty pressure vessel: Read and observe the instructions on the pressure vessels.

For further details please refer to the instructions and safety data-sheets of the manufacturer / supplier of pressure vessels with cold starting fluid (ether).

 Screw the new pressure vessel onto the metering valve and tighten by hand.  Fasten the clamp round the pressure vessel.

Even apparently empty pressure vessels can contain rests of ether and therefore explode if they are damaged or heated up above 49°C / 120°F. They must therefore be handled in the same way as full pressure vessels. 

Do not keep them on the machine.



Do not damage or open the vessels.

Provide for sufficient ventilation of the surroundings.



Do not expose the vessels to great heat or direct sunlight.

Do not eat, drink or smoke when replacing an empty vessel.



Do not dispose of in fire.



Keep the vessels in a place unaccessible to unauthorized persons.



Dispose of the vessels properly.

Do not inhale the vapours of escaping cold-starting fluid (ether).

Avoid skin contact. Wear suitable protective gloves and goggles.

3-47

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing COOLING SYSTEM

Temperature

Risk of scalding from hot cooling liquid.

The cooling liquid circuit is controlled by a thermostat. The max. admissible temperature is ca. 100° C (212°F).

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions".

In case of higher temperatures, the BCS displays a warning on the screen (Fig. 3-27:).

Secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Shut off the engines and allow to cool down.

Collect escaping cooling liquid and discard without polluting the environment.

Protect the skin from contact with cooling liquid.

Skin contact with cooling liquid is a potential health hazard.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Fig. 3-27:

3-48

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Radiators The radiators are located on the superstructure in the counterweight module.

Weekly checks:  Check radiator fins for dirt and clean, if required.

Cooling-liquid level check An insufficient cooling-liquid level is displayed on the BCS screen (Fig. 3-28:).

The level indicator (4, Fig. 3-29:) at the expansion reservoirs shows the liquid level as well.

The cooling-liquid level should be between the “FULL” and the “LOW” marking. Top up with cooling liquid, if required (see “Topping up cooling liquid”).

Fig. 3-28:

Fig. 3-29:

3-49

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Topping up cooling liquid Fill cooling liquid through filler tube (1, Fig. 3-30:) or through express couplings of the ServiceStation (2 and 3, Fig. 3-31:) into the cooling system (see “Topping up cooling liquid using the ServiceStation”).

The caps of the expansion reservoirs (1, Fig. 3-30:) are accessible from above.

Risk of scalding from hot cooling liquid under pressure.

Before opening the cap: Release pressure by lifting the red lever on top of the cap.

Open cap cautiously after releasing pressure.  First release pressure from the expansion reservoir by lifting up the red lever integrated in cap (1).  When the pressure has been released turn cap into the "open" position and remove.

Do not fill in cold cooling liquid when the engine is at operating temperature.

Before refilling, allow engine to cool down to below 50° C (122°F).

Fig. 3-31:

For topping up of the cooling system use specially prepared cooling liquid CAT ELC, CGM HMS GmbH Part No. 2482777 only.

This gives an anti-freeze protection down to -37 °C / -34.6°F. For use at lower temperatures, ask the CGM HMS GmbH Service or your CAT-dealer.

After filling in cooling liquid allow the engines to run for short period to eliminate air voids before topping up with cooling liquid to the lower edge of the filler tube.  Remove hose from express coupling.

The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.

In case of significant cooling-liquid losses, the whole cooling system must be checked for leaks.

Check regularly:  all lines for leaks and all hose clamps for tightness.

Checking the SCA concentration Observe the instructions of the engine manufacturer with regard to the SCA concentration (see “Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual”).

Fig. 3-30:

3-50

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Topping up cooling liquid using the Service-Station A description of the Service Station can be found in Part 2 of this manual, chapter “Service Station (tanklift)”.

The cooling liquid can also be filled in with the service station (Fig. 3-32:) through 

express coupling (2) for the lefthand engine,



express coupling (3) for the righthand engine.

 Prior to topping up cooling liquid release pressure from the cooling system.

To do so move lever of the ball valves in the direction of the arrow (Fig. 3-32:).

The pressure is released then and the express couplings are then accessible.  Remove cap of express coupling. Connect the filling hose of the service vehicle.

Fig. 3-32:

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes" section.  Fill with coolant until the cooling-liquid level lies between the “FULL” and the “LOW” marking of the level indicator at the expansion reservoirs.  Remove hose.

The express coupling closes automatically.  Push on protective cap.  Close ball valves (Fig. 3-32:).

3-51

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Cooling liquid, change Risk of scalding from hot cooling liquid under pressure.

Drawing off cooling liquid Cooling liquid can be drained from the cooling system by means of the express couplings located at the service station (Fig. 3-33:) through

Open cap of expansion reservoir cautiously after releasing pressure.



express coupling (2) for the lefthand cooling circuit,

Wait until cooling liquid has cooled down.



express coupling (3) for the righthand cooling circuit.

Do not fill in cold cooling liquid when the engine is at operating temperature.

A description of the Service Station can be found in Part 2 of this manual, chapter “Service Station (tanklift)”.

Before refilling, allow engine to cool down to below 50° C (122°F).

The expansion reservoirs may also be hot. Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping cooling liquid and discard without polluting the environment.

Only use “ELC” cooling liquid, see: “Topping up cooling liquid” and the engine manufacturers recommendations. Do not use pure water.

The cooling liquid must be analized regularly according to the engine manufacturer’s Operating and Maintenance Manual and changed after 12000 operating hours or after six years at the latest.

 Prior to drawing off cooling liquid release pressure from the cooling system.

To do so move lever of the ball valves in the direction of the arrow (Fig. 3-33:).

The pressure is released then and the express couplings are then accessible.  Remove cap of express coupling. Connect hose line of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes" section.  Draw off cooling liquid.  Fill in fresh cooling liquid, see “Filling in cooling liquid”.

Fig. 3-33:

3-52

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Filling in cooling liquid A description of the Service Station can be found in Part 2 of this manual, chapter “Service Station (tanklift)”.  Shut off the engines.  Fill in cooling liquid with the service station (Fig. 3-34:) through: 

express coupling (2) for the lefthand cooling circuit,



express coupling (3) for the righthand cooling circuit.

 Check ball valves (Fig. 3-34:).

They must be open. The express couplings are then accessible.

Fig. 3-34:

 Remove cap of express coupling.

Connect hose of the service vehicle.

The hose line and its use are described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes" section.  Fill with coolant until the cooling-liquid level lies between the “FULL” and the “LOW” marking of the level indicator at the expansion reservoirs (4, Fig. 3-35:).  Remove hose from express coupling.

The coupling closes automatically.  Push on protective cap.  Close ball valves (Fig. 3-34:).

The cooling liquid can also be filled in through filler neck (1, Fig. 3-35:).

Fig. 3-35:

3-53

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Testing the cooling liquid composition The “Engine Operating and Maintenance Manual” contain a detailed description of how to prepare and test the cooling liquid composition. In case of imminent frost check that the factory-adjusted antifreeze concentration is sufficient for the expected temperatures.

Check the cooling liquid in the cooling system regularly to ensure that the ELC is sufficiently concentrated to prevent corrosion under the corresponding operating conditions.

Coolant samples can be taken at the couplings located at the service station.

Release pressure from the cooling system before taking a cooling liquid sample. To do so use the levers at the caps of the expansion reservois or the ball valves at the service station. See chapter “Cooling liquid, change / Drawing off cooling liquid”.

3-54

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing AIR-INTAKE SYSTEM Risk of injury when falling down.

Put on your fall protection equipment before entering the superstructure.

Risk of injury caused by hot parts of the engine exhaust system.

Let exhaust cool down.

Dust trap, cleaning The dust trap (arrow, Fig. 3-37:) collects dust and dirt that infiltrates the air filter housing.  To remove dust and dirt, squeeze the flexible part of the dust trap several times.

Dust and dirt will be detached and come off.

Read and observe the "Engine - Safety instructions" chapter.

Do not start the engine when parts of the air-intake system have been detached.

Engine damage may occur if the engine is allowed to draw in unfiltered air.

Secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Each engine is equipped with four dry-air filters (Fig. 3-36:) consisting of pre-cleaner, main filter element and secondary filter element.

Fig. 3-37:

Fig. 3-36:

3-55

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Main filter elements

Removal and installation

Insufficient air-intake performance, caused by a contaminated main filter element, is displayed on the BCS-screen (Fig. 3-38:).

 Loosen clamps (1, Fig. 3-39:) at the air filter housing and remove cover (2).

Clean or renew main filter elements only if the BCS displays a warning on the screen (Fig. 3-38:) with the engines running at high speed.

New or cleaned main filter elements should always be at hand to shorten excavator downtimes.

 Withdraw main filter element (3).

Do not remove secondary filter element (4).  Replace or clean main filter element.  Before installing the filter element, clean contact faces at cover (2, Fig. 3-39:) and at filter housing.  Put on cover (2) using clamps (1).

Fig. 3-38:

Fig. 3-39:

3-56

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Checking and cleaning the main filter element  Examine the filter paper of the element with a lamp which is introduced into the element (Fig. 3-40:). Any damage is then clearly visible.

Replace damaged or deformed elements immediately.

 Check element seal. When the seal is damaged, the filter element must be replaced, too.

Cleaning with compressed air is suitable if the filter element is to be re-used immediately.  Blow filter element (Fig. 3-41:) clean with dry compressed air from the inside by moving the compressed-air gun up and down.

The pressure at the nozzle must not exceed 3 bars / 43 psi.

Fig. 3-40:

Cleaning is terminated when all visible dust has been blown out of the filter element.

Never clean filter element by beating against hard objects.

Replace the main filter element after 1000 operating hours or 3 cleaning cycles; and, after one year of operation at the latest.

Fig. 3-41:

3-57

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Secondary filter element

Air-intake lines

Removal and installation

At regular intervals:

 Replace the secondary filter elements (4, Fig. 3-42:) after 1000 operating hours or 3 cleaning cycles of the main filter elements. After one year of operation at the latest.

 Check intake lines for leaks and hose clamps for tightness.

Never clean the secondary filter element, but always renew.

 Remove cover (2, Fig. 3-42:) and main filter element (3) as described above.  Withdraw secondary filter element (4).  Clean the air filter housing.  Install the new secondary filter element and a cleaned or a new main filter element.

Fig. 3-42:

3-58

 Replace hoses between filter housing and engine.

During all work on the air-intake system ensure proper sealing to prevent unfiltered air from reaching the engines.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing FUEL SYSTEM Fuel system - Safety instructions Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Before and when working on the fuel system: 

shut off the engines,



secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section,



keep away naked flames,



do not smoke.

Fuel tank supply valve – function The fuel tank supply valve (arrow, Fig. 3-43:) is mounted in the fuel line from the fuel tank to the engine. It is located on top of each fuel tank.

This ball valve cuts the fuel flow to the engine when closed.  To close the ball valve, shift the lever in position “0”.  To open the ball valve, shift lever in position “I”.

Read and observe the "Fuel system – Safety instructions” chapter.

Collect escaping fuel and discard without polluting the environment.

Diesel fuel may cause skin injury.

Avoid skin contact with diesel fuel. Wear firm working clothing.

Wear protective gloves or use a barrier cream.

Fig. 3-43:

3-59

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Replacing the fuel filter Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Collect escaping fuel and discard without polluting the environment.

Venting the fuel system Venting the fuel filters:  Switch on primary fuel pump with switch (arrow, Fig. 3-45:). The fuel filters get filled with fuel, air is bled through the return lines into the fuel reservoir.

Fig. 3-45:

Fig. 3-44:

 Shut off the fuel supply valves between fuel tanks and engines.  Unscrew filters (Fig. 3-44:).  Do not fill new filter with fuel. This prevents the injection system from beeing contaminated by unfiltered fuel after fuel filter change.  Apply clean diesel fuel to the new filter gasket and screw it onto the filter head by hand.

Continue to tighten filter by a further ½ to ¾ turn.

Venting the fuel tanks: The fuel tanks are vented with breather valves (arrow, Fig. 3-46:).

Breather filter fuel tanks, replace  Replace breather valves regularly according to the maintenance plan.

To do so unscrew cap (1, Fig. 3-46:) of breather valve and replace with a new one.

The filter element is integrated in the cap.

Tightening the filter element with a tool may damage or deform the filter head.  Open the fuel supply valves between fuel tanks and engines.  Bleed fuel system, see “Venting the fuel system”.  Start engines and check fuel system for leaks.

For more information see: “Engine Operation and Maintenance Manual”.

Fig. 3-46:

3-60

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Cleaning the fuel tanks Explosion hazard due to fuel vapors.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing, Safety instructions" chapter.

Do not use white spirit, paraffin oil or other solvents.

For flushing and cleaning use diesel fuel.

Avoid skin contact.

Skin contact with diesel fuel may cause skin injury.

Wear firm working clothing.

Wear protective gloves or use a barrier cream.

 Use up as much fuel as possible.  Check how much fuel remains in the tank and place a collecting recipient of sufficient size under the drain plugs of the tanks.  Shut off the fuel supply valves (arrow, Fig. 3-47:). To do so, shift lever of the ball valve from position “I” to position “0”.  Loosen drain plug (5, Fig. 3-48:) at the bottom of the fuel tank and drain off fuel.  Flush tank with diesel fuel.  Inspect fuel tank inside for damages.  Screw drain plug back (5) in place.

Fuel must be prevented from penetrating into the soil. Keep fuel for filtering and re-use or discard without polluting the environment.

Fig. 3-47:

Fig. 3-48:

3-61

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

 After cleaning the fuel tanks fill in fresh fuel.  Open cover of filler tube on top of the fuel tanks and screw off lid of filler tube (2, Fig. 3-49:).  Fill in fuel through the strainer in filler tube.  Fuel can also be filled into both fuel tanks through the service station (1, Fig. 3-50:).

For more information see chapter “Refuelling” in Part 2 of this manual.  Start filling in fuel.

The filling level is displayed on the BCS screen (Fig. 3-51:).  Stop filling when the fuel tanks are filled.

Fig. 3-49:

 Remove filling hose.

The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.  Open fuel supply valves (arrow, Fig. 3-47:).

To do so, shift lever of the ball valve from position “0” to position “I”.

Fig. 3-50:

Fig. 3-51:

3-62

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Water trap (option), clean / replace

Servicing

Water contained in the fuel is removed by the water trap (Fig. 3-52:).

Carry out the following works in accordance with the servicing schedule and at regular intervals:

Draining off water

Collect escaping liquid in a recipient suitable for diesel fuel and discard without polluting the environment.  Loosen venting plug (9, Fig. 3-53:) and leave drain valve (3) open until there is no more water in the diesel fuel flowing out of the valve.

The liquid flowing out of the valve flushes and cleans the filter element (6) von from top to bottom.  Close drain valve (3) and tighten venting plug (9).

Fig. 3-52:

Fig. 3-53:

3-63

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Checking / cleaning the filter element

 Clean recipient (1) and filter housing (4).

Replace filter element (6, Fig. 3-54:) only when the suction resistance is too high.

 Loosen flange (2).

Collect escaping liquid in a recipient suitable for diesel fuel and discard without polluting the environment.  Loosen venting plug (9) and leave drain valve (3) open until the reservoir is completely empty.  Remove cover (5).  Remove spring holder (7) and filter element (6) from filter housing (4).  Check / replace filter element (6)  Clean filter housing (4) using diesel fuel.  Check cover sealing and replace,if necessary.  Insert filter element (6) and spring housing (7) into filter housing (4).  Fasten cover (5) on filter housing (4).

Check for proper sealing.

Fig. 3-54:

3-64

 Take off recipient (1) and clean with diesel fuel  Check cover sealing and replace, if necessary.  Attach recipient (1) with flange (2) at filter housing (4).

Check for proper sealing.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing ELECTRICAL SYSTEM Electrical system - Safety instructions Risk of injury caused by battery acid and gases.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Carry out every work on the electrical / electronical systems only if you are a qualified electrician and after having received special trainings.

Wear goggles, working gloves and firm working clothing.

Carry out voltage and continuity checks only by means of a test lamp or a measuring instrument.

Do not check by "touching ground" with a bare wire. The short-circuit thus produced damages the alternator and the electronic modules of the PMS and the CMS.

Alternator - Instructions Never disconnect cables from the alternator, regulator and the battery when the engine is running to avoid damage to the alternator and regulator.

Do not interchange the cables when connecting the battery (observe polarity).

Carry out voltage and continuity checks only by means of a test lamp or a measuring instrument.

Do not check by "touching ground" with a bare wire. The short-circuit thus produced damages the alternator and the regulator.

Electrical circuit diagrams The electrical circuit diagrams and wiring diagrams are annexed to the spare-parts list. Further information can be found in the CGM HMS Service Manual "Working with circuit diagrams".

Electrical system switch-cabinets The electrical system switch-cabinets are located in the cab module, in the pump compartment and behind the hydraulic reservoir. The cabinets are described in the spare-parts list (electrical circuit diagram) together with the designation of the electrical components.

Fuses and their function are listed on a sheet inside the switch-cabinets in the cab module.

Use only original fuses with the specified current rating.

Replacing lamps and bulbs If a bulb does not work after replacement, the pertaining fuses, connection cables and contacts must be checked.

Xenon-working floodlights are operated with high voltage.

Read and observe the chapter: “Floodlight projector, replacing the lamp”.

Floodlights working with LED-technology do not have replaceable lamps / bulbs. The floodlight must be replaced if defective.

Cables and cable lugs must not get in contact with other metal parts. Replace broken or damaged cables and the respective cable lugs.

3-65

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Xenon floodlight projector (optional), replacing the lamp Safety instructions The floodlight projectors use xenon technology.

The lamp is not a usual incandescent lamp, but a gas discharge lamp which is operated with a ballast unit. The ballast unit is integrated in the floodlight projector.

When the projector is turned on, the ballast unit generates a high-voltage pulse of more than 25000 volts to start the xenon lamp.

Warning!

This high-voltage pulse can be a lifethreatening risk, if a person comes into contact with any of the live components. This can be the case, for instance, 

if the lamp is operated improperly,



if the projector housing is opened in an inapropriate way or



by sticking one's hand into an opened or damaged projector.

Protect yourself from potential risks by reading and by observing the following safety instructions.

Always switch off the projector and disconnect it from its power supply before replacing the Xenon lamp.

Allow the xenon lamp to cool off before removing it from the projector.

Wear googles and safety gloves when replacing the lamp.

Never stick your hand into the lampholder. The contacts may still be live with residual voltage.

Never switch on the projector when the xenon lamp has been removed.

There is a risk of voltage discharge and damage to the lampholder.

The glass body of the xenon lamp is filled with different gases and metal gases and is under gauge pressure (risk of injury from splinters).

If the xenon lamp breaks apart in closed room (workshop), all persons must leave the room and the room must be ventilated for at least 20 minutes to exclude any health risks caused by gases.

Further instructions Always hold the xenon lamp by the base. Never touch the glass bulb. Sweat and grease from the skin would evaporate when the lamp is in operation and obscure the reflector.

If the fingers have nevertheless come into contact with the glass bulb, the fingerprints must be removed with a clean cloth and some alcohol.

The replaced Xenon lamp must be disposed of as special waste.

Never switch on projectors when housing or electrical wiring is damaged.

Have damaged projectors be replaced by a qualified electrician as soon as possible.

3-66

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Replacing a defective Xenon-lamp Read and observe the: „Xenon floodlight projector, replacing the lamp, Safety instructions“.  Switch off the projector, shut off the engine and cut out the battery main switch.  Wait until the housing of the floodlight projector has cooled down.  Withdraw the power supply connector from the projector.

Fig. 3-55

 Remove four screws (1, Fig. 3-55) and withdraw the reflector (2) from the projector housing.  Withdraw connector (Fig. 3-56) from Xenon lamp socket.  Unscrew Xenon lamp holding clamp (Fig. 3-57).  Remove the defective Xenon lamp and replace by a new one. Do not touch the glass bulb of the lamp.  Reinstall the new lamp. Screw lamp holding clamp back in place.  Plug the power supply connector onto the lamp.  Re-assemble the housing.

Fig. 3-56

Fig. 3-57

3-67

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Lighting systems in LED technonogy, instructions The lights of the maintenance lighting system (Fig. 3-58) as well as the working floodlights (Fig. 3-59) are equipped with lamps in LED technology (lightemitting diodes).

High-performance LEDs ensure the emission of light with high luminance. If the light is allowed to shine directly into the eyes from a short distance and over prolonged periods, there is a risk of injury to the retina.

Do not look for a prolonged period into the light cones of the LEDs. Adjust the lights in such way that they do not shine directly into the eyes and that you are not blinded by the glare.

The lights become hot in operation.

The heat is dispersed via the ribbed metal housing.

Fig. 3-58

For this reason, the housings must not be covered up and cleaning rags or similar things placed over them.

The high-performance LEDs in these lights have a very long service life and can therefore not be replaced. If one or more of these LEDs fail, the light can remain in service if the remaining luminance is still sufficient.

Fig. 3-59

3-68

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Battery, checking the state of charge Warning! Battery Posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Risk of injury caused by battery acid and gases.

Wear goggles, working gloves and firm working clothing.

Do not eat, drink or smoke when handling batteries.

Wash hands after handling.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Checking the battery fluid level (Not applicable in case of maintenance-free batteries)

Checking charge of batteries The acid temperature must be 20 ° C / 68°F.  Unscrew caps of the battery (Fig. 3-60:).  Measure the acid density of the battery using a commercial acid tester (Fig. 3-60:).

The acid density measured is in direct correlation with the battery charge.

Acid density kg / dm3 Charge Normal Tropical conditicondition ons 1,28 1,23 fully charged 1,20 1,12 half charged, recharge 1,12 1,08 discharged, recharge immediately On closed / sealed (so called „maintenance-free“) batteries, the charging status can be checked using a charge meter. Ask your Caterpillar dealer for assistance.

 Unscrew caps (Fig. 3-60:).  If checking inserts are provided, the battery acid must reach up to their bottom.  If no checking inserts are provided, insert a clean wooden rod into the battery until it contacts the upper edge of the cell plates. The rod must be moistened over at least 10 mm / 0.4".  If the fluid level is too low, top up with distilled water only.

Fig. 3-60:

3-69

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Battery, removing and installing Warning! Battery Posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds, chemicals known to cause cancer and reproductive harm.

Risk of injury caused by battery acid and gases.

Wear goggles, working gloves and firm working clothing.

Do not eat, drink or smoke when handling batteries.

Wash hands after handling.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Disconnect and reconnect the terminal clamping lugs in the prescribed order.

 Shut off the engines before removing the batteries to avoid damaging the alternator and the regulator.  Turn key in key-switch to position "0" and withdraw.  Switch battery-isolator-switch to position "0" (if equipped with).  Switch battery-main-switch to position "0" (if equipped with).  Open battery cabinet.  Unscrew wing nuts (4, Fig. 3-61:)  Detach battery holder (3).  Disconnect the cable lug from the negative terminal of the battery.  Disconnect the cable lug from the positive terminal of the battery.  Insulate the cable lugs.

Disconnecting and connecting in the wrong order may cause short-circuits.

 Lift battery out of battery cabinet.

The batteries (Fig. 3-61:) are located in a cabinet behind the hydraulic oil reservoir.

 Install the new batteries.

The six 12-volt batteries are connected in series and in parallel, so that the system voltage is 24 volts.

Before installing new batteries, the contact faces of the battery terminal posts and the cable lugs must be cleaned down to the bright metal.  Connect the cable lug to the positive terminal of the battery. Tighten the clamping screws of the cable lugs. Do not use too much force to avoid deformation.  Connect the cable lug to the negative terminal of the battery.  Apply special terminal grease or acid-free vaseline on the battery terminal posts and clamping lugs. Loose or corroded clamping lugs will lead to alternator or regulator overloading.  Attach battery holder (3). Fasten with wing nuts (4).  Close battery cabinet.

Fig. 3-61:

After putting the machine back to operation:  Check battery cabling for tightness, retighten if necessary.  Check battery holders and wing nuts for tightness, retighten if necessary.  Repeat these checks regularly.

3-70

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Charging batteries inside the machine, safety instructions Explosion hazard.

Battery gases are highly flammable.

Keep any potential ignition sources, such as unshielded lights or burning cigarettes, away from the batteries.

Charging the batteries  Cut out the battery main switch.  For battery ventilation unscrew the cover of the battery cabinet.  Connect the charging cable to the socket outlet (Fig. 3-62:).  Switch on the charger and watch the charging process.

Risk of injury from acid splashes and battery gases.

Stop the charging process: 

if the batteries are getting hot,

Wear safety goggles or a face protection shield and acid proof protective gloves.



if acid escapes from the batteries,



if the charge current is still insignificantly low even after 15 minutes of charging.

Do not lean over the batteries while charging.

Before starting a new charging cycle, check the batteries and the connecting cable thoroughly and replace any damaged components. It may be necessary to remove the batteries and to charge them one by one.

The batteries of the machine can also be charged while installed in the machine.

For this purpose, the arm of the service station (Fig. 3-62:) is equipped with a socket outlet for a charging cable.

When the batteries are full:  Shut off the charger first before withdrawing the charging cable from the socket outlet.

Risk of fire.

Read the instructions of the charger in order to know when the charging cycle has ended.

Do not use the socket outlet (Fig. 3-62:) for jump-starting of the engines.

The batteries are fully charged, if

The connectors and the cables are not designed for the high currents flowing during the starting phase.

Check before charging why the batteries are discharged and replace the batteries if they are defective.



the charging current and voltage remain constant (for voltage-controlled chargers);



the charging current does not any rise longer for two hours (current-controlled chargers);



the charger shuts off or switches over to trickle charge (automatic chargers).

Check the connecting cables of the battery set for damage, corrosion and tight fit.

Never charge the batteries while they are frozen.

Warm them up beforehand and check for proper functioning.

Do not charge the batteries when they are warmer than "warm to the touch" (45 °C / 113 °F).

Use only approved chargers for 24 volts DC. Read and observe the instructions for the charger.

The charging cable must have a conductor crosssection of at least 70 mm2.

Fig. 3-62:

3-71

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Switchgear cabinet Breather filter In the switchgear cabinet, the air is drawn in by a ventilator via the filter (Fig. 3-63:).

Emptying dust trap  Press dust trap (14, Fig. 3-63:) and hold until the dust trap is empty.

Emptying the dust collector  Loosen clamps (11, Fig. 3-63:).  Remove dust collector (12) and empty.

Fig. 3-63:

Filter element  Remove the dust collector (12, Fig. 3-63:).  Withdraw filter element (13, Fig. 3-64:).  Replace or clean filter element (13).  Refit dust collector (12, Fig. 3-63:).

Fig. 3-64:

3-72

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Checking and cleaning the filter element Check the filter paper of the element by inserting a lamp into the element (Fig. 3-65:). Any damage can then be seen.

Replace damaged or distorted element immediately.

 Check element seal. If damaged, replace filter element too.

Cleaning with compressed air allows the filter element to be re-used immediately.  Blow filter element (Fig. 3-66:) dry with compressed air by moving the compressed-air piston up and down inside it.

Fig. 3-65:

The pressure at the nozzle must not exceed 3 bars / 43psi.

Cleaning is completed when no more dust is seen to leave the filter element.

Never clean filter element by beating it against hard objects.

Replace main filter element after 1000 operating hours or 3 cleaning cycles, but not later than after one year of operation.

Fig. 3-66:

3-73

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Hydraulic system - Safety instructions Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Shut off the engines.

Secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine” section.

Before working on the hydraulic system, make sure that the system is without pressure and that the residual pressures have also been eliminated.

Depressurizing the hydraulic system Hydraulic systems may only be opened if they are completely depressurized. Even when an excavator is parked on a horizontal surface with the working equipment resting on the ground (Fig. 3-67: und Fig. 3-68:) and with its drive engines stationary, there may still be a considerable amount of residual pressure in parts of the hydraulic system, as e.g. the primary pressure resulting from the last hydraulic movements before the immobilization.

Residual pressures disappear only gradually. If work is to be carried out on the hydraulic system immediately after the immobilization, the system must be freed from pressure, i.e. depressurized:

Risk of burning caused by hot hydraulic components (e.g. hydraulic oil reservoir, cylinder, valves).

Wait until the hydraulic system is cooled down to moderate temperature before starting work.

Contact with hydraulic oil can cause skin injury.

Avoid skin contact with hydraulic oil.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Fig. 3-67:

Fig. 3-68:

 Locate the system section to be opened.  Depressurize the section to be opened. If required, the necessary measures described must be combined  Open the depressurized system section with caution.

3-74

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Examples of system sections: 1) working hydraulics 2) servo control circuit 3) precharged return-flow line Depressurizing  Park the excavator on a horizontal surface.  Set the working equipment on the ground.

Checking the hydraulic oil level  Bring hydraulic oil to operating temperature (abt. 50 °C / 122°F).  Park the machine on a horizontal surface.  Stand working equipment on the ground as shown on the sign (2, Fig. 3-70:).

The oil level must be between the “min” and “max” marks of the sign (2, Fig. 3-70:) near the inspection glass (1).

 Shut off the drive engines.  Do not switch off the electrical system Sections 1 and 2: servo control and working hydraulics: - Shift both control levers repeatedly into all directions (Fig. 3-69:).

Fig. 3-70:

The hydraulic oil level is also monitored by the BCS. The BCS displays a warning on the screen (Fig. 3-71:) if the hydraulic oil level is too low or too high. In this case: Shut off the engines, locate cause and rectify.

Fig. 3-69:

Section 3: return-flow line After shutting down the engine, the precharging pressure decreases rapidly through the precharging valve. No measures are required before opening the return-flow line.

Fig. 3-71:

3-75

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing  Stand working equipment on the ground as shown on the sign (Fig. 3-72:).  Sign (2, Fig. 3-73:) is attached beside the hydraulic oil tank inspection glass (1).

Fig. 3-74:

Hydraulic oil can also be filled in by means of the service station (Fig. 3-75:).

A description of the Service Station can be found in Part 2 of this manual, chapter “Service Station (tanklift)”.

Fig. 3-72:

 Unscrew cap of express coupling (10).

Connect filling hose of the service vehicle to the express coupling.  Fill in hydraulic oil until the oil level is between the “min” and “max” marks of the sign (2, Fig. 3-73:) near the inspection glass (1).

(Oil grade see “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”).

The acoustic warning signal “Travel Alarm” sounds.  Disconnect the filling hose; the express coupling closes automatically.  Screw protective cap back in place

Fig. 3-73:

If necessary, fill in hydraulic oil through the returnflow filters.  Remove cover (19, Fig. 3-74:).  Fill in hydraulic oil through the opening until the oil level is between the “min” and “max” marks of the sign (2, Fig. 3-73:) near the inspection glass (1).

(Oil grade see “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”).  Before fitting the cover (19), check the sealing ring and replace, if damaged.  Fit cover together with sealing ring.

3-76

Fig. 3-75:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Hydraulic oil return-flow filters, replace Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The hydraulic oil reservoir itself may also be hot.

Wait until the hydraulic oil has cooled down before starting work on the filters.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Remove return flow filter elements  Remove covers (3, Fig. 3-77:) together with sealing rings (5).  Unscrew ring nuts (6) and remove retaining disk (7).  Remove press parts (8) with o-rings (10).  Withdraw filter elements (9) with o-rings (11) from filter-baskets (12).  Inspect filter elements for damage.

If no damages are visible, insert new filter elements (9) with new o-rings (11) into filterbasket (12), (see: “Install return flow filter elements”).

If a filter element (9) is damaged, remove filterbasket (12) and inspect / clean, (see: “Remove filter-basket, inspect / clean”).

Shut off the engines.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury. Avoid skin contact.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

Dispose of used filter elements accordding to the environmental regulations.

The return-flow filters must be replaced: 

when servicing works in accordance with the servicing plan are carried out;



when the BCS displays a warning on the screen (Fig. 3-76:). In this case, the filter elements (9, Fig. 3-77:) are heavily contaminated;



after repairs on the hydraulic system;



in case of damage.

Fig. 3-76:

Fig. 3-77:

3-77

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Install return flow filter elements  Insert new filter elements (9, Fig. 3-78:) into filter-basket with marking “TOP” upwards.  Attach new o-rings (10 and 11) to press parts (8).  Put press parts (8) onto filter elements (9).  Fasten retaining disk (7) with ring nuts (6).  Clean magnetic rod (17, Fig. 3-79:).

The magnetic rod is located under cap (16).

If metal filings are detected, locate cause and rectify. Contact your Caterpillar dealer service, if required.

It is essential to find the source of the metal filings and eliminate the failure. Otherwise there is a risk of serious damage in the hydraulic system.  Reattach cap (16) together with magentic rod and sealing ring to cover (3).  Install covers (3) together with sealing rings (5). Tighten bolts (18) crosswise using a torque wrench (torque = 79 Nm / 58.3 lbf ft).

Fig. 3-78:

Remove filter-basket, inspect / clean If you found one of the return flow filter elements (9, Fig. 3-78:) damaged, remove the filter-basket (12) and inspect / clean the filter-basket as well as the filter chamber of the hydraulic tank. To do so:  Unscrew bolts (13) and remove washers (15) and brackets (14).  Remove filter-basket (12) and clean in paraffin oil.  Inspect the filter chamber inside the hydraulic oil tank for contamination.

If significant contamination or foreign objects are detected, contact your Caterpillar dealer service immediately.

It is essential to find the source of contamination and foreign objects and eliminate the failure. Otherwise there is a risk of serious damage in the hydraulic system.  Reinsert the filter-baskets (12).  Place brackets (14) in the correct position and screw in bolts (13) together with washers (15).  Tighten bolts (13) using a torque wrench (torque = 46 Nm / 34 lbf ft).  Install new return flow filter elements (9), see “Install return flow filter elements”.

3-78

Fig. 3-79:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Hydraulic oil return-flow filters, replace (from machine no.

340173) Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The hydraulic oil reservoir itself may also be hot.

Wait until the hydraulic oil has cooled down before starting work on the filters.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Remove return flow filter elements  Remove covers (3, Fig. 3-81:) together with sealing rings (5).  Unscrew ring nuts (6) and remove retaining disk (7).  Remove press parts (8) with o-rings (10).  Withdraw filter elements (9) with o-rings (11) from filter-baskets (12).  Inspect filter elements for damage.

If no damages are visible, insert new filter elements (9) with new o-rings (11) into filterbasket (12), (see: “Install return flow filter elements”).

If a filter element (9) is damaged, remove filterbasket (12) and inspect / clean, (see: “Remove filter-basket, inspect / clean”).

Shut off the engines.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury. Avoid skin contact.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

Dispose of used filter elements accordding to the environmental regulations.

The return-flow filters must be replaced: 

when servicing works in accordance with the servicing plan are carried out;



when the BCS displays a warning on the screen (Fig. 3-80:). In this case, the filter elements (9, Fig. 3-81:) are heavily contaminated;



after repairs on the hydraulic system;



in case of damage.

Fig. 3-80:

Fig. 3-81:

3-79

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Install return flow filter elements  Insert new filter elements (9, Fig. 3-82:) into filter-basket with marking “TOP” upwards.  Attach new o-rings (10 and 11) to press parts (8).  Put press parts (8) onto filter elements (9).  Fasten retaining disk (7) with ring nuts (6).  Clean magnetic rod (17, Fig. 3-83:).

The magnetic rod is located under cap (16).

If metal filings are detected, locate cause and rectify. Contact your Caterpillar dealer service, if required.

It is essential to find the source of the metal filings and eliminate the failure. Otherwise there is a risk of serious damage in the hydraulic system.  Reattach cap (16) together with magentic rod and sealing ring to cover (3).  Install covers (3) together with sealing rings (5). Tighten bolts (18) crosswise using a torque wrench (torque = 79 Nm / 58.3 lbf ft).

Fig. 3-82:

Remove filter-basket, inspect / clean If you found one of the return flow filter elements (9, Fig. 3-82:) damaged, remove the filter-basket (12) and inspect / clean the filter-basket as well as the filter chamber of the hydraulic tank. To do so:  Unscrew bolts (13) and brackets (14).  Remove filter-basket (12) and clean in paraffin oil.  Inspect the filter chamber inside the hydraulic oil tank for contamination.

If significant contamination or foreign objects are detected, contact your Caterpillar dealer service immediately.

It is essential to find the source of contamination and foreign objects and eliminate the failure. Otherwise there is a risk of serious damage in the hydraulic system.  Replace o-ring (15) located in the filter brackets top plate.  Reinsert the filter-baskets (12).  Place brackets (14) in the correct position and screw in bolts (13).  Tighten bolts (13) using a torque wrench (torque = 46 Nm / 34 lbf ft).  Install new return flow filter elements (9), see “Install return flow filter elements”.

3-80

Fig. 3-83:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Bypass valves, clean / replace Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The hydraulic oil reservoir itself may also be hot.

Wait until the hydraulic oil has cooled down before starting work on the filters.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Shut off the engines.

Fig. 3-84:

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury. Avoid skin contact.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

Dispose of used filter elements accordding to the environmental regulations.

Cleaning the filter screens  Remove covers (3, Fig. 3-84:) together with sealing rings.  Unscrew bolts (1, Fig. 3-85:). Withdraw bypass valves (2).  Take off screen (3) together with o-ring (5) and clean in white spirit or paraffin oil. Replace, if damaged.  Check o-ring (4) inside the valves for damage and replace, if required.  Re-assemble the bypass valves.

Fig. 3-85:

 Check o-ring (5) for damage and replace, if required.  Insert bypass valves and fasten with bolts (1).

Replacing the bypass valves and sealing rings  Remove bypass valves as described under "Cleaning the filter screens".  Re-assemble the bypass valves with a new oring (4) and a new filter screen (3, Fig. 3-85:).  Insert bypass valves with new o-rings (5) and fasten with bolts (1).

3-81

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Hydraulic oil tank breather filters, replace Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The hydraulic oil reservoir itself may also be hot.

Wait until the hydraulic oil has cooled down before starting work on the filters.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Replacing the filter elements Two breather filters (Fig. 3-86:) on top of the hydraulic tank ensure venting of the hydraulic oil tank at varying hydraulic oil levels.

Inspect and replace the filter elements according to the maintenance plans.

In case the machine is working in very dusty conditions or in an environment with high air humidity, the filter elements must be inspected and replaced in shorter intervals.

This protects the hydraulic tank from beeing contaminated.

To replace the filter elements:  Unscrew bolts (2, Fig. 3-86:) and remove holding brackets (1).

Shut off the engines.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury. Avoid skin contact.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil and discard without polluting the environment.

 Withdraw filter elements (4).  Check foam rings (3), replace if damaged.  Attach new filter elements (4) with foam rings (3) to their cylindrical connections  Install holding brackets (1) using bolts (2).

Dispose of used filter elements accordding to the environmental regulations.

Fig. 3-86:

3-82

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Filters (pilot control circuit), replace Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The filter housings themselves may also be hot.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Replacing the filter element There are four filters in the pilot control circuits (Fig. 3-87:).

Replace filter elements regulary and when the BCS indicates a contamination.  Unscrew filter housing (4, Fig. 3-87:) by counterclockwise rotation. Pour out the oil.  Withdraw filter element (3) with a slight turn from the centering spigot in the filter head (1).

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury. Avoid skin contact.

 Clean filter housing (4) and the sealing face at the filter head (1) with white spirit or paraffin oil.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

 Install the new filter element (3) with a new, lightly oiled sealing ring (2) on the filter heads spigot by slightly turning it.  Screw on the filter housing.

 Shut off the engines.  Depressurize the hydraulic system.

 Check for leaks after putting the hydraulic system into operation.

 Clean the filter housings as well as the immediate vicinity carefully.

Fig. 3-87:

3-83

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Hydraulic oil filters for working hydraulics, replace

 Place a suitable collecting recipient under the filter housings (Fig. 3-88:).

To filter the hydraulic oil on the high-pressure side of the working hydraulic system, the machine is equipped with eight high-pressure filters (arrows, Fig. 3-88:).

 Collect escaping hydraulic oil and used filter elements. Discard without polluting the environment.

The filters are attached to the valve block in front of the hydraulic oil tank, they are accessible from the pump compartment.

 Unscrew filter housing (5) by counterclockwise rotation. Pour out the oil.

Replacing the filter elements

 Check filter housing (5) as well as used filter surface for debris.

 Disengage filter element (2) with a slight turn from the centering spigot in the filter head.

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

 Clean filter housing (5) and the sealing faces at the filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.

The filter housings themselves may also be hot.

 Check sealing ring (3) and support ring (4) on the filter housing for position and damage. Replace, if necessary.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury. Avoid skin contact.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.  Shut off the engines.  Depressurize the hydraulic system.

 Install the new filter element (2) with a new seal (1) on the spigot again by slightly turning it.  Screw in the filter housing (5) to stop. Then turn out the filter housing by an 1/8 turn so that the filter housing is not stuck due to pressure pulsation and can be easily loosened in case of maintenance works.  Check high-pressure filters for leaks after putting the hydraulic system back into operation.

 Clean the filter block and the filter housings carefully.

Fig. 3-88:

3-84

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Filters for swing pump charge circuit, replace

Replacing the filter elements

The excavator has four high-pressure filters (Fig. 3-89:) for the charging circuits of the swing pumps.

 Remove filter housings (5) and pour out used oil.

Two high-pressure filters each are installed beside the pump drive gearbox.

 Disengage filter element (6) with a slight turn from the centering spigot in the filter head.

Replace filter elements regulary according to the maintenance plans and when the contamination indicator (1) indicates a contamination, a red sector is visible then through transparent cap (2).

 Clean filter housing (5) and the sealing faces at the filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.

 Detach flanges (4, Fig. 3-89: and Fig. 3-90:).

 Install the new filter element (6) with a new, lightly oiled o-ring (7) on the filter heads spigot by slightly turning it.

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

 Screw on the filter housing (5) with a new, lightly oiled sealing ring (8).

The filter housings themselves may also be hot.

 Check for leaks after putting the hydraulic system into operation.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury. Avoid skin contact.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.  Shut off the engines.  Depressurize the hydraulic system.  Clean the filter housings as well as the immediate vicinity carefully.

Fig. 3-89:

Fig. 3-90:

3-85

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Filters for swing circuits, replace

Replacing the filter elements

The shovel has two high-pressure filters for the swing circuits (Fig. 3-91:).

 Unscrew filter housings (5, Fig. 3-91:) and pour out used oil.

Replace filter elements regulary according to the maintenance plans.

 Disengage filter elements (3) with a slight turn from the centering spigot in the filter head (1).

Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The filter housings themselves may also be hot.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury. Avoid skin contact.

 Clean filter housings (5) and the sealing faces at the filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.  Install the new filter elements (3) with a new, lightly oiled o-ring (2) on the filter heads spigot by slightly turning it.  Screw on the filter housings (5) with a new, lightly oiled sealing ring (4).  Check for leaks after putting the hydraulic system into operation.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.  Shut off the engines.  Depressurize the hydraulic system.  Clean the filter housings as well as the immediate vicinity carefully.

Fig. 3-91:

3-86

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Bearing flushing for main pumps, replace filter Bearing flushing, function The excavator has two bearing flushing circuits for the main hydraulic pumps.

The bearing flushing circuit removes air pockets in the housing of the mainpumps and reduces internal temperature. This also increases life expectancy of the mainpumps.

Two filters are integrated into the circuit. They are built-on the righthand side and on the lefthand side of the pump compartment, each near the mainpumps (1, Fig. 3-92:).

Replacing the filter element Risk of scalding from hot hydraulic oil.

 Relieve pressure from filter housing. To do so, loosen screw plug (7, Fig. 3-93:).  Unscrew filter housing (5) without spilling hydraulic oil. Pour out hydraulic oil into a waste oil tank.  Withdraw filter element (6) from filter head (9) by twisting it.  Clean filter housing (5) and sealing faces at filter head (9).  Attach new filter element onto cone in filter head with a turn.  Refit filter housing with a new, lightly oiled sealing ring (8) to the filter head (9).  After putting the machine into operation, bleed filter housing. To do so, loosen screw plug (7) until clear hydraulic fluid pours out.  Check filter housing for leaks after putting the machine into operation.

The filter housings may also be hot.

Let the area cool down before starting maintenance work.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions".

Shut off the engines.

Relieve the hydraulic system totally from pressure.

Avoid potentially harmful skin contact with hydraulic oil.

Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

Collect escaping hydraulic oil, used filter elements and oil impregnated cleaning rags and discard without polluting the environment.

Fig. 3-92:

Fig. 3-93:

3-87

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Changing the hydraulic oil Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

The hydraulic oil reservoir itself may also be hot.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing – Safety instructions" chapter.

Shut off the engines.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury. Avoid skin contact.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Collect escaping oil and discard without polluting the environment.

Do not start up the drive engines when the hydraulic oil reservoir is empty. The hydraulic pumps may be destroyed if they are allowed to run dry.

Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids (see chapter “Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids” for more information).

Oil grade see “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES” section.

Change the oil when the machine is at operating temperature. Warm oil flows better and carries suspended particles (carbon or abraded matter) better.

Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids The machine has been run in at the factory with BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid HSS (Part-No. 2482971). CGM HMS recommends using this high-grade hydraulic fluid also in operation as it has been made especially for use in these machines to which it is also perfectly adapted.

If oil analyses are performed regularly and with positive results, the BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid can remain in the machine for up to 10 000 operating hours.

If an alternative hydraulic fluid is to be used, it must fulfil the same specifications. Please note that the change interval for alternative fluids is fixed at 5 000 operating hours.

There is an increased risk of damage to hydraulic components, if different hydraulic fluids are mixed during topping up as well as when changing over to a fluid of a different type or from another manufacturer.

For topping up, it is therefore necessary to use only same hydraulic fluid as the one that is already in the hydraulic system.

When changing over to an alternative hydraulic fluid, please observe that there is always a small amount of old fluid remaining in the hydraulic system even after the system has been emptied. The mixing of this residual amount of old fluid with the new alternative fluid reduces the properties of the fluid dramatically and can cause damage to components of the hydraulic system in operation.

To avoid this result, the change-over to the alternative fluid must be performed in strict compliance with the manufacturer's prescriptions. The manufacturer must confirm that his hydraulic fluid is compatible with the BM Long Term Hydraulic Fluid.

The remaining amount of old fluid must not exceed 2% of the total volume. This can only be achieved by repeated flushing with the total fluid volume.

If the remaining amount of fluid exceeds 2% of the total volume, the fluid becomes a detrimental "mixed fluid".

The operation of the system with mixed fluids must by all means be avoided.

CGM HMS assumes no warranty for damage caused as a result of the machine having been operated with consumables of inappropriate specification or with mixed fluids.

3-88

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Drawing off hydaulic oil  Bring the hydraulic oil to operating temperature (abt. 50 ° C / 122°F).  Retract the hydraulic cylinders as far as possible and stand the working equipment on the ground.  Shut off the engines.  Drain the hydraulic oil at express coupling (1, Fig. 3-94:).

The use of the hose line is described under "Hose line for oil and cooling-lequid changes".  Place suitable recipients under the drain valve (1) of the hydraulic oil reservoir. For the required capacity refer to the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.  Unscrew the hose line; the oil drain valve closes automatically.  Screw protective cap back in place.

Drawing off hydaulic oil using the Service Station (tanklift) The hydraulic oil can also be drawn off through the service station (Fig. 3-95:).

A description of the Service Station can be found in Part 2 of this manual, chapter “Service Station (tanklift)”.  Bring hydraulic oil to operating temperature (ca. 50° C / 122°F).  Retract hydraulic cylinders as far as possible and stand working equipment on the ground.  Shut off the engines.  Unscrew cap of express coupling (10).  Connect hose line of the service vehicle.  Remove hose line. The coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.

Fig. 3-94: Fig. 3-95:

3-89

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Cleaning the hydraulic oil tank Explosion hazard.

Do not use white spirit, paraffin oil or other solvents for cleaning.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions" chapter.

Use only diesel fuel or a special flushing oil for cleaning the hydraulic tank.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil, diesel fuel or special flushing and cleaning fluids may cause skin injury. Avoid skin contact.

Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Dispose of contaminated hydraulic oil, diesel fuel or special flushing and cleaning fluids without polluting the environment and separately from other waste.

Fig. 3-96:

 Close the shut-off valves in the suction pipes at the hydraulic tank (arrows, Fig. 3-96:).  Detach the return-flow filters, see chapter “Hydraulic oil return-flow filters, replace”.  Detach the bypass valves, see chapter “Bypass valves, clean / replace”.  Detach the hydraulic tank lid which carries the breather filters, see chapter “Hydraulic oil tank breather filters, replace”.  Detach the manhole-lid (2, Fig. 3-97:).  Detach the sieves inside the hydraulic tank (1).  Place a collecting recipient for the flushing oil under the hydraulic oil tank.  Clean the inside of the hydraulic oil tank with diesel fuel or special flushing and cleaning fluid.

Remove all sediments and also the residues of the cleaning agent thoroughly.  Install the sieves inside.  Install the manhole-lid.  Install the bypass valves.  Install the return-flow filter elements.  Open shut-off valves in the suction pipes (arrows, Fig. 3-96:).

3-90

Fig. 3-97:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Filling in hydraulic oil Fill in hydraulic oil through the return-flow filters.  Remove cap (1, Fig. 3-98:).  Fill in hydraulic oil through the opening until the oil level is between the “min” and “max” marks of the sign (2, Fig. 3-99:) near the inspection glass (1).

(Oil grade see “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”).  Vent the hydraulic system.  Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil reservoir. Top up with oil, if required.  Refit cap (1, Fig. 3-98:).

Hydraulic oil can also be filled by means of the service station (Fig. 3-100:).  Unscrew cap of express coupling (10).  Connect filling hose express coupling of the service vehicle.  Fill in hydraulic oil until the oil level is between the “min” and “max” marks of the sign (2, Fig. 3-99:) near the inspection glass (1).

(Oil grade see “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”).

The acoustic warning signal “Travel Alarm” sounds.  The oil level is also displayed on the BCSscreen (Fig. 3-101:).  After filling in vent the hydraulic system.  Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil tank. Top up with oil, if required.  Unscrew the hose line. The express coupling closes automatically.  Screw protective cap back in place.

Fig. 3-98:

Fig. 3-100:

Fig. 3-99:

Fig. 3-101:

3-91

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Venting the hydraulic system Hydraulic pumps, hydraulic motors, hydraulic cylinders, travel brake valves, suction lines of hydraulic pumps, oil cooler manifolds and the servo control system must be vented 

after assembly on site and prior to initial commissioning,



before each recommissioning of the excavator, e.g. after extensive repair work to the hydraulic system or after prolonged downtimes,



after each hydraulic oil change,



after replacement of hoses or lines.

Fig. 3-103:

Venting / filling the hydraulic components 



Always admit oil first to that side of the cylinder where the piston (2) is. This is

Hydraulic pumps and hydraulic motors (with engines shut off): Open the highest leakage oil port and fill in clean hydraulic oil up to the lower edge of the opening.

Check the hydraulic system under load. Pay attention to noises produced by the hydraulic pump or the hydraulic motors. Abrupt movements of the working equipment are a sign of entrapped air in the system. Remaining air pockets can be eliminated by actuating all hydraulic functions.

Hydraulic cylinders: Before the initial admission of the cylinder with oil, the piston must be in either of the two extreme piston positions. In other words, the piston rod (1, Fig. 3-102: and Fig. 3-103:) must be either completely retracted or completely extended.

Fig. 3-102:

3-92

 the piston-side port (3) when the piston rod is retracted (1, Fig. 3-102:),  the rod-side port (4) when the piston rod is extended (1, Fig. 3-103:).

If, for assembly reasons, the piston rod is inmiddle position, admit oil first to the piston-side port (4).

When oil is admitted for the first time to the cylinder, the oil flow must be reduced. Therefore extend or retract the piston rod as slowly as possible.

The screws/nozzles of the following components must be opened until oil emerges bubble-free from the opening: Always vent only the system section that has been opened.



the travel brake valve at the venting screw,



the oil cooler manifold at the mini-measuring ports,



the servo system at the venting screws of the control blocks (under the servo caps),



the intake line at the venting screw (with drive motors stationary).

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Cleaning the hydraulic oil cooler Risk of injury from rotating cooler fan blades.

Cleaning The hydraulic oil coolers are located in the oil cooler module.

Clean the hydraulic oil coolers at regular intervals.  Shut off the engines.

Shut off the engines.

 Remove any accumulated dirt.

Never start cleaning work until the cooler fan blades have stopped turning.

 Clean the fan blades (2).

The hydraulic oil coolers reach the same temperature as the hydraulic oil. Risk of burning.

 Clean the radiators with a jet of water or compressed air from outside to inside.

Allow the hydraulic oil cooler to cool down.

 Leave hydraulic oil coolers to dry.

Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

 Check the hydraulic motors (1) for free movement.

If the machine is used in places with heavily contaminated ambient air, the hydraulic oil coolers must be cleaned more often than specified in the servicing plan.

In winter-time, check that the fans (2) turn freely and that the cooling fins are free from ice and snow.

The speeds of the fan motors (1, Fig. 3-104:) are thermostat-controlled. The fan motors run at maximum speed when the hydraulic oil temperature reaches ca. 60°C / 140°F.

Fig. 3-104:

3-93

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Electronic excavator controls, clean / lubricate Joystick At regular intervals acc. to the maintenance plans:  Loosen gaiter and move upwards.  Apply a thin layer of low temperature grease on the control spools, the actuator plate above and the cardan joint of the joysticks (arrows, Fig. 3-105:) to prevent jamming of the joysticks.

Pedal At regular intervals acc. to the maintenance plans:  Remove old grease and dirt from the control spools and the actuator plate of the pedals (arrows, Fig. 3-106:).  Apply a thin layer of low temperature grease on the control spools of the pedals to prevent jamming of the control spools.

 Refit gaiter using a cable strap.

Fig. 3-106:

Fig. 3-105:

3-94

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Pressure accumulator - Emergency lowering To permit the working equipment to be lowered in an emergency, the machine is equipped with a pressure accumulator (arrow, Fig. 3-107:).

The pressure accumulator is located in the module beneath the operator’s cab.

Extract from the German regulations The accumulator vessel must not be subjected to welding, soldering or any other mechanical work.

Work on systems containing accumulators (repairs, connection of pressure gauges or similar work) may be carried out only when the fluid pressure has been released.

Extract from the German acceptance regulations Hydraulic accumulators are pressure vessels and are therefore subject to the "Druckbehälterverordnung (DruckbehV)" [Pressure Vessel Regulations].

Their installation, equipment and operation are governed by the "Technische Regeln Druckbehälter (TRB)" [Technical Rules for Pressure Vessels]. The pressure vessels of hydraulic accumulators are classified by the admissible operating pressure p in bars, the capacity l in liters and the product of pressure and capacity p x l. Depending on the class to which the accumulator belongs, the following inspections are mandatory: Checking the gas charging pressure in the pressure accumulator.

Fig. 3-107:

Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations The following regulations are applicable only in Germany. Please observe the relevant regulations in force in your own country.

Group II p  l bar and p·x l  200

After commissioning (new installation or repair), the gas charging pressure in the pressure vessel must be checked at least once during the first week. If no pressure loss is detected, the second pressure test must be performed after ca. 3 months. If no pressure loss is detected in this test either, the testing interval can be fixed at once pressure test each year.

Inspections prior to commissioning at the factory at the place of use Pressure testing Inspection certificate Prototype and pressure test (Check of correctness and certified by the manufacturer correct installation) issued by an expert

Regular inspections Inspection schedule to be drawn up by end user, based on experience with type of operation and fluid.

3-95

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing PUMP DRIVE GEARBOX Risk of scalding caused by hot gearbox oil. The gearbox housings may be hot too.

Shut off the engines.

Skin contact with gearbox oil is a potential health hazard. Protect the skin from contact with gearbox oil. Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Park and secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing Safety instructions”.

Fig. 3-108:

Checking the gearbox oil level / Topping up with oil Observe the information decals attached to the gearbox housings near the dipsticks.  Unscrew dipstick (1, Fig. 3-108: and Fig. 3-109:) and wipe clean.  Insert dipstick (1) again until the thread lies on top of the dipsticks tube (2, Fig. 3-109:).

Do not screw in.  Withdraw dipstick again and check oil level.

Oil level should be between the two dipstick markers.  Top up with oil if required through the opening of the gearbox venting (2, Fig. 3-108:).

(Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”).  Screw in dipstick (1) again.

In case of significant oil losses check for leaks at the gearbox and on all components of the gearbox oil cooling system.

Too much oil in the gearbox may be a signal of defective seals at hydraulic components. Contact your Caterpillar dealer service.

3-96

Fig. 3-109:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Pre-chambers, checking oil level / topping up with oil The oil level in the pre-chambers is visually at the inspection glas (3, Fig. 3-110) in expansion reservoir (1).

The oil level should reach up at least to the middle of the inspection glas (3). Top up with gearbox oil, if required.

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.  Unsrew breather filter (2).  Fill in oil up at least to the middle of the inspection glass (3).  Screw breather filter back in place.

Fig. 3-110

3-97

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Changing the gearbox oil Change the oil when the machine is nearly at operating temperature. Warm oil flows better and carries suspended particles (carbon or abraded matter) better.

Draining off oil The gearbox oil is drained with the service station (Fig. 3-111:) through 

express coupling (4) for the lefthand pump drive gearbox,



express coupling (5) for the righthand pump drive gearbox.

 Unscrew cap of express coupling and connect hose line of the service vehicle.

Fig. 3-111:

 Remove hose after the oil has been drawn off.

The coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.

Filling in oil  Fill in oil through the bore in breather valve (2, Fig. 3-112:).

Oil grade see: „“LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.  The oil level must reach the upper mark on dipstick (1).

The gearbox oil can also be filled in with the service station (Fig. 3-111:) through 

express coupling (4) for the lefthand pump drive gearbox,



express coupling (5) for the righthand pump drive gearbox.

 Unscrew cap of express coupling and connect hose line of the service vehicle.  Fill in gearbox oil. The oil level must reach the upper mark on dipstick (1, Fig. 3-112:).  Remove hose after the oil has been filled in.

The coupling closes automatically.  Screw on protective cap.  Check for leaks and for correct filling level after putting the machine back into operation (approx. after one hour) Top up with oil if necessary through the bore of breather valve (2).

3-98

Fig. 3-112:

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Pre-chambers, changing the gearbox oil

Pump drive gearbox breather valve, replace

Draining off oil

The pump drive gearbox is vented through a breather valve, mounted on top of the gearbox housing (arrow, Fig. 3-114:).

 Prepare a collecting recipient for used oil.

Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.  Unscrew plugs (7, Fig. 3-113) and drain off oil.  Screw plugs (7) back in place.

 Replace breather valve in accordance with the servicing plan.  Clean area around the breather to prevent contamination of the gearbox.  Unscrew breather filter and replace by a new one.

Filling in oil Filling in oil see “Pre-chambers, checking oil level, topping up with oil”.

Fig. 3-114:

Fig. 3-113

3-99

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Pre-chamber breather valve, replace The pre-chambers of the pump drive gearbox are vented through a breather valve, mounted on top of the expansion reservoir (2, Fig. 3-115:).  Replace breather valve in accordance with the servicing plan.  Clean area around the breather to prevent contamination of the gearbox.  Unscrew breather filter and replace by a new one.

Fig. 3-115:

3-100

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Pump drive gearbox lube oil filters, replace In the oil cooling circuit of each pump drive gearbox there is a filterelement (Fig. 3-116:).

Check filter tell-tale (1, Fig. 3-117:) regulary - at operating temperature - for indication of contamination.

If the red sector is visible through transparent cap (2), the filter element must be replaced.

Filter element (5, Fig. 3-118:) must be replaced after 1000 operating hours at the latest.

To do so:  Remove flange (3, Fig. 3-117:).

Fig. 3-116:

 Pour oil out of filter pot (4, Fig. 3-118:) and remove filter element (5).  Clean filter head (6, Fig. 3-117:) and filter pot (4).  Place new filter element into filter pot. Oil the new O-ring (7, Fig. 3-117:) lightly and attach.  Re-assemle filter pot (4) with flanges (3).  Check filter for leakage after recommencing operation.

Fig. 3-117:

Fig. 3-118:

3-101

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing SWING GEARBOX Risk of scalding caused by hot gearbox oil. The gearbox housings may be hot too.

Shut off the engines.

Skin contact with gearbox oil is a potential health hazard. Protect the skin from contact with gearbox oil. Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Park and secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing Safety instructions”.

Swing gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil  Park the machine as described under "Securing the machine".  Screw out dipstick (1, Fig. 3-119:) and wipe clean.  Insert dipstick (1) fully again (do not screw in) and withdraw a second time.

The oil level must reach up at least to the lower mark on dipstick (1).  Top up with gearbox oil through the opening of plug (4), if required. (oil grade see: „LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES“).

To reach plug (4) remove cover plate above swing gearbox.  Screw dipstick (1) back in place.

Fig. 3-119:

Gearbox venting The gearbox is vented through breather filter (2, Fig. 3-119:).

Clean breather filter in accordance with the servicing plan.  Unscrew breather filter (2), clean in white spirit or paraffin oil and blow dry with compressed air.  Screw breather filter (2) back in place.

3-102

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Changing the swing gearbox oil Carry out oil change when gearoil is nearly at operating temperature. All suspended particles and contaminations will be rinsed out with the old oil.

Swing gearboxes are drained by means of the drain valves (2, Fig. 3-120: / arrow, Fig. 3-121:).

Swing gearboxes are filled with gearbox oil by means of the express couplings (1, Fig. 3-120:).  Prepare a collecting recipient for used oil.

Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.

Draining off oil  Remove cover plates from the gearboxes.  Unscrew plug (4, Fig. 3-122:) to ventilate the gearbox.  Attach draining hose to the drain valve and drain off oil completely.

The drain valves (arrow, Fig. 3-121:) are accessible from below the undercarriage.

The use of the oil draining hose is described in the "Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes" chapter.

Fig. 3-120:

 Drain off gearbox oil.  Remove hose. The oil drain valve closes automatically.  Fill in fresh gearbox oil, see: “Filling in new oil / Topping up”.

Fig. 3-121:

Fig. 3-122:

3-103

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Filling in new oil / Topping up (oil grade ABLES“).

see:

„LUBRICANTS

/

CONSUM-

A description of the Service Station can be found in Part 2 of this manual, chapter “Service Station (tanklift)”.  Remove cap of express coupling (12, Fig. 3-123:) and connect hose line for filling swing gearbox oil from the service vehicle.  Connect the gearbox filling hose (Fig. 3-124:) to express coupling near to the hydraulic reservoir (arrow, Fig. 3-125:).  Connect other end of the filling hose to express coupling at the swing gearbox (1, Fig. 3-126:).  Open ball valve at filling hose (Fig. 3-124:) and fill swing gearbox with gearbox oil.

Fig. 3-124:

 Check filling level at dipstick.  After filling in oil, disconnect filling hose.  Screw in plug (4) again.  Attach cover plates to the gearboxes.

Fig. 3-125:

Fig. 3-123:

Fig. 3-126:

3-104

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing TRAVEL GEARBOX (GEARBOX P/N 3683483) Risk of scalding caused by hot gearbox oil. The gearbox housings may be hot too.

Shut off the engines.

Skin contact with gearbox oil is a potential health hazard. Protect the skin from contact with gearbox oil. Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Spur gear section - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil  Check oil level at the inspection glass (2, Fig. 3-128:).

The oil level should reach the center of the inspection glass. Top up with oil if required through the bore of plug (4).

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

Park and secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing Safety instructions”.

Details about selecting the correct gear oil can be found in chapter “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

To identify the gearbox partnumber (P/N) check the name plate attached to the gearbox.

Travel gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil  Move the hydraulic shovel into such a position that the screw plugs (1, 2 and 3, Fig. 3-127:) are in the displayed position.  Unscrew checking screw (1).

The oil level should reach up to the lower edge of the opening. Top up with oil, if required.

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.  Screw checking plug (1) back in place.

Fig. 3-128:

Brake housing - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil  Unscrew checking screw (6, Fig. 3-129:).

The oil level should reach up to the lower edge of the opening. Top up with oil, if required.  Screw checking plug (6) back in place.

Oil grade see: „“LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

Fig. 3-127: Fig. 3-129:

3-105

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Travel gearbox - Changing oil Carry out oil change when oil is nearly at operating temperature. All suspended particles and contaminations will be rinsed out with the old oil.

Draining off oil  Move the hydraulic shovel into such a position that the screw plugs (1, 2 and 3, Fig. 3-130:) are in the displayed position.

Spur gear section - Changing the oil / Draining off oil  Place a collecting recipient for used oil under the pre-chamber.

Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.  Unscrew drain plug (3, Fig. 3-131:) and drain off the oil completely.

Slackening plug (4) allows the oil to run out more readily.

 Place a collecting recipient for used oil under the travel gearbox.

Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.

 Clean screw plugs (3 and 4)

 Unscrew drain plug (2) and drain off the oil completely.

Slackening plug (3) allows the oil to run out more readily.

Filling in oil

 Clean screw plugs (2 and 3)  Screw screw plug (2) back in place.

 Screw screw plug (3) back in place.

 Unscrew screw plug (4).  Fill in oil through opening of plug (4) until it reaches the center of the inspection glass (2).

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.  Screw plug (4) back in place.

Filling in oil  Unscrew screw plug (1 and 3).  Fill in oil through opening in plug (3) until it flows out of opening in plug (1).

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.  Screw plugs (1 and 3) back in place.

Fig. 3-131:

Fig. 3-130:

3-106

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Brake housing - Changing oil

Travel gearbox - Breather filter

Draining off oil

 Unscrew breather filters (1 and 5, Fig. 3-133:) and clean in white spirit or parafin.

 Place a collecting recipient for used oil under the brake housing.

Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.  Unscrew drain plug (7, Fig. 3-132:) and drain off the oil completely.

Slackening breather filter (5) allows the oil to run out more readily.  Clean screw plug (7).  Screw screw plug (7) back in place.

Filling in oil  Unscrew screw plug (6).  Fill in oil through opening of breather filter (5) until it flows out of the bore of plug (6).

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

Fig. 3-133:

 Screw plug (6) and breather filter (5) back in place.

Fig. 3-132:

3-107

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing TRAVEL GEARBOX (GEARBOX P/N 3683496) Risk of scalding caused by hot gearbox oil. The gearbox housings may be hot too.

Shut off the engines.

Skin contact with gearbox oil is a potential health hazard. Protect the skin from contact with gearbox oil. Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Park and secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing Safety instructions”.

Details about selecting the correct gear oil can be found in chapter “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

Travel gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil  Move the hydraulic shovel into such a position that the screw plugs (1, 2 and 3, Fig. 3-134:) are in the displayed position.  Unscrew plug (3).

The oil level should reach up to the lower edge of the bore. Top up with oil, if required.  Screw plug (3) back in place.

Alternatively:  Open cover of travel motors.  Check oil level at the inspection glass (arrow, Fig. 3-135:). The oil level should reach the center of the inspection glass.

Top up with oil if required through the bore of plug (3, Fig. 3-134:). Oil grade see: „“LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

To identify the gearbox partnumber (P/N) check the name plate attached to the gearbox.

Fig. 3-134:

Fig. 3-135:

3-108

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Hydraulicmotor chamber - Brake housing - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil  Unscrew checking screw (6, Fig. 3-136:).

The oil level should reach up to the lower edge of the opening. Top up with oil, if required.  Screw checking plug (6) back in place.

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

Fig. 3-136:

3-109

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Travel gearbox - Changing oil Carry out oil change when oil is nearly at operating temperature. All suspended particles and contaminations will be rinsed out with the old oil.

Draining off oil  Move the hydraulic shovel into such a position that the screw plugs (1, 2 and 3, Fig. 3-137:) are in the displayed position.  Place a collecting recipient for used oil under the travel gearbox.

Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.  Unscrew drain plug (2) as well as the drain plug at the bottom side of the hollow wheel (arrow) and drain off the oil completely.

Slackening plug (3) allows the oil to run out more readily.

Fig. 3-137:

 Clean screw plugs.  Screw plugs (2 and arrow) back in place.

Filling in oil  Move the shovel slowly until plug (3) reaches the “3-o’clock” position shown in (Fig. 3-138:).

Drive only this short way to bring plugs in the shown position.

Driving longer distances may damage the gearbox.

Remember, the gearbox is without oil.

Fig. 3-138:

 Unscrew screw plug (3).  Fill in oil through bore of plug (3) until it flows out of the bore.

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.  Screw plug (3) back in place.  Open cover of travel motors.  Check oil level at the inspection glas (Fig. 3-139:). Fill in oil if necessary.

Fig. 3-139:

3-110

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Hydraulicmotor chamber - Brake housing - Changing oil Draining off oil

Travel gearbox - Breather filter  Unscrew breather filters (1 and 5, Fig. 3-141:) and clean in white spirit or parafin.

 Place a collecting recipient for used oil under the hydraulicmotor chamber.

Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.  Unscrew drain plug (7, Fig. 3-140:) and drain off the oil completely.

Slackening breather filter (5) allows the oil to run out more readily.  Clean screw plug (7).  Screw plug (7) back in place.

Filling in oil  Unscrew screw plug (6).  Fill in oil through opening of breather filter (5) until it flows out of the bore of plug (6).

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.  Screw plug (6) and breather filter (5) back in place.

Fig. 3-141:

Fig. 3-140:

3-111

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing TRAVEL GEARBOX (GEARBOX P/N 3749598) Risk of scalding caused by hot gearbox oil. The gearbox housings may be hot too.

Shut off the engines.

Skin contact with gearbox oil is a potential health hazard. Protect the skin from contact with gearbox oil. Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Travel gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil  Move the hydraulic shovel into such a position that the screw plugs (1, 2 and 3, Fig. 3-142:) are in the displayed position.  Unscrew plugs (1 and 3).

The oil level should reach up to the lower edge of the bore of plug (3). Top up with oil, if required through bore of plug (1).  Screw plugs (1 and 3) back in place.

Alternatively:  Open cover of travel motors.

Park and secure the machine as described in the "Securing the machine" section.

Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing Safety instructions”.

Details about selecting the correct gear oil can be found in chapter “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

 Check oil level at the inspection glass (arrow, Fig. 3-143:). The oil level should reach the center of the inspection glass.

Top up with oil if required through the bore of plug (1, Fig. 3-142:). Oil grade see: „“LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

To identify the gearbox partnumber (P/N) check the name plate attached to the gearbox.

Fig. 3-142:

Fig. 3-143:

3-112

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Hydraulicmotor chamber - Brake housing - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil  Unscrew checking screw (6, Fig. 3-144:).

The oil level should reach up to the lower edge of the opening. Top up with oil, if required.  Screw checking plug (6) back in place.

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

Fig. 3-144:

3-113

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Travel gearbox - Changing oil Carry out oil change when oil is nearly at operating temperature. All suspended particles and contaminations will be rinsed out with the old oil.

Draining off oil  Move the hydraulic shovel into such a position that the screw plugs (1, 2 and 3, Fig. 3-145:) are in the displayed position.  Place a collecting recipient for used oil under the travel gearbox.

Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.  Unscrew drain plug (2) as well as the drain plug at the bottom side of the hollow wheel (arrow) and drain off the oil completely.

Slackening plug (1) allows the oil to run out more readily.

Fig. 3-145:

 Clean screw plugs.  Screw plugs (2 and arrow) back in place.

Filling in oil  Unscrew plugs (1 and 3, Fig. 3-146:Fig. 3-147:).  Fill in oil through bore of plug (1) until it flows out of the bore of plug (3).

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.

Fig. 3-146:

 Screw plugs (1 and 3) back in place.  Open cover of travel motors.  Check oil level at the inspection glas (Fig. 3-147:). Top up with oil if necessary.

Fig. 3-147:

3-114

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Hydraulicmotor chamber - Brake housing - Changing oil Draining off oil

Travel gearbox - Breather filter  Unscrew breather filters (1 and 5, Fig. 3-141:) and clean in white spirit or parafin.

 Place a collecting recipient for used oil under the hydraulicmotor chamber.

Choose the required capacity in accordance with the "Refilling quantities - Oil" table.  Unscrew drain plug (7, Fig. 3-140:) and drain off the oil completely.

Slackening breather filter (5) allows the oil to run out more readily.  Clean screw plug (7).  Screw plug (7) back in place.

Filling in oil  Unscrew screw plug (6).  Fill in oil through opening of breather filter (5) until it flows out of the bore of plug (6).

Oil grade see: “LUBRICANTS / CONSUMABLES”.  Screw plug (6) and breather filter (5) back in place.

Fig. 3-149:

Fig. 3-148:

3-115

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing CRAWLER TRACKS Cleaning Clean tracks, track and support rollers, sprockets and idlers regularly and whenever required. Cleaning is especially important in winter to prevent: 

the tracks from being thrown off,



oil from leaking out of track and support rollers, sprockets and idlers,



excessive wear,



the track from breaking.

To clean the tracks:  Raise one side of the excavator with the working equipment and allow track to turn.  Clean the side member supporting the track.  Clean support and track rollers (1 and 2 ,Fig. 3-150:) thoroughly.  Clean the sliding planes on the idler guides.

Fig. 3-150:

3-116

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Track roller, lubricating

Track roller fastening

(Not applicable at machines equipped with undervarriage greasing system).

Check fastening bolts (4, Fig. 3-152:) regularly for tightness:

The track rollers (Fig. 3-151:) have a permanent grease filling.

 Tighten bolts with a torque wrench to the prescribed tightening torque (see "Service Manual“).

Nevertheless press in grease filling at regular intervals.

It is necessary to be sure that always sufficient grease in the roller bearings.  Unscrew plug (6, Fig. 3-151:) from breather line.  Remove dust cap (1) from coupling (2).  Remove dust cap (4) from plug (5).

Support roller fastening  Check fastening bolts (3, Fig. 3-152:) regularly for tightness.  Tighten bolts with a torque wrench to the prescribed tightening torque (see "Service Manual“).

 Connect grease hose (3) to couling (2).  Press in grease as long as used grease emerges from breather line.  Screw on plug (6) to breather line.  Disconnect the grease hose (3).  Fix dust caps (1 and 4) back in place.

Fig. 3-152:

Fig. 3-151:

3-117

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Track tensioner Design The tracks are tensioned with the help of the hydraulic pressure created during travelling. Fig. 3-153:and Fig. 3-154: show parts of the tracks and the tensioner: 1 2 3 4

Pressure accumulator Pressure cylinder Pressure limiting valve Mini- measuring port

Technical data Track tensioning pressure Pressure limiting valve Gas pressure in pressure accumulator (nitrogen filling pressure)

appr. 70 bars / 1015psi appr. 330 bars / 4786psi appr. 50 bars / 725psi

Function The tensioning system is under permanent pressure of ca. 70 bars / 1015psi which keeps both tracks permanently tensioned. Pressure losses are compensated as soon as the engines have been started. Retensioning is not required.

For cleaning and servicing work, the tracks can be slackened.

To do so:  stop the engines  open both pressure limiting valves (3, Fig. 3-154:) to slacken the tracks.  After the work, screw down the pressure limiting valves (3) to the limit stop.

Fig. 3-153:

The pressure-limiting valves (3) are preset to a pressure of 330 bars / 4786psi and sealed in this position. The lead seal must not be removed and the pressure setting of 330 bars / 4786psi must not be changed.

The track tensioners are maintenance-free.

Fig. 3-154:

3-118

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations The following regulations are applicable only in Germany. Please observe the relevant regulations in force in your own country.

Extract from the German regulations The accumulator vessel must not be subjected to welding, soldering or any other mechanical work.

Work on systems containing accumulators (repairs, connection of pressure gauges or similar work) may be carried out only when the fluid pressure has been relieved.

Extract from the German acceptance regulations Hydraulic accumulators are pressure vessels and are therefore subject to the "Druckbehälterverordnung (DruckbehV)" [Pressure Vessel Regulations].

Their installation, equipment and operation are governed by the "Technische Regeln Druckbehälter (TRB)" [Technical Rules for Pressure Vessels]. The pressure vessels of hydraulic accumulators are classified by the admissible operating pressure p in bars, the capacity l in liters and the product of pressure and capacity p x l. Depending on the class to which the accumulator belongs, the following inspections are mandatory:

Checking the gas charging pressure in the pressure accumulator After commissioning (new installation or repair), the gas charging pressure in the pressure vessel must be checked at least once during the first week. If no pressure loss is detected, the second pressure test must be performed after ca. 3 months. If no pressure loss is detected in this test either, the testing interval can be fixed at once pressure test each year.

The above-mentioned pressure tests are required to ensure the functioning of the track tensioner.

They are no substitute for the inspections as required by the "Pressure Vessel Regulations".

Before checking the gas charging pressure (nitrogen filling pressure) in the pressure accumulator, the track must first be slackened, i.e. the hydraulic part of the tensioning system must be depressurized. See under "Function".

Tab. 3-1

Group IV p  l bar p·x l  1000

Inspections prior to commissioning at the factory at the place of use Preliminary inspection by an Acceptance inspection by an expert expert Prototype and pressure test certified by the manufacturer (type approval) or the expert

Regular inspections Internal inspection: every 10 years for noncorrosive fluids; otherwise pressure testing every 5 years: every 10 years by an expert

3-119

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing SWING RING Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions.

Internal gearing The internal gearing (1, Fig. 3-156:) and the pinion (2) are enclosed in a housing (3, Fig. 3-157:). The housing forms a grease-filled trough in which the pinion of the swing mechanism moves.

Shut off the engines.

Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

Swing ring - Instructions The grease filling must be replaced: 

when repairs have been carried out on the swing ring, the swing ring seals or the swing ring housing.

Remove old grease completely before filling in new grease.

If greater losses are detected, locate cause immediately to prevent damage to the swing ring.

Fig. 3-156:

Greases and greasy cleaning rags must not be allowed to pollute the environment. Discard grease and greasy cleaning rags separately from other waste without polluting the environment.

The grease is pumped to the greasing port of the grease trough by the distributor (Fig. 3-155:). The amount of grease used up during operation is replenished by the central lubricating system.

Bearing races

The housings have a check opening which is closed with a cover (2, Fig. 3-157:) For checking, the cover must be removed.

The central lubricating system supplies grease continuously to the two roller bearing races and the internal gearing .

The grease is pumped to the greasing points of the bearing races by a distributor (Fig. 3-155:).

Fig. 3-157:

Fig. 3-155:

3-120

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Swing ring - Checking the grease filling Read and observe: "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions.

Swing ring - Filling in grease Prior to initial commissioning, the grease trough of the internal gearing must be filled with grease.

Add grease when:

Shut off the engines Wear protective gloves and firm protective clothing.

At regular intervals 

check internal gearing and teeth of swing mechanism pinion for condition



check that the grease filling is sufficient.

The housing must always contain enough grease for the gearing - measured from its lower edge - to run in at least 20 mm / 0.79" of grease over its whole circumference (Fig. 3-158:).

In the event of greater grease losses, eliminate cause immediately and add grease to prevent the internal gearing and the pinion from being damaged by continued swing movements.



the housing has been replaced,



old grease has been removed in the course of other work.

Always fill in fresh grease by hand.

Risk of accidents. Never swing the superstructure when refilling grease.

Swing ring - Checking the bolts for tightness The fastening bolts of the swing ring in the superstructure and the undercarriage are tightened with their respective check torque torque (see: "„Service Manual“").

When these values are reached, the fastening bolts are perfectly tight.

Loosen slack bolts before tightening them with a torque wrench to the prescribed torque (see: "„Service Manual“").

Fig. 3-158:

3-121

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing CENTRAL LUBRICATING SYSTEM Design The excavator is equipped with an automatic central lubricating system which provides grease regularly to all greasing points except those mentioned in the "Lubricating chart - Grease".

The central lubricating system is activated when the electrical system is switched on with the keyswitch and at least one engine is running.

All greasing points connected to the system are greased at regular intervals.

If a fault occurs, BCS gives a warning on the screen (Fig. 3-159:). This happens, for example, if the filter element in the hydraulic line is contaminated.

If one of the following faults occurs, BCS gives a warning and at the same time the grease pump is switched off: 

Grease container is empty,



Greasing pressure in the grease lines is below 250 bars (3626psi).

The automatic greasing is interrupted when the engines are stopped with the idle timers.

In this cases, BCS switches off the hydraulic function of the shovel/backhoe cylinders after 15 minutes. This prevents damages from lack of greasing.

The central lubricating system is controlled electrohydraulically by one of the controllers of the CAMP system.

Inform the responsible maintenance personnel immediately.

Keep on working after the fault has been fixed.

After the fault has been fixed, actuate the "Reset" button in the control column (64, Fig. 3-160:) or the “Reset” button in the control box located at the grease container. The buttons must be actuated for at least one second.

For further information on the function and setting refer to the Technical Handbook, chapters 9 and 11.

Fig. 3-159:

Fig. 3-160:

3-122

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Function The grease is pumped by hydraulically driven pumps (2 and 3, Fig. 3-161:) via greasing lines from the grease container to the main distributors on the superstructure and on the undercarriage.

Pump (2) supports greasing points on superstructure and working equipment, pump (3) supports the undercarriage (optional).

The control elements of the lubricating system are installed on a control panel (1) attached to the grease container.

As soon as the grease container is empty, the BCS (Fig. 3-162:) gives a warning signal (fault). In the event of a fault, the "dumping” function (shovel or backhoe cylinder) is switched off automatically after 15 min.

Work can be continued when the grease container is filled with grease.

Fig. 3-161:

Fig. 3-162:

3-123

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Filling up the grease container Always refill the grease container in time to avoid air from penetrating into the greasing system. Air in the greasing may cause malfunctions.

Fill up the grease container through the service station (Fig. 3-163:).

A description of the Servicestation can be found in Part 2 of this manual, chapter “Service Station (tanklift)”.  Switch on the indicator system with toggle switch (23, Fig. 3-163:). Monitoring lamp (22) lights up.  Unscrew the cap of the express coupling (11).

Breather filter grease container, check / replace Check/change the breather filter of the grease container at regular intervals.  Unscrew wing nut on top of the breather filter.  Withdraw cover (1, Fig. 3-164:) and filter element (2).  Check the filter element (2) and replace if it is soiled or damaged.  Replace sealing rings of the filter element.  Re-install breather filter.

 Connect the filling hose of the service vehicle.  When the grease container is full, the indicator lamp (34) lights up.  Switch off the indicator system with toggle switch (23). Monitoring lamp (22) is off.  Remove the flexible hose.

The express coupling closes automatically.  Refit the protective cap.

Fig. 3-164:

Fig. 3-163:

3-124

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Checking the greasing pressure

Unblocking a grease line

Check regularly (accord. to the maintenance plan), whether the oil pressure indicated by pressure gauge (3, Fig. 3-165:) at the hydraulic oil filter is 55 - 60 bars / 798 - 870 psi.

In the event of faults at the central greasing system inform the responsible maintenance personnel immediately. Detailled information about the central greasing system can be found in the “Technical Handbook” chapter 11.

The pressure is depending on temperature and viscosity of the oil and may vary.

This oil pressure is reduced so that the pressure indicated by pressure gauge (2) is 35 – 40 bars / 507 – 580 psi and by pressure gauge (1) is 49 – 51 bar / 711 – 740 psi.

The necessary greasing pressure of 320 bar / 4641 psi for the superstructure and 180 bar / 2611 psi for the lower carriage is generated by means of a pressure translator.

The greasing pressure for superstructure and working equipment is indicated by pressure gauge (4). The greasing pressure for the undercarriage (optional) is indicated by pressure gauge (5).

Even when the grease pump isn’t active, there can be residual pressures in the grease lines up to 30 bars (435psi).

Relieve this residual pressure before opening a grease line.

Put the excavator back into operation only after the greasing system works properly and after having actuated the unloaded working equipment for abt.

5 minutes. This is necessary in order to supply sufficient amounts of grease to the cylinder bearings.

In the event of deviating pressure values, shut off the engines and inform the responsible maintenance personnel. The central greasing system has to be checked.

Lower oil / grease pressure means that not all of the greasing points are supplied with grease.

Higher oil / grease pressure may cause bursting of a greasing line.

Fig. 3-165:

3-125

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Oilfilter replace (hydraulic circuit grease pump) Risk of scalding caused by hot hydraulic oil.

Shut off the engines.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions" chapter.

The filter housings may also be hot. Wear protective gloves and firm working clothing.

Skin contact with hydraulic oil may cause skin injury. Avoid skin contact.

Replacing the filter element For filtering of the hydraulic oil, a high pressure filter is installed in the pumping line (Fig. 3-166:).

At the filter head there is a contamination indicator.

Replace filter element if a red colored pin is visible at the contamination indicator.  Relieve hydraulic pressure.  Unscrew filter housing (3).  Withdraw filter element (2) from filter housing (3).  Clean filter housing and the sealing face at the filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.  Insert the new filter element into filter housing and refit to the filter head with new, lightly oiled sealing ring (1).  Check for leaks after putting the filter into operation.

Fig. 3-166:

3-126

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Grease filter replace (filling the grease container)

Grease filter replace (Grease lines)

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing –Safety instructions" chapter.

Read and observe the "Inspection and servicing –Safety instructions" chapter.

Shut off the engines.

Shut off the engines.

Replacing the filter element

Replacing the filter element

A grease filter (arrow, Fig. 3-167:) is installed in the grease filling line to the grease container.

Two grease filters (Fig. 3-168:) are installed in the greasing lines to the grease distributors.

Replace filter element regularly according to the maintenance plans.

Replace filter element regularly according to the maintenance plans.

 Unscrew filter housing (4).

 Unscrew filter housing (4).

 Withdraw filter element (2) from housing.

 Withdraw filter element (2) from housing.

 Remove the grease.

 Remove the grease.

 Clean filter housing and contact faces at the filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.

 Clean filter housing and contact faces at the filter head with white spirit or paraffin oil.

 Insert the new filter element into filter housing and refit to the filter head with new, lightly oiled sealing rings (1 and 3).

 Insert the new filter element into filter housing and refit to the filter head with new, lightly oiled sealing rings (1 and 3).

 Check for leaks after putting the filter into operation.

 Check for leaks after putting the filter into operation.

Fig. 3-167:

Fig. 3-168:

3-127

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing OTHER MAINTENANCE Engine Information about maintenance can be found in the engine operating instructions.

Further servicing works not described are carried out by the CGM HMS Service or the engine manufacturer.

Cleaning Check the engines regularly. 

If the engine is cleaned with a steam-jet cleaner, make sure that the jet is not directed towards electrical components.



If no steam-jet cleaner is available, the engines must be cleaned with suitable cleaning agents (cold cleaners).

Cooling system Check the radiators regularly.  Shut off the engines.  Remove any accumulated dirt.  Clean the fan blades (2, Fig. 3-169:).  Clean the radiators with a jet of water or compressed-air from the outside.  Dry up coolers.  Check free movement of hydraulic motors (1).

Do not clean radiators with a wire brush or similar hard objects.

In case of firmly adhering dirt, remove radiator and clean.

Before cleaning the engines Exhaust pipes and turbo chargers in the engine compartments are covered with special heat-insulating material.

This material must not be spraywashed with steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure cleaners. It will be damaged. Therefore cover all the insulating material with plastic foils before using steam-jet cleaners or highpressure cleaners inside the engine compartments.

Fig. 3-169:

Means of fastening  Check fastening screws regularly for tightness.

The seating planes of the screws must be free from paint, dirt and rust.

Exhaust system Check the fastening screws regularly for tightness when the exhaust system is cold.

3-128

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Reservoirs for used grease at the A-frame, emptying Remove used grease from the reservoirs (Fig. 3-170:) regularly according to the maintenance plans.

Heating and air conditioning Clean or replace the filter mats in the air suction regulary.

The filter mats are located in the air conditioner housing (Fig. 3-171:) below the roof of the cab.

Do not re-use the grease because it is polluted.

 Open housing of air conditioner.

Dispose off used grease as well as cleaning rags without polluting the environment and separately from other waste.

 Clean or replace filter mats.

Fig. 3-170:

 Close housing.

Fig. 3-171:

3-129

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Working equipment, check for cracks Check the welded joins of the working equipment regulary.

Inspections must be carried out acc. to the "Structural Inspection Reports" every 500 OH. "Structural Inspection Report" forms for those inspections can be downloaded from the CGM HMS website, section "Support, Warranty".

If any suspect areas have been found additional testing is required: For detailed crack analysis prepare the surface of the relevant area to be inspected and carry out the dye penetrant, magnetic powder or ultrasonic test.

The inside located joins are accessible through the man-holes in stick (arrow, Fig. 3-172:) and boom (arrow, Fig. 3-173:).

Fig. 3-172:

Fig. 3-173:

3-130

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing HYDRAULIC LADDER To allow the hydraulik ladder (Fig. 3-174: and Fig. 3-175:) to be lowered in an emergency, the ladder mechanism is equipped with a pressure accumulator (arrow, Fig. 3-176:).

The pressure accumulator is located in the module beneath the operator’s cab.

Fig. 3-174:

Fig. 3-175:

Fig. 3-176:

3-131

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations

Checking the gas charging pressure in the pressure accumulator

The following regulations are applicable only in Germany. Please observe the relevant regulations in force in your own country.

After commissioning (new installation or repair), the gas charging pressure in the pressure vessel must be checked at least once during the first week. If no pressure loss is detected, the second pressure test must be performed after ca. 3 months. If no pressure loss is detected in this test either, the testing interval can be fixed at once pressure test each year.

Extract from the German regulations The accumulator vessel must not be subjected to welding, soldering or any other mechanical work.

Work on systems containing accumulators (repairs, connection of pressure gauges or similar work) may be carried out only when the fluid pressure has been relieved.

Extract from the German acceptance regulations Hydraulic accumulators are pressure vessels and are therefore subject to the "Druckbehälterverordnung (DruckbehV)" [Pressure Vessel Regulations].

Their installation, equipment and operation are governed by the "Technische Regeln Druckbehälter (TRB)" [Technical Rules for Pressure Vessels]. The pressure vessels of hydraulic accumulators are classified by the admissible operating pressure p in bars, the capacity l in liters and the product of pressure and capacity p x l. Depending on the class to which the accumulator belongs, the following inspections are mandatory: Group III p  l bar and p·x l  200 bars p·x l  1000 bars

3-132

Inspections prior to commissioning at the factory at the place of use Preliminary inspection by an Acceptance inspection by an expert expert Prototype and pressure test certified by the manufacturer (type approval) or the expert

Regular inspections Inspection schedule to be drawn up by end user, based on experience with type of operation and operating fluids.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing ON-BOARD CRANE, DRIVE UNIT The drive unit supplies the crane with hydraulic power. The drive unit comprises the diesel engine, fuel tank, starter batteries and the hydraulic system.

Crane engine More and detailed information about the diesel engine can be found in the Operating and Maintenance Manual for the crane engine.  Before each shift check engine oil level. If necessary top up with engine oil through opening of dipstick (3, Fig. 3-177:).  After each shift fill up fuel tank (1).  Regularly check batteries (4) and cable connections.  Regularly, at least once a year: - change engine oil, - replace engine oil filter, - check / replace air filter (2), - replace fuel filter.

Do not start engine with air filter (2) removed.

Fig. 3-177:

Hydraulic system For more and detailed information, see crane operating instructions.  Prior to each deployment, check the hydraulic oil level at the inspection glass (1, Fig. 3-178:); top up with hydraulic oil if necessary.  Check contamination of hydraulic oil filter regularly at contamination indicator (4).

Fig. 3-178:

 Regularly, but at least once a year replace the hydraulic oil filter (3) and the breather filter (2).

3-133

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing On-board crane, lubricating Servicing work  Lubricate all bearings regularly and as required, and spray swing ring with a graphite spray (Fig. 3-179:).

1 2 3 4

bearing joint (column/boom) cylinder bearing swing ring

4 lube points 2 lube points 5 lube points Graphite spray

On-Board crane, checking tightness of fastening bolts The hydraulic driven on-board crane (Optional) is fixed on the uppercarriage of the machine by means of 16 fastening bolts. The upper and lower fastening bolts (Fig. 3-180:) are important and safety relevant components, they carry all loads and forces of the crane.

Check tightness of all fastening bolts: 

in regular intervals according to the maintenance plans and



before every start of the on-board crane.

Check tightness of the fastening bolts by means of a torque wrench. The tightening torque for fastening bolts M20, quality 10.9, lightly oiled is: 557 Nm.

Fig. 3-179: Fig. 3-180:

3-134

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing PUTTING THE EXCAVATOR OUT OF OPERATION AND RECOMMISSIONING Putting the excavator out of operation

Battery storage

 Park the excavator on firm and level ground.

 Check the acid density and the electrolyte level of the battery every two weeks.

 Set the working equipment down on the ground, retracting the piston rods of the hydraulic cylinders as far as possible.  Set all control element to "0".  Clean the machine.

During prolonged machine downtimes, remove the batteries and store in a dry room at an ambient temperature of ca. 20°C / 68°F. Observe the following points with regard to maintenance:  Clean the batteries.

 Recharge the batteries at the latest, when the acid density has dropped to 1.23 kg/dm³.  Keep the batteries clean and dry on the outside.

 Carry out a visual inspection of the excavator.  Remove coarse dirt, snow and ice from the fins and fan wheel of the hydraulic oil cooler.  Carry out engines preservation.  Protect all bright metal parts (e.g. piston rods) from rust and dirt.  Check anti-freeze concentration of the cooling liquid to avoid freezing during the cold season.

Recommissioning  Remove the covers.  Degrease / clean all protected components.  Remove engines preservation in acc. with the engine operationg anstructions.  Check the fuel level in tanks.

 Fill up the fuel tanks.

 Check track tension (visual inspection).

 Remove the batteries; see: "Battery storage".

 Check level and condition of the cooling liquid in the cooling system.

 Secure the machine against unauthorized starting by: withdrawing the key from the key-switch, locking the cab door, securing all lockable hatches.  Cover up all openings.

 Check grease filling in grease container.  Oil level

- drive engines, - swing gearboxes, - pump drive gearboxes, - travel gearboxes.

 Check oil level in hydraulic oil reservoir.  Check battery acid density and level.  Install batteries and reconnect.  Function checks:

- superstructure holding brake, - track brake, - lighting system, - signalling equipment.

 Vent the hydraulic system.

3-135

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

This page intentionally left blank.

3-136

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing NOTES .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. ..............................................................................................................................................................................

3-137

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Inspection and servicing

This page intentionally left blank.

3-138

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work 4 REPAIR WORK Operation and Maintenance Manual

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Part 6 INDEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

4-1

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work

This page intentionally left blank.

4-2

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work REPAIR WORK - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Dismantling components

Operating instructions

Never do dismantling while the machine is at operating temperature.

Never carry out repair work without having read and understood the operating instructions.

Pay special attention to: "Fundamental Safety Instructions", "Inspection and servicing - safety instructions" and all warnings and safety instructions attached to the machine.

The descriptions of job sequences provide only experienced personnel with the necessary instructions.

The Operation and Maintenance Manual must be kept with the machine at all times.

Repair personnel

Oils, greases, or coolants may have a high temperature and result in burning or scalding.

Leave time for the machine to cool down.

Before starting work, depressurize piping and hoses, cylinders, radiator, hydraulic tank and other systems or units.

Replace defective components in good time to prevent major damage.

Clean the defective component carefully before dismantling it.

Mark the dismantled parts in the correct sequence to faciliate re-assembly.

Repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to repairing this or comparable machines.

When dismantling the component, close off exposed hose and piping connections, exposed drill holes and housings carefully to prevent any dirt from penetrating.

In the absence of such know-how, meticulous training must be given by experienced repair personnel, e.g. from CGM HMS.

Never remove lead seals

Working in greater heights

Never change rated pressure of pressure relief valves without the explicit authorization of CGM HMS.

Always wear safety harnesses when working at greater heights.

Never remove lead seals from pressure relief valves and accumulators.

Wear an approved safety harness; it must be equipped with fall arresters and safety cables.

Prestressed units Never open defective prestressed units but replace them as an entirety.

In exceptional cases, open only when the system and the operating sequence are precisely known and any special tools required are available.

The Operation and Maintenance Manual contains no information on this point.

After the repair work To prevent corrosion, coat all bright metal machine parts with a grease film.

On completing the work, re-assemble all protective devices, covers and noise- and vibrationinsulation material.

Never start up the drive engines while work is being done on the machine.

Check the repaired components and all machine functions in a trial run.

Never release the machine for recommissioning until it is fully functioning.

4-3

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work CONFINED SPACES - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS Work in confined spaces can lead to unexpected dangerous situations, such as 

the formation of flammable vapours exploding during welding operations or



the lack of oxygen and harmful gases causing loss of consciousness.

What are "confined spaces"?

Confined spaces on this machine are, for instance, components of the working equipment such as the monoblock boom, the lower part of the boom, the stick or the hydraulic reservoir (Fig. 4-1: - Fig. 4-3:).

These components are provided with manholes.

Manholes offer access to the inside of these components in order to carry out inspections or repairs such as welding work.

Fig. 4-1:

Dangerous situations can also exist in other spaces which are not very often visited or which are badly ventilated. In these spaces, harmful or flammable gases can accumulate unnoticed.

Work in such spaces may only be carried out by specially qualified persons who have been instructed as to the situational risks.

Before visiting these spaces, the following safety precautions must be taken:  The narrow space must be ventilated for a prolonged time, e.g. with a blower. Do not blow oxygen into the space. Oxygen increases the risk of fire.

Fig. 4-2:

 Use your personal protective equipment, e.g. respiratory mask.  Use a safety harness and have a second person stand by with a rescue rope attached to the harness.  Evacuate the gases produced during welding.

Fig. 4-3:

4-4

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work REPAIR WORK, FIRE AND EXPLOSION HAZARD Safety instructions Prior to commencing work, obtain informationon the national and corporate rules for the prevention of accidents and avoiding fires.

Pay particular attention to hazards caused by combustible and easily flammable substances.

Obtain information on the safe handling of the fire extinguishers to be used.

Avoid smoking and open fire on, next to and below the hydraulic shovel.

Even battery gases can ignite in open flames or fire.

Combustible and easily or highly inflammable substances or liquids increase the risk of fire and explosion. This is also valid for pressure vessels containing flammable substances as, for instance, spray oil or cold-starting fluid (ether). They are heat-sensitive and can explode even if exposed only to intensive sunlight.

These substance can also ignite themselves if they come close to hot units or objects as, for instance, a turbocharger.

Do not store these substances on the hydraulic shovel. If combustible, easily or highly flammable substances or liquids were used during maintenance operations, they must be completely removed from the hydraulic shovel at the end of the work.

Place suitable fire guardings (fire barriers) if open fire or flying sparks cannot be avoided during repair work.

If necessary, also cover the ground with fireprotective blankets.

Apply special protection to cables, cable ducts as well as to hose and pipe lines.

Have all your welding, flame cutting and grinding work approved before starting work.

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether). Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Ensure sufficient ventilation.

Do not keep any fire extinguishers that are not suitable or have not been tested.

Do not extinguish flammable liquids with water.

Use: 

dry-powder, carbon-dioxide or foam extinguishing compounds.

When getting into contact with burning substances, the fire-fighting water would abruptly evaporate and distribute the substance such as oil over a wide area. Water causes short-circuits in the electrical system thus possibly entailing new hazards.

Call the fire brigade.

Clean the hydraulic shovel carefully after the maintenance, if oil, grease, fuel, detergents or coldstarting fluid have been spilt over the machine. If possible, use a steam-jet cleaner for cleaning.

Avoid parking the hydraulic shovel in places where 

combustible substances such as coal dust or tar are present.



open or smouldering fire may occur.

Remove the hydraulic shovel from such an area where combustible or easily flammable liquids have spilled from the hydraulic shovel onto the ground.

Flying sparks (caused by welding, flame cutting, grinding, electrical short-circuit) may cause fire on the ground that can spread to the hydraulic shovel.

4-5

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work REPAIR WORK, ENGINE Read and observe the "Repair - Safety instructions" chapter and the engine operating instructions before working on the engine.

The engine compartment can be equipped with pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether).

Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage. Protect the pressure vessels against damage before beginning to work in or close to the engine compartment.

Risk of injury caused by rotating or hot parts of the engine.

Shut off the engine and allow to cool down.

Carry out repair work only if the machine has been secured as described in the "Securing the machine" section of these operating instructions.

Check and replace V-belts only when the engine is stationary.

4-6

Before cleaning the engines Exhaust pipes and turbo chargers in the engine compartments are covered with special heat-insulating material.

This material must not be spraywashed with steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure cleaners. It will be damaged.

Therefore cover all the insulating material with plastic foils before using steam-jet cleaners or high-pressure cleaners inside the engine compartments.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work HYDRAULIC SYSTEM Repair instructions

Hydraulic hoses – Instructions

Always depressurize the hydraulic system before disconnecting any hydraulic hoses or pipes.

Even hoses that have been properly stored or used are subject to natural ageing. Their useful life is therefore limited.

Read and observe also the chapters "Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions" and "Repair Safety instructions".

Replace damaged and leaking hydraulic hoses and pipes as soon as possible by new ones.

Use original spare parts from CGM HMS. They are adapted to the respective function.

Do not re-use old hoses.

Never repair damaged hoses.

Discard escaped oil and oily wastes without polluting the environment. These substances must not be allowed to penetrate into the soil.

Hydraulic hoses must replaced after a service life of six years (including a storage time of 2 years).

Check the date of manufacture on the hose or on the hose fitting regularly.

The recommended interval after which hydraulic hoses - and especially those used in harsh conditions - must be replaced depends on the number of operating hours and on pressure loading.

The use of hoses close to their recommended load limit shortens the replacement interval (e.g. high temperatures, frequent working cycles, extremely high pulse frequencies as well as multi-shift operation and round-the-clock work).

Hydraulic hoses must be replaced, if one of the following defects is detected during a visual inspection: 

Damage to the outer fibre reinforcement layer reaching down to the inner layer (cuts, chafe marks, cracks).



Embrittlement of the outer fibre reinforcement layer (cracks in the hose material).



Changes in the ususal shape of the hose under pressure or in pressureless condition in bends or curves such as detachment of fibre layers, formation of bubbles or bulges.



Leaks.



Non-observance of fitting requirements.



Damage to or deformation of hose fittings that may result in a reduction of the strength of the screwed union.



Detachment of the hose from the fitting.



Corrosion in fittings reducing the strength of the function of the fitting.

4-7

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The hydraulic system is equipped with pressure accumulators containing nitrogen under high initial pressure.

Even when the hydraulic pressure in the system is reduced, the nitrogen in the accumulator will remain under pressure.

The accumulators are completely safe in operation. If incorrectly handled, however, there is a risk of explosion.

So:  Never handle accumulators never weld or solder.

mechanically,

 Testing and servicing work must be carried out by experts only.  Prior to any testing and servicing work, depressurize the hydraulic part of the system.  To dismantle the accumulator, always wear goggles and working gloves.  Fill accumulator with nitrogen only, never with compressed air or oxygen.  Report any defects or damage to the machine owner without delay.  Prior to recommissioning, an inspection by a specialist or expert is essential if the accumulator was damaged or if the admissible operating temperature or operating pressure was exceeded.  Never remove or paint over warning and information plates, rating plates or type identification markings. Replace illegible or damaged plates immediately.

4-8

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work WELDING AND FLAME CUTTING WORKS - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS The present safety instructions are valid for both types of work. For easier reading, the text only uses the terms "welding work", "welding" or simply "work". These terms do however always refer to both types of work, i.e. "welding and flame-cutting work".

Read these safety instructions before starting any welding or flame-cutting operations.

Welding work by qualified personnel only Carry out welding work only if you have received special training and if you have been ordered to perform such work.

Always bear in mind that you are performing welding work on heavily loaded components. The quality of your welding work can be decisive for the operational capability of the machine and also for the health and life of persons.

Observe the health protection and accident prevention laws and regulations as well as the fire protection regulations in force in your country.

Observe all warning and instruction signs attached to the machine.

Increased risk of fire during welding work Always bear in mind that the heat, the sparks or dripping red-hot metal or slag produced in the process constitute a considerable risk of fire.

The present safety instructions provide information on how to minimize the risk of fire.

Remove all combustible materials close to the welding location or cover them up with noncombustible materials.

If works in the vicinity of combustible materials cannot be avoided, further persons with firefighting equipment must be present on site as fireguards.

Observe the instructions of the machine owner and of the mine.

Health hazards Welding operations produce harmful gases. Do not inhale the fumes and gases and make sure the surroundings of the welding location are well ventilated or equipped with an exhaust system.

Remove all kinds of paint and all coatings as well as all residues of oils and greases from the weld area.

Do not wind the welding cables round your body or parts of your body. The electromagnetic fields produced may damage your health.

Wear the prescribed personal protective equipment such as:  protective clothing,  protective gloves,  protective mask and,  a fall-arrest system for persons working at height.

4-9

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work Tanks, pressure vessels and pressure accumulators Any work on vessels containing or having contained  combustible or combustion-accelerating substances,  potentially explosive substances or  substances susceptible to develop harmful gases, fumes, mists or dusts during welding may only be carried out under expert supervision and only by experienced personnel especially assigned to such work.

This prescription applies, for instance, to all tanks and reservoirs for hydraulic fluid, engine oil, diesel fuel or lubricating grease.

Welding work on pressure vessels and pressure accumulators is forbidden.

Pressure vessels containing cold-starting fluid (ether) may be installed in or near the engine compartment.

Ether is toxic and highly flammable; the vessels are under pressure. These pressure vessels can explode if exposed to high temperatures (above 49°C / 120°F) or in the event of damage.

Protect the vessels against damage and high temperatures.

Do not perform welding work in the vicinity of these pressure vessels before they have been covered up safely against accidental contact or flying sparks. Have the pressure vessels removed from the machine, if safe protection cannot be ensured.

Inform yourself about the locations in the machine where the pressure accumulators of the hydraulic system are installed. Do not perform welding work in the vicinity of these pressure accumulators before they have been covered up safely against accidental contact or flying sparks. Have the pressure accumulators removed from the machine, if safe protection cannot be ensured.

Slewing rings and articulated joints The welding current must not flow through ballbearing or roller-bearing slewings rings, through bolted connections or articulated joints or through hydraulic cylinders.

An electric current flowing through an air gap (e.g. in the bearing or in the articulation) produces a spark which damages the metallic surface.

The welding clamps must therefore always be connected very close to the weld area (max. 2 - 3 m away (6.6-9.8 ft)).

Information relating to the electrical system and to electronic modules Electric arc welding produces electromagnetic fields, electrostatic charges and voltage spikes which can cause damage to electronic modules.

Although the electronic modules of the machine are carefully protected against these influences, it is nevertheless necessary to take additional precautions in order to prevent such damage to the greatest possible extent. 

Switch off the electrical system ("ignition OFF").



Open the battery main switch (or disconnect the starter batteries from the machine).



Lay the welding cables as far away from electric lines as possible.

If it is not possible to implement all of the abovementioned precautions, all connectors must be removed from the electronic modules before beginning any welding work. 

Protect withdrawn terminals and connectors from short circuits and soiling. Cover up terminals and connectors with foils or adhesive tape.



Never touch the enclosures of electrical and electronic modules with the welding electrode.



Protect electric lines against the heat emanating from the weld area.



Restore all electrical connections when the welding operations are terminated.

Never connect the ground clamp of the welding cable to the enclosures of electric or electronic modules.

4-10

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work Welding on the counterweight

Welding on the cab

Counterweights may contain a build-up of flammable gases. Before starting to work, counterweights must be flushed for at least 20 minutes with compressed air in order to remove these build-ups of gas. To permit flushing, the counterweight has two bores in its upper part: a threaded bore M18x1.5 for the compressed-air line and another unthreaded bore to let the air out.

The operator's cab is designed in such a way that it meets the FOPS (Falling Objects Protective Structure) requirements in accordance with DIN EN ISO 3449.

Detailed information / instructions on this subject can be found in Service Information 2006-33 which is available on the CGM HMS website under Maintenance & Service.

Welding on components of the working equipment and on other fully or partly closed steel structures Components may be equipped with pipelines routed inside. These lines can contain combustible substances such as hydraulic oil or lubricating grease which may be set on fire by welding operations. 

Check whether pipes or hosepipes are connected to the steel component.



Depressurize these lines.



Open the screwed connections and empty the lines routed inside the component.



Start welding only after these operations have been carried out.

Welding and other mechanical work is forbidden as there is a risk of reducing the structural stability of the cab.

Further information More detailed information concerning the state-ofthe-art execution of welding operations can be found in the Service Manual "Welding for maintenance and repair".

For problems or queries please contact the competent service personnel.

If parts of the machine have to be removed or dismantled, please read and observe the chapters: "Assembly of working equipment, safety instructions", "Inspection and servicing, safety instructions", "Repair, safety instructions".

Electric lines may also be be laid inside partly open steel structures in order to protect them against damage. They are not always visible from each viewing direction. Electric lines may catch fire as a result of the heat produced during welding. 

Therefore check carefully whether electric lines are laid in the vicinity of the weld area.



Protect electric lines against the heat produced at the weld area or have them removed before starting the welding operations.

4-11

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work DISPOSAL AT THE END OF THE SERVICE LIFE Dismantling and removal instructions Before beginning work, think about the risks involved, e.g.: 



Most of the machine components have considerable mass. Therefore use only lifting gear and slings of sufficient bearing capacity.

Risk of residual pressures still in the hydraulic system. Be very careful when opening hydraulic lines.

Read the following text attentively and observe the instructions given. Respecting the instructions will help you to protect yourself against health hazards and injuries and to prevent avoidable environment pollution.

4-12

Risk of deflagrations In the course of time, flammable gases may have formed or accumulated in the hollow spaces of welded constructions, e.g. the counterweight. To remove these flammable gases, the hollow spaces must be purged carefully with compressed air before work with hand grinders, flame cutters or other sparking tools is being undertaken.

Risk of fire Remainders of fuel or oils may lead to the formation of flammable gases in tanks or other hollow spaces. When these tanks or hollow bodies are cut into pieces, the gases may ignite or even explode.

For this reason, remove all fuel or oil remainders from these components and purge them carefully with compressed air in order to eliminate flammable gases (other efficient methods of removing flammable gases can also be applied) before work with hand grinders, flame cutters or other sparking tools is being undertaken.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work Disposing of the machine without polluting the environment

Further hazardous substances 

Batteries contain lead and acid.

Before stripping down the machine at the end of its service life observe the following instructions:



Electronic modules are located in switch cabinets of the cab module, the engine module, the control column.



Pressure accumulators contain nitrogen under high pressure and possibly remainders of hydraulic oil.



Lamps of Xenon working lights contain mercury.

The required electronic control circuits are integrated in the housings of the working lights.



The fluorescent lamps of the maintenance lighting (discharge types) contain mercury.



Insulating material of cables can contain PVC.



The fire extinguishing system (if installed) contains trigger charges (ATTENTION, explosion risk) on the extinguishing agent containers.

Pressure accumulators, extinguishing gas and extinguishing powder.

For more detailed information please refer to the manufacturer's safety datasheets.

The assemblies of the machine contain various operating fluids or lubricants. These substances may pollute the environment (so-called hazardous substances) and must therefore be disposed of properly.

Observe the national laws and regulations governing the non-polluting disposal of these substances.

Remove all operating fluids from the systems, remove all lubricants and dispose of these substances properly. 

Fuel system: fuel tanks, fuel filters, fuel lines, filling station.

Auxiliary attachment and units, such as an onboard crane or an auxiliary heater have their own fuel tanks with the correpsonding line systems.



Hydraulic oil: hydraulic oil reservoir, hydraulic cylinders, hydraulic motors, hosepipes, piping, hydraulic pumps, hydraulic valves, hydraulic oil filter, filling station.



Engine coolant: engine, radiator, expansion reservoir, piping and hosepipes, filling station.



Gearbox oil in swing, travelling and transfer gearbox systems, expansion tanks, piping and hosepipes, filling station; idlers, support and track rollers.



Have the refrigerant (R134A) sucked out of the air conditioner system.



Grease from the central lubricating system, grease drum, piping and hosepipes, distributors, filling station; grease accumulations in bearings of the working equipment, grease filling in the swing ring, grease filling in track and support rollers as well as in idlers.

4-13

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work Appropriate disposal of batteries The machine is equipped with batteries containing lead and other harmful and polluting substances.

Damaged or used batteries must therefore not be disposed of in the environment. They must be disposed of properly and separately from other waste.

The batteries are marked with the corresponding symbols (Fig. 4-4:).

Since batteries contain also reusable materials, they are taken back free of charge by the manufacturer, dealer or by other specialized companies.

In the European Community, the final consumer is obliged by law to to dispose of used batteries in designated waste collections centers.

Observe the current regulations and laws of your country with regard to the handling of damaged or used batteries.

4-14

Fig. 4-4:

The symbols in Fig. 4-4: have the following meaning: 

Crossed-out waste bin= Do not dispose of batteries with normal household waste.



Pb……= Chemical symbol for lead.



Circle of bent arrows= Recycling symbol, ingredients of the battery can be reused.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work NOTES .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. ..............................................................................................................................................................................

4-15

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Repair work

This page intentionally left blank.

4-16

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex 5 ANNEX Operation and Maintenance Manual

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 6 INDEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

5-1

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex

This page intentionally left blank.

5-2

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex BOARD-CONTROL-SYSTEM BCS III, what’s that?

What it is The BCSIII is the third generation of the Board Control System. This generation represents the current stage of development of this reliable monitoring and control system for hydraulic mining excavators from CGM HMS GmbH. The BCSIII communicates with other electronic units in the excavator and makes up the CAMP system, the Control And Monitoring Platform.

Controllers actuate and monitor functions such as the motor management, drive and control of the hydraulic pumps, the servo control and others. The controllers are basically computers that have been configured for their special application.

Other electronic units of the CAMP system that communicate with the BCSIII are located in cabinets in the module below the operator’s cab, the pump compartment and the engine compartment.

The exchange of data between sensors, controllers, the BCSIII and other involved components takes place via the CAN bus.

What it does The Board Control System, abbreviated to BCS, monitors all the essential functions of the excavator and its components.

It releases an appropriate signal if any maximum value is exceeded and also sends a report to be archived in the memory bank.

If a normal operating status can be reached by temporarily reducing the excavator's output, then this is monitored by BCS and done by the CAMP system.

If it is necessary for the operator to take certain action, e.g. to stop one of the engines a relevant command is sent to the BCS display screen.

BCS also gives information on servicing and trouble-shooting.

Sensors installed at various points on the excavator constantly transmit their readings to the controllers of the CAMP system.

All essential pieces of operating data are displayed on the BCSIII screen in the form of simulated instruments as well as they are archived and can be called up as and when required.

Fig. 5-1:

Benefits for the operator Because BCS automatically warns of any abnormal conditions that require a corrective action, the operator can concentrate fully on the work in hand, and is not distracted by constantly having to keep an eye on many instruments or by having to decide upon appropriate actions to be taken in case of limit values being exceeded.

The operator and the servicing crew also have the means of calling up particular background information from the BCS archive.

The housing – installed in the control column inside the operator’s cab (Fig. 5-1:) – integrates the computer, the monitor, the control elements and the interfaces.

SIL2 functionality Safety related functions on the machine have been checked to minimize the risk of faults in their own function. Tests were performed according to the standards of functional safety (ISO 61508).

To fulfill the requirements for reaching the Safety Integrated Level 2 (SIL2) new components and electronic units had to be used on the machine.

These components and units are servo-controllers, sensors, switches, hand levers (joysticks), foot pedals and valves.

Want more information?

More detailed and more technical information for service personnel could be found in the “„Service Manual“”, chapter 9.

There are more extensive information given about the communicating units and about troubleshooting.

5-3

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex The keys on the front side

Other elements on the front side

A membrane keypad is located on the front side of the housing (Fig. 5-2:). The keys can be used to navigate through the screen pages.

(located on top of the column of keys on the right side)

The keys in the row below the screen (1 – 0) will perform the same task as the active area on the screen above.

Example: In (Fig. 5-2:) the key (1) lies directly below the active area "Service". Touching the "Service" area or pressing key "1", will take you to the same screen page.

They can also be used for numerical inputs.

The keys provided with arrows on the right side of the screen are used to navigate in a screen page.

Pressing the key with the "door symbol" gives access to the previous screen page.

Pressing the bottom key in the row confirms an input (like “Enter”).

Fig. 5-2:

5-4

The green LED lights up when the electrical system of the machine is switched on, operating voltage is available. The green LED flashes with each keypress and when the background lighting of the screen is turned off.

The yellow LED flashes if the temperature inside the device lies outside the permissible range. The automatic heating system is then active.

The brightness sensor measures the ambient brightness. The BCS automatically controls the background illumination of the screen and the illumination of the keypad.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex BCSIII, the start screen The screen displays the graphical user interface of the Board Control System. The basic screen (Fig. 5-3:) appears when all electronic units of the CAMP system have started and when their selftests have been completed.

Note: At low outside temperatures it is possible that the basic screen appears a few minutes after switching on the electrical system (warming up phase).

Starting from this basic screen, the user can access a number of other screens. This does not require an input device such as a keyboard, mouse or similar.

The BCS screen is designed as a touch-screen. By slightly touching the active areas, the user can perform activities such as changing to another screen page.

Active areas are shown on the screen as threedimensional graphics. In the basic configuration – not activated - they seem to project out of the user interface. When touched, they appear to be lowered.

Never use pointed objects such as a ball pen, screwoperator, nail or similar.

This could damage the active surface of the touch-screen.

Do not press on the sensitive areas, just slightly touch them with your fingertips!

Fig. 5-3:

5-5

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Information given on the start screen, top section The symbols shown in the top row of the start screen (Fig. 5-4:) appear in grey colour if function is not activated, in green colour if everything is OK or in red if a warning is given. In this case more information is displayed in the red “failure row” below.

6

Operating hours meter.

7

Right engine monitoring.

8

Service station, turns to red colour if lowered. Swinging superstructure or travelling the machine not possible then.

1

Left engine monitoring.

2

Central lubrication system monitoring.

9

3

The number of dumpers you loaded is displayed here (if counted with the key in the right joystick).

Hydraulic ladder, turns to red colour if lowered. Swinging superstructure or travelling the machine not possible then.

10

Track parking brakes monitoring.

4

Connection to Remote Service System (optional).

11

Superstructure holding brakes monitoring.

12

Servo-switch inside seat monitoring.

5

Hydraulic system monitoring.

Fig. 5-4:

5-6

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Information given on the start screen, central section 1

Left engine data during operation: bar = engine oil pressure, Rpm = revolutions per minute, Ltr = fuel in fuel reservoir, red means: top up with fuel soon.

Water = temperature of cooling fluid in degrees Celcius, left arrowhead-shaped symbol slides up and down displaying the current temperature. The symbol showing a halfed arrowhead is a trailing pointer displaying the maximum temperature. Slide to “0” with your fingertip.

2

Hydr. Oil = Hydraulic oil temperature in degrees Celcius, displayed graphically and numerically.

V = on-board voltage, displayed graphically and numerically.

Spanner symbol = operating time until next service is to be due, symbols are red then.

3

Right engine data during operation: bar = engine oil pressure, Rpm = revolutions per minute, Ltr = fuel in fuel reservoir, red means: top up with fuel soon.

Water = temperature of cooling fluid in degrees Celcius, left arrowhead-shaped symbol slides up and down displaying the current temperature. The symbol showing a halfed arrowhead is a trailing pointer displaying the maximum temperature. Slide to “0” with your fingertip.

Fig. 5-5:

5-7

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Information given on the start screen, lower section 1

2

Button “Service”.

Tapping with your fingertip opens a gate to much more information about the excavators current behavior.

A menu will appear where you can select the section you want information about (see chapter “Service screen”).

Button “Setup”.

Tapping with your fingertip opens a login window that permits access to the BCS section that is exclusively for service personnel.

A password is needed to get access.

Fig. 5-6:

5-8

3

Button “Fault”.

Tapping this button opens a list of failures stored in the failure memory.

A detailed description can be found in the “„Service Manual“”, chapter 9.

4

The red “failure row”.

Here the system displayes detailed information about the failure occurred and gives instructions about what to do.

5

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

6

Clock.

Can be adjusted in the “Setup” section by service personnel.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Emergency Stop, reset function In case the Emergency Stop function has been activated by one or more of the Emergency Stop switches or by operating the battery circuit breaker, the main screen changes and displays the reset button (1, Fig. 5-7:). The machine is inactivated then, engines cannot be started.

1

This symbol appears on the main screen when the Emergency Stop function has been activated.

Call the responsible service personnel immediately. The fault has to be located and eliminated.

Before being able to restart the engines the reset button, located in the front door of the 24Voltswitch cabinet (X1) must be pressed. The switch cabinet is located in the cab module.

After pushing the reset button, the green LED inside the push switch lights up. This signalizes that the Emergency Stop function is back in function again.

Fig. 5-7:

5-9

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Swing circuit lock-out function If the system detects an error with the swing function the swing circuit lock-out screen pops up on the main page displaying the faulty component(s).

Call the responsible service personnel immediately. The fault has to be located and eliminated.

The pop-up window disappears after touching anywhere in the window. It will stay in the background until another fault happens or the operator navigates to a different screen and goes back to the main screen.

The fault can be reviewed on the “Servo Controller Menu”, available after logging in to the Setup-Level I-Menu (password required).

Fig. 5-8:

5-10

Squared symbols meanings: Green color = OK Yellow color = Minor fault detected, 48 hours to solve the problem before status changes to red and safe stop sequence is initiated.

Red color = Major fault detected, safe stop sequence is initiated.

The all-over status (green, yellow, red) of the swing circuit is displayed at the end of the chain and correlates with the three conditions mentioned above.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Information given on the “Service” screen 1

2

3

Tapping on the photo of the engine opens a screen displaying current engine data (see “Engine data screen”).

Same result when tapping on button “Engine” or pressing key “1” on the housing.

Tapping on the photo of the hydraulic pumps opens a screen displaying current hydraulic data (see “Hydraulic data screen”).

Same result when tapping on button “Hydraulic” or pressing key “3” on the housing.

Tapping on the photo of the lubrication control opens a screen displaying current lubrication data (see “Lubrication data screen”).

Same result when tapping on button “Lubrication” or pressing key “5” on the housing.

4

Tapping on the photo of the control lever (joystick) opens a screen displaying control elements adjusting data (see “Controls adjustment data screen”).

Same result when tapping on button “Servosystem” or pressing key “7” on the housing.

5

Tapping on this button opens the “View documents” screen (see: “View documents screen”).

6

Adjusting screen brightness. Sliding the green button sets screen brighter / darker.

Tapping on button “Autom.” sets brightness to automatic mode.

7

Tapping on this button opens the “Signal Table” screen (see: “Signal Table screen”).

8

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-9:

5-11

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Engine data screen This screen displays data of the left engine. Same data for the right engine are available after tapping on the button “right engine”.

1

This section of the screen displays current engine data.

2

Here the oil change interval is displayed as well as the remaining operating hours (h) until the next oil change.

After carrying out oil change tap on button “done”, this resets the graphical oil change bar and the (h) counter.

Fig. 5-10:

5-12

3

In this section information about faults and malfunctions are displayed. Fault description follows the SAE J1939 standard.

SPN Number = Suspect Parameter Number, FMI = Failure Mode Indentifier.

The “failure row” below displays a failure description.

4

All data displayed can be saved to an USBstick after tapping this button (see: “Saving data to an USB-stick”).

5

Tapping on this button opens a window displaying all the faults / malfunctions the system is able to display (see: “Code Table screen”).

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Hydraulic data screen 1

This screen displays data related to the hydraulic system.

2

All data displayed can be saved to an USBstick after tapping this button (see: “Saving data to an USB-stick”).

3

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-11:

5-13

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Lubrication data screen 1

2

This screen displays data related to the central lubrication system.

Here are information about the status of the lubricating system of the upper carriage.

3

Here you get information about the status of the lubricating system of the under carriage.

4

If the system detects faults or malfunctions in the lubrication system of the upper carriage they are marked here with a red dot.

Call the responsible service personnel.

If the system detects faults or malfunctions in the lubrication system of the under carriage they are marked here with a red dot.

Call the responsible service personnel.

5

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-12:

5-14

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Controls adjustment data screen The characteristic curves of control levers (1, Fig. 5-13:) and control pedals (2) are adjustable by service personnel. The adjusted values are shown here graphically and numerically.

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

If adjustment is needed, call the responsible service personnel.

Adjustment is to be done in the “Setup” section of BCSIII. Access to this area is for service personnel only (password required).

Fig. 5-13:

5-15

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex View documents screen Technical documentation for the machine is stored in memory.

Tapping on the buttons opens the appropriate pdf file and displays it on the screen by means of the build in viewer.

You can navigate inside the documents using the navigation elements known from other computer usage, like buttons, sliders, links from the contents page and so on.

Fig. 5-14:

5-16

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Signal table screen

1

This is a listing of all the signal sources that are connected to the BCS- and CAMP-system.

In the “Status” column small icons visualize the signal status: green=ok; red=malfunction.

In column “Code” you can find the identifier for the sensor or unit that helps the maintenance personnel to localize the sensor in the electric schematics (in this example the identifier for the sensor is “3B22”) .

To identify and localize sensors and units on the machine, some photos were attached. If you tap on a “Name” and then the button “Location” became readable, a photo is available. Otherwise the button is greyed.

In Fig. 5-15: ID 110 “Main Pump 1/3 Pressure” is marked and button “Location” (1) is readable. When tapping on it, a photo appears and shows where the sensor is located (see Fig. 5-16:).

2

Tapping on button “Diagram” opens a screen showing the data coming from four sensors in a diagram (see Fig. 5-17:).

3

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-15:

5-17

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Signal table screen, location Button “Location” has been tapped, a photo appears showing where the sensor “3B22” is located at the machine.

Fig. 5-16:

5-18

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Signal table screen, diagram

3

Rec = starts recording the data from the selected sources; Stop = stops recording data; Rev = scrolls the diagram in reverse; Fwd = scrolls the diagram forwards.

4

Diagram window, displays the data from four sources as four lines in different colours.

5

Save = save data to memory; Load = load older data from memory; Delete = delete data displayed.

6

Buttons to scroll, scale up, scale down and reset to base setting the diagram window.

7

Select signal source to be displayed (channel 1-4)

8

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

This is a diagram showing the data coming from four signal sources (sensors) for a longer period of time.

The signal sources (channel 1-4) can be selected from a listing after tapping the “Config” button (see: “Signal table screen, diagram configuration”).

1

2

Tapping on button “Config.” opens a window listing all the signal sources available for BCS and CAMP (Fig. 5-18:).

Listing of the four signal sources selected: ID, Name, actual value and value at cursor in the diagram.

Fig. 5-17:

5-19

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Signal table screen, diagram configuration Button “Config.” has been tapped, a window appears displaying all the signal sources available.

In column “Channel” you can mark four signal sources whose data you want to display in the diagram (Fig. 5-17:).

Mark the line with the signal source you want and press the appopriate numeric key on the BCS housing: “1” for channel 1; “2”, “3” and “4” for the other channels.

Fig. 5-18:

5-20

1

For example: This signal source is selected and marked to be displayed on channel 3.

2

For example: This signal source is selected and marked to be displayed on channel 2.

3

Tapping the button will confirm your selection.

4

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Code table screen

1

Coming from the “Engine data screen” (Fig. 5-10:) after tapping the “Code Table” button.

This screen displays a listing of all available trouble codes according to the SAE J1939 standard.

Active faults or malfunctions are displayed on the “Engine data screen” with their “SPN Number” and their “FMI Number”. To get the description for the fault or malfunction, key in both numbers at (1) and tap on the button left aside.

The appropriate description will be displayed (2).

SPN = Suspect Parameter Number, according to SAE J1939 standard, For example: 94

2

FMI = Failure Mode Identifier, according to SAE J1939 standard, For example: 18

3

Tapping these buttons will scroll the listing: forward, reverse, to beginning, to end.

4

Tapping the button with the door icon “Exit” leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-19:

5-21

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Slew brake test screen

1

The slew brake test screen (Fig. 5-20:) is available after logging in to the Setup-Level I-Menu (password required).

A slew brake test must be performed during commissioning of the machine and after repair work or maintainance work carried out on the slewing system.

The slew brake test should be performed at every maintenance scheduled by the customer.

This is to ensure proper functioning of the slew brake system. Proper functioning of the slew brake system has influence to machine safety.

Before performing the slew brake test, ensure the machine is in a safe workplace where the machine can rotate 360° without hitting an obstacle. Check that all persons have left the area around the machine. Activate the horn.

To perform the slew brake test, follow the instrucions (4) given on the screen.

Fig. 5-20:

5-22

Preconditions to be fulfilled before performing the slew brake test, from left to right: - swing brake applied, - servo control switch in control column must be in position OFF, - operator sitting on his seat.

Symbols change to green with precondition fulfilled.

Time limit to fulfill preconditions is 60 sec.

2

Button to start the test.

3

Hydraulic pressures in the units of the slewing systems, lefthand and righthand.

4

Instructions to perform the slew brake test.

5

Instruments displaying hydraulic pressure in lefthand / righthand slewing system.

6

Indicators showing the progress during testing: - “pending”, colour red after starting the test, - “in progress”, colour yellow when 300 bar, - “passed”, colour green when test OK.

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex BCS III, interfaces The BCS system comes with different data interfaces. This feature allows the communication with external electronic devices.

Three connectors are located on the right-hand side-wall of the control column (Fig. 5-21:): 1

USB 2.0, jack type A. This jack accepts, for example, a USB stick used to save operating data for evaluation on an external computer.

2

Jack D sub, 9 pins.

Used to connect a computer with a diagnosis software with access to the CAN bus.

This connection is reserved for service personnel.

3

Fig. 5-21:

Ethernet, jack type RJ45.

For the connection of future extensions, for example, the CMDI-system (i.e. Caterpillar Mining Data Interface).

USB interface, data storage A USB stick can be connected to the USB plug-in connection of type A (1, Fig. 5-21:).

Suitable are such USB sticks that would also work on computers with WINDOWS® operating systems; they may be formatted with the NTFS or the FAT32 file system.

If a screen page displays the symbol of a USB stick, the operating data of this screen page can be saved. The BCS will create a text file.

For a detailed description see: “Saving data to a USB stick”.

5-23

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Saving data to a USB stick All screens which have the “USB-stick-button” (1, Fig. 5-22:) offer the functionality to store data for external use.

All data related to the current screen will be stored to a USB stick. In this example all data from the “Service, left engine” screen will be saved to a file.

Fileformat is RTF (Rich Text Format).

The file name will be automatically created following this pattern: “Shovel type+serial number+screen name.rtf”.

For example: “RH120172_Engine_LH.rtf”.

If this file already exists, an extension with increment numbers will be added to the file name: “RH120172_Engine_LH_(1).rtf”.

“RH120172_Engine_LH_(2).rtf”. ……

Fig. 5-22:

5-24

Save data: Plug a USB stick into the USB jack (see: “BCSIII, interfaces”).

To save the data, tap on button (1, Fig. 5-22:).

The BCS system checks the USB interface before saving the data. If no USB stick is detected, a new window appears showing the folder structure on the CF-card as well as the message “Please plug a USB stick”..

If a USB stick is found, a new window appears, see next page (Fig. 5-23:).

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Saving data to a USB stick, continued This window shows the current data you want to save in a file and askes for confirmation.

If you want to save the data tap on the “Yes” button (1, Fig. 5-23:). The file will be written on the USB stick.

Otherwise tap on the “No” button and return to the screen you want.

If you want to see the files stored on the USB stick, tap on the “Open” button (2).

A new window appear showing the folder / file structure on the USB stick, see next page (Fig. 5-24:).

Fig. 5-23:

5-25

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Saving data to a USB stick, continued This window (Fig. 5-24:) displays the folder / file structure on the USB stick plugged into the USB jack.

Mark the file you want to see by tapping on the filename (2).

Tapping an button “show” (1) opens another window which shows the file.

Tapping the button with the door icon (3) leaves the current screen and opens the previous screen.

Fig. 5-24:

5-26

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex BCSIII, cleaning

BCSIII, disposal

Clean dirty screens with a soft, slightly moist cloth.

In order to remove persistent dirt, you can use in addition a conventional cleaning agent for LCD monitors.

This electronic device contains substances that might be harmful to the environment.

The electronic components and the tubes of the background illumination contain, for example, lead (Pb) and mercury (Hg).

Never use solving or scouring cleaning agents.

This could damage the surface of the screen.

The background illumination lamps are CCFL-typelamps (Cold Cathode Fluorescent Lamps).

Do not use compressed air or water under pressure (high pressure cleaner or steam cleaner).

This could damage the electronic components.

Therefore, this device must not be disposed of with your regular household waste. It must be disposed of properly as electronic scrap.

The battery for backing up the memory contains lithium.

The escaping liquid from a damaged LCD screen may be harmful.

Do not come in contact with escaping liquids. In case of skin contact, wash immediately with water and soap.

5-27

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex TROUBLESHOOTING Instructions on troubleshooting

Layout of the fault table

Faults are often due to the machine not being correctly operated or serviced.

Fault

For this reason, it is vital to read through the relevant section of the Operation and Maintenance Manual once again before rectifying any faults.

If you are unable to detect the cause of the fault or to rectify it, apply to the CGM HMS GmbH aftersales service.

Describe the fault and all accompanying circumstances as precisely as possible when calling on the CGM HMS GmbH after-sales service. Exact data allow for fast troubleshooting.

Never do any jobs for which you are not qualified.

The fault table lists all faults which have been reported to date and outlines their possible causes and rectifying measures. In exceptional cases, a described fault may also have a different cause.

The fault is described here as the outcome of an observation or a previous activity.

Therefore make careful observations.

Study the problem carefully. First think, then act.

Ask yourself the following questions: 

Which warning signals preceded the fault?



What repair and servicing work was carried out previously?



Has this defect already occurred?



Is it one or several simultaneously occurring faults?

Possible causes The possible causes of the observed fault are outlined in this group. They are arranged in order of probability, i.e. the possible cause occurring in most cases heads the list.

Measures This describes the troubleshooting procedure.

Section This specifies where information on troubleshooting is given in the Operation and Maintenance Manual. If there is no entry, the CGM HMS GmbH after-sales service should be consulted

5-28

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex FAULT TABLES Combustion engine - Fault table Fault Engine fails to start or starts only with difficulty Engine does not turn Engine starts, but runs enevenly or intermittently Engine gets too hot, temperature warning activated Engine not working at full power Engine not working on full cylinder papacity Engine without oil pressure or oil pressure too low Engine oil comsumption too high Engine emits blue smoke Engine emits white smoke Engine emits black smoke Engine cannot be stopped Engine throttled down strongly Cause Oil level too low 

  

    

 









 

A

Oil level too high

Engine oil level

S

Engine inclination too big

Engine Op. P Instr.

Lubricants W

Fuel quality not corresponding to specification 

Air filter contaminated / turbo-charger defective

Engine Op. W Instr.

Air intake syst. P

Fuel filter contaminated

Fuel filter



Charge-air line leaking

  

1) Contact the CGM HMS GmbH Service

Chapter ref.

Engine oil level

Engine oil of wrong SAE-class



Remedial action Check P Adjust E Replace W Top up A Reduce S Clean R

P/W P



Radiator / cooling fins contaminated

Cooler cleaning R



Cooling fan or water pump defective or loose

Engine Instr.



Cooling air gets too hot / heat buid-up

Op. P/W P



Battery defective or discharged



Cable connections in starter circuit loose or corroded

P



Starter defective or pinion not in mesh

P







   







   



 

Shut-off relay jamming Incorrect valve setting

 

Injection valve defective Combustion engine blocked on output side



 

 PMS malfunction  Celect coding lamp flashing/lit Celect defective (software error)

P

1) Engine Instr.

Injection line leaking

  

Battery

Op. E P

Engine Instr.

Op. P/W 1) 1) 1) 1)

5-29

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Working hydraulics – Fault table Fault

Remedial action

Working and swing functions not operational No boom function No bucket function No backhoe function No stick function Working movements too slow Power loss in working hydraulics Uncontrolled working movements Cause Electronic excavator control not activated/defective

 





  

5-30

1)

Fuel filter contaminated

 

Servo system pump defective  Malfunction of primary / sencondary pressure-relief valves Engine speed too low





1) Contact the CGM HMS GmbH Service Abschnitt Working P 1)

ECO-power switch in 80%-position



P E W A S R

Malfunction of pressure-relief valve

 

Check Adjust Replace Top up Reduce Clean

1) P P Fuel filter

P/W Engine mal- 1) function Hydraulic oil temperatur too high (warning lamp lit, PMS fault indicator Hydraulic oil P/R lamp lit) oil cooler contaminated cooler cleaning Engine coolant temperature too high (warning lamp lit and PMS fault 1) indicator lamp flashing) 1)  Malfunction of solenoid valves 1)  Malfunction of control spool Engine coupling defective Insufficient engine power

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Track drive – Fault table Fault

Remedial action

No forward travel and no reversing travel Maximum travel speed cannot be reached Insufficient traction power







 

     

 







Cause Malfunction of pressure-relief valves

Check Adjust Replace Top up Reduce Clean

P E W A S R

1) Contact the CGM HMS Service Chapter ref.

1)

Servo system pump defective Malfunction of travel valve (pedal) Engine nominal speed too low Malfunction of control spool ECO-power switch in 80%-position Insufficient engine power

1) 1) 1) 1) Travelling P Engine mal- 1) fuction Hydraulic oil temperatur too high (warning lamp lit, PMS fault indi- Hydraulic oil P/R cator lamp lit) oil cooler contaminated cooler cleaning Engine coolant temperature too high (warning lamp lit and PMS 1) fault indicator lamp flashing)

5-31

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Swing mechnism – Fault table Fault

Remedial action

No swing possible No righthand or lefthand swinging Swing performance insufficient Uncontrolled swinging movement

Cause Electronic excavator control not activated / defective

     



 

    

5-32

Limiting switch optional, ramp-type ladder not complete retracted Superstructure holding brake applied Pressure-relief valve adjusted too low level / defective Servo system pump defective Malfunction in feed-pressure circuit of swing pump Malfunction in high-pressure circuit of swing system Malfuction of moment-regulating valve Malfunction in swing pump displacement cylinder Excessive leakage in swing motor

Check Adjust Replace Top up Reduce Clean 1) Contact the CGM HMS Service Chapter ref.

Working

P E W A S R

Operation

P P 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1) 1)

P

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex Central lubricating system – Fault table Fault

Remedial action

Grease pump not working, the BCS does not indicate a warning Automatic circuit breaker on Grease pump not working, pilot lamp lit Grease pump working, no grease delivered Greasing pressure too high or too low

   

Cause Timer defective

  



  

    

Lines between timer and hydraulic motor defective Hydraulikmotor defektive Grease pump defective Grease sieve clogged Distributor defective Grease container empty Grease pump does not suck grease Leaky lines Non-return valve defective Pressure switch defective

Check P Adjust E Replace W Top up A Reduce S Clean R Vent L 1) Contact the CGM HMS GmbH Service Chapter ref.

P/W P/W P/W P/W P/R P/W P/A P/L P/L P/W E

5-33

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

Vibration data

Detailled information can be found in the „„Service Manual““ chapter 8 or contact CGM HMS GmbH Service.

On the condition that the excavator is used within the limits of its designated use, the installation of seats for operators in conformity with ISO 7096 ensures that the weighted vibration accelerations awz (measured in compliance with ISO 2631 Part I) fulfill the requirements with respect to the protection against whole-body vibrations in acc. with EC Vibration Directive 2002/44/EG. The vibrations transferred are indicated in acc. with EC Machine Directive 2006/42/EG, Annex I; Section 3.6.3.1, resp. the "Lärm - und Vibrations-Arbeitsschutzverordnung" of 18.12.2008, Section 4.

The effective value of the weighted acceleration to which the whole-body is exposed, does not exceed 0.5 m/s2.

The measurement uncertainty is ±3% (tolerance of the measuring instruments).

5-34

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex ABBREVIATIONS A abt. acc.

Ah ANSI API approx. bar Bh

Ampere (SI base unit of electric current) about according to Ampere hours (SI base unit of quantity of electricity) American National Standards Institute, Inc. American Petroleum Institute approximately

Incl.

ISO

Including, inclusive of International Standardization Organization

kg kg/dm3

Kilogram (unit of weight), 1 kg = 2.2 lb Kilograms per cubic decimeter (= unit of specific density) Kilometers per hour Kilopascal (unit of pressure), 100kPa = 1bar = 14.5psi KiloNewtons per meter (1 kNm = 1000 Nm) = unit of torque Kilowatt (1 kW = 1.36 hp)

km/h kPa kNm

unit of pressure, 1 bar = 14.5 psi = OH = Operating hour

kW CAMP CE CECE

CEN cm cm3/rev CCW CW

Control and Monitoring Platform Communauté Européenne = European community Committee for european Construction Equipment (Defines a measure for bucket, grab or scoop filling) European Standardization Committee centimeter (= 1/100 m) Cubic centimeters per revolution counterclockwise clockwise

dia.

DIN

Decibel (sound intensity according to measuring method A) Diameter German Industrial Standard

ECM eff. e.g.

ELC etc.

Electronic Control Module on engines effective for example Extended Life Coolant etcetera

Fig. FMI FOPS FS ft

Figure, serial number of illustration Failure Mode Identifier, description malfunctions according to SAE J1939 Falling objects protective structures Rock shovel (working equipment) foot (unit of distance), 1 ft = 0.30 meter

gal GmbH

gallon (unit of volume), 1 gal = 3.78 liters German legal business form

HD HMS Hydr.

Heavy duty Hydraulic Mining Shovels Hydraulic, Hydraulics

i i.e.

IFN

Transmission ratio

dB(A)

id est = that is ISO service rating, blocked

l lb lb/in² LED l/min LpA LwA

Liter (unit of volume), 1 liter = 0.26 gal pound (unit of mass), 1 lb = 0.45 kg Pounds per square inch (= psi) Light-emitting diode Liters per minute Sound pressure at workplace Sound power level of the machine in stationary operation

m MA mA max. min. min-1 mm

Meter (unit of distance), 1 m = 3.28 ft Tightening torque 1 Milliampere (= /1000 A) maximal, maximum minimal, minimum Revolutions per minute Millimeter (=1/1000 m)

N, kN NLGI NLGI– Klasse Nm No.

Newton, kiloNewton (unit of force) National Lubricating Grease Institute (USA) Consistency – lubricant classification acc.

To DIN 51 818 Newtonmeter (unit of torque) Number

OH OMM OW

Operating hour Operation and Maintenance Manual Superstructure

oz

ounce (unit of volume) 1 oz = 0.03 liter

PMS P/No. PS psi PLC

Pump Managing System Part number Metric horsepower (1 PS = 0.74 kW) pund per sqare inch (unit of pressure), 1 psi = 0.069 bar Programmable logic controller

Qty.

Quantity

of

5-35

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex ABBREVIATIONS R, r resp.

RTF ROPS rpm

Radius Respectively Rich Text Format, textbased file format Roll-over protective structures Revolutions per minute (= min-1)

SAE sec./s.

SCA SM SN SPN

Society of Aotomotive Engineers (USA) Second Supplemental Coolant Additive Service Manual CGM HMS GmbH partnumber Suspect Parameter Number, description of malfunctions according to SAE J1939 Width across flats

SW t tm typ.

Metric ton (= 1000 kg) Tons by meters (obsolescent unit of swing torque) Typical

U/min USB

Revolutions per minute Universal Serial Bus, interface for fast data exchange

V VDMA

Volt (unit of electric voltage) Association of German Machinery and Systems Manufacturers

W

Watt (unit of electric power)

°C °F > <

Degrees Celsius (temperature) Degrees Fahrenheit (temperature) greater than less than

5-36

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex PRODUCT SPECIFICATION SHEET

5-37

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex

This page intentionally left blank.

5-38

Cat®

6060/6060 FS Hydraulic Shovel

Specifications Electrical System (diesel drive) System voltage Batteries in series / parallel installation Working spot lights

24 V 6 x 210 Ah - 12 V each 630 Ah - 24 V in total 8 x high brightness Xenon lights

• Battery isolation relays • Emergency stop switches accessible from ground level and in engine module

Hydraulic Oil Cooling Oil flow of cooling pumps

4 x 488 l/min (4 x 129 US gal/min) Diameter of fans 4 x 1 170 mm (4 x 46 in) • Cooling system is fully independent of all main circuits, i.e. controlled cooling capacity is available whenever engine is running • Gear-type cooling pumps supplying high-volume, low-pressure oil to fans and aluminium coolers • Fan speed and flow of oil to the coolers are thermostatically controlled • Extremely high cooling efficiency to ensure optimum oil temperature

Diesel Engines Engine Features Fuel tank capacity 13 000 l (3,435 US gal) • Hydraulically driven radiator fan with electronically controlled fan speed • Microprocessed engine management • Automatic rev. reduction • Heavy-duty air filters, STRATA 1 with automatic dust evacuation

• Two-stage fuel filter incl. water separator • Additional high-capacity water separator • Pre-lube starting system (Cummins engines only) • Eliminator with centrifuge for engine oil filtration (Cummins engines only) Version 1 - Cat® 3512C Tier 2 Make and model Total rated net power ISO

2 x Cat 3512C 3 046/1 2 240 kW (3,000 HP) 1,800 min-1 Total rated net power SAE J1349 2 240 kW (3,000 HP) 1,800 min-1 Total rated gross power SAE J1995 2 240 kW (3,000 HP) 1,800 min-1 No. of cylinders (each engine) 12 Bore 170 mm (6.69 in) Stroke 215 mm (8.46 in) Displacement 58.6 l (3,574 in³) Aspiration Turbocharged and charge air-cooled Max. altitude without deration at 20°C 3 000 m (9,800 ft) a.s.l.

Emission certification US EPA CARB Tier 4i Alternators 2 x 150 A

Hydraulic Shovel—6060/6060 FS

7 955 mm (26 ft 1 in) 7 700 mm (25 ft 3 in)

8 730 mm (26 ft 7 in) 7 000 mm (23 ft)

8 770 mm (28 ft 9 in)

7 600 mm (24 ft 11 in)

6 460 mm (21 ft 3 in)

2 500 mm (8 ft 2 in)

2 790 mm (9 ft 2 in) 1 120 mm (3 ft 8 in) 1 400 mm (4 ft 7 in)

7 090 mm (23 ft 3 in) 9 230 mm (30 ft 3 in)

7 000 mm (23 ft )

Operating Weight

General Data Operating Weight Face Shovel Backhoe

562 tonnes 620 tons 565 tonnes 622 tons

Engine Output SAE J 1995 Cat® 3512C Cummins® QSK45

2 240 kW 3,000 HP 2 240 kW 3,000 HP

Standard Bucket Capacity Face Shovel (SAE 2:1) Backhoe (SAE 1:1)

34.0 m3 34.0 m3

Features • TriPower shovel attachment • Independent oil-cooling system • Spacious walk-through machine house • 5-circuit hydraulic system • Electronic-hydraulic servo control • Board Control System (BCS) • Torque control in closed-loop swing circuit • Automatic central lubrication system • Xenon working light

44.5 yd3 44.5 yd3

Shovel Standard track pads 1 400 mm (4 ft 7 in) Operating weight 562 300 kg (1,247,580 lb) Ground Pressure 25.2 N/cm2 (36.4 psi) Additional track pads available on request Backhoe Standard track pads 1 400 mm (4 ft 7 in) Operating weight 564 500 kg (1,244,500 lb) Ground Pressure 25.3 N/cm2 (36.6 psi) Additional track pads available on request

Hydraulic Shovel—6060/6060 FS Version 2 - Cummins® QSK45 Tier 1 Make and model 2 x Cummins QSK45 Total rated net power ISO 3 046/1 2 240 kW (3 000 HP) 1,800 min-1 Total rated net power SAE J1349 2 240 kW (3,000 HP) 1 800 min-1 Total rated gross power SAE J1995 2 240 kW (3,000 HP) 1 800 min-1 No. of cylinders (each engine) 12 Bore 159 mm (6.25 in) Stroke 190 mm (7.48 in) Displacement 45 l (2,746 in³) Aspiration Turbocharged and aftercooled Max. altitude without deration 4 267 m (14,000 ft) a.s.l.

Alternators 2 x 175 A

Hydraulic System with Pump Managing System Main pumps 4 x swash plate double pumps Max. oil flow 4 x 1 300 l/min

(4 x 343 US gal/min) Max. pressure, attachment 32 MPa = 320 bar (4,640 psi) Max. pressure, travel 37 MPa = 370 bar (5,370 psi) Swing pumps 4 x reversible swash plate pumps Max. oil flow 4 x 352 l/min (4 x 93 US gal/min) Max. pressure, swing system 32 MPa = 320 bar (4,640 psi) Total volume of hydraulic oil approx. 9 400 l (2,483 US gal) Hydraulic tank capacity approx. 7 100 l (1,876 US gal) • Pump Managing System contains: • Electronic load limit control - Flow on demand from main pumps depending on joystick position - Automatic regulation of main pumps to zero flow without demand - Automatic rpm reduction of engine speed during working breaks - Reduced oil flow of main pumps at high hydraulic oil temperature or engine temperature • Pressure cut-off for main pumps • Cooling of pump transmission gear oil • Filters: - Full-flow high-pressure filters (100 μm) for the main pumps, installed directly behind each pump - High pressure filters (200 μm) for the closed swing circuit - Full-flow filters (10 μm) for the complete return circuit - Pressure filters (40 μm and 6 μm) for servo circuit - Pressure filters (40 μm) for the feed pumps of the closed swing circuit - Transmission oil filters (40 μm)

Undercarriage Travel speeds 1st stage Max. 1.4 km/h (0.87 mph) (2 stage) 2nd stage Max. 2.0 km/h (1.24 mph) Max. tractive force 2 956 kN (301 t = 664,300 lb) Gradability of travel drives Max. 52 % Track pads (each side) 42 Bottom rollers (each side) 7 Support rollers (each side) 2 plus a skid plate in between Travel drives (each side) 1 planetary transmission with 2 two-stage axial piston motors Parking brakes Wet multiple-disc brake, spring applied/ hydraulically released • Cast double-grouser combined pad links with bushings connected by hardened full floating pins • All running surfaces of sprockets, idlers, rollers and pad links, as well as teeth contact areas of sprocket and pad links, are hardened • Fully hydraulic, self-adjusting track tensioning system with membrane accumulator • Automatic hydraulic retarder valve to prevent over-speed on downhill travel • Acoustic travel alarm

Operator’s Cab Operator’s eye level approx. 7.6 m (24 ft 11 in) Internal dimensions cab Length 2 200 mm (7 ft 3 in) Width 1 600 mm (5 ft 3 in) Height 2 150 mm (7 ft 1 in) • Pneumatically cushioned and multi-adjustable comfort seat with lumbar support, safety belt, head and armrests • Switch in seat cushion to automatically neutralize the hydraulic controls when operator leaves the seat • Joystick controls integrated in independently adjustable seat consoles • Fold-away auxiliary seat with safety belt • FOPS (rock guard; approved acc. to DIN ISO 3449) integrated into cab structure • All-round safety glass, armored windshield and sliding side window • Windshield with parallel intermittent wiper/washer • Roller blind at windshield • Robust instrument panel incl. large colored BCS screen with transflective technology • Board Control System (BCS) electronic monitoring and data logging system for vital signs and service data of engines, hydraulic system and lubrication system • Machine access via retractable boarding ladder, hydraulically operated • Sliding emergency ladder (kick-down type) with ladder cage

Hydraulic Shovel—6060/6060 FS Swing System Swing Drives

4 compact planetary transmissions with axial piston motors Parking Brakes Wet multiple disc brake, spring loaded / hydraulically released Max. swing speed 3.8 rpm Swing ring Triple-race roller bearing with sealed internal gearing • Closed-loop swing circuit with torque control • Hydraulic braking of the swing motion by counteracting control • All raceways of swing ring, as well as grease bath for internal gearing, supplied by automatic central lubrication system

Automatic Lubrication System Capacity of grease container 1 000 l (264 US gal) • Dual-circuit system with hydraulically driven heavy-duty pump and electronic time relay control to adjust the pause/ lube times • Connected to the lubrication system are the swing roller bearing with internal gearing and all pivot points of attachment, bucket and cylinders • System failures displayed by Board Control System • Grease filters (200 μm) between service station and container as well as directly behind grease pump

Retractable Service Station Retractable service station installed underneath the engine module and easily accessible from ground.

Equipped with: • Quick couplings for: - Diesel fuel - Engine coolant - left / right - Pump transmission gear oil - left / right - Engine oil (oil pan) - left / right - Engine oil (additional tank - optional) - left / right - Hydraulic oil tank - Grease container • Cat jump-start socket • Indicator lights for fuel tanks left / right full and grease container full

Attachments • Booms and sticks are torsion-resistant, welded box design of high-tensile steel with massive steel castings at pivot areas • Welding procedures allow for internal counter-welding (double prep weld) wherever possible • Booms and sticks are stress-relieved after welding • Catwalks with rails at booms • Inspection holes in booms (FS & BH) and stick (FS only) • Pressure-free lowering of boom (FS and BH) and stick (FS) by means of a float valve • Shovel attachment with unique TriPower kinematics ensuring the following main features: - Horizontal automatic constant-angle bucket guidance - Vertical automatic constant-angle bucket guidance - Automatic roll-back limiter to prevent material spillage - Kinematic assistance to hydraulic forces - Constant boom momentum throughout the entire lift arc - Crowd force assistance • All buckets (FS and BH) are equipped with a universal wear package suitable for all standard applications, which consists of: - Special liner material covering main wear areas inside and outside of bucket - Lip shrouds between teeth - Wing shrouds on side walls - Heel shrouds at bottom edges • Special wear packages for highly abrasive materials on request

Hydraulic Shovel—6060/6060 FS TriPower Face Shovel Attachment (FS) Working Diagram - Boom 8.0 m (26 ft 2 in) - Stick 5.1 m (16 ft 9 in) ft 50

45

m 16 15 14 13

40

35

12 11 10

30

25

9 8 7

20

15

240 sht

6 5 4

10

3 2

5 1 0

0 1

5

10

2 3 18

17

60

55

16

15 50

Working Range Max. digging height Max. digging reach Max. digging depth Max. dumping height Crowd distance on level

14 45

13

12 40

15.5 m 16.4 m 2.7 m 11.6 m 5.5 m

Face Shovels Type Iron ore shovel Tooth system ESCO S130 Capacity SAE / PCSA 1:1 24.5 m3 (32.0 yd3) Capacity SAE / CECE 2:1 21.0 m3 (27.5 yd3) Total width 4 800 mm (15 ft 9 in) Inner width 4 300 mm (14 ft 1 in) Opening width 2 600 mm (8 ft 6 in) No. of teeth 6 Weight incl. wear kit 44 900 kg (98,990 lb) Max. material density (loose) 3.0 t/m3 (5,060 lb/yd3)

11

10 35

9

8

30

7 25

50 ft 10 in 53 ft 10 in 8 ft 10 in 38 ft 1 in 18 ft 1 in

6 20

5

4 15

3

2

10

1 5

Digging Forces Max. crowd force Max. crowd force at ground level Max. breakout force

0

m

0

ft

2 240 kN 503,400 lb 2 100 kN 471,930 lb 1 640 kN 368,560 lb

Iron ore shovel ESCO S130

Heavy rock shovel ESCO S130

Heavy rock shovel ESCO S130

Standard rock shovel ESCO S130

26.5 m3 (34.7 yd3)

32.5 m3 (42.5 yd3)

36.0 m3 (47.1 yd3)

39.5 m3 (51.7 yd3)

23.0 m3 (30.1 yd3) 4 800 mm (15 ft 9 in) 4 300 mm (14 ft 1 in) 2 600 mm (8 ft 6 in) 6

28.0 m3 (36.6 yd3) 4 800 mm (15 ft 9 in) 4 300 mm (14 ft 1 in) 2 600 mm (8 ft 6 in) 6

31.0 m3 (40.5 yd3) 5 600 mm (18 ft 4 in) 5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in) 2 600 mm (8 ft 6 in) 6

34.0 m3 (44.5 yd3) 5 600 mm (18 ft 4 in) 5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in) 2 600 mm (8 ft 6 in) 6

44 300 kg (97,660 lb)

46 200 kg (100,530 lb)

50 100 kg (110,450 lb) 50 300 kg (110,450 lb)

2.6 t/m3 (4,380 lb/yd3)

2.2 t/m3 (3,710 lb/yd3)

2.0 t/m3 (3,370 lb/yd3) 1.8 t/m3 (3,030 lb/yd3)

Hydraulic Shovel—6060/6060 FS Backhoe Attachment (BH) Working Diagram - Boom 10.5 m (34 ft 5 in) - Stick 5.0 m (16 ft 5 in) ft 65

m 20 19

60 55

18 17 16

50 45

15 14 13

40 35

12 11 10

30 25

9 8 7

20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20

6 5 4 3 240 sht

2 1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

25 30

8 9 10

35

11

22

21

20

70

65

Working Range Max. digging depth Max. digging reach Max. digging height

19

18 60

17

16

55

8.9 m 18.9 m 15.9 m

Backhoes Type Tooth system Capacity SAE 1:1 Capacity CECE 2:1 Capacity struck Total width Inner width No. of teeth Weight incl. universal wear kit Max. material density (loose)

15

14

50

45

13

12

11

40

35

29 ft 2 in 62 ft 52 ft 2 in

10

9 30

8

7 25

6 20

5

4 15

3 10

2

1 5

0

m

0

ft

Digging Forces Max. crowd force Max. breakout force

1 270 kN 285,410 lb 1 240 kN 278,670 lb

Heavy rock bucket ESCO S110 28.0 m³ (36.6 yd³) 24.6 m³ (32.3 yd³) 21.2 m³ (27.7 yd³) 4 440 mm (14 ft 7 in) 4 040 mm (13 ft 3 in) 6 31 600 kg (69,670 lb) 2.2 t/m³ (3,710 lb/yd³)

Standard rock bucket ESCO S110 34.0 m³ (44.5 yd³) 30.3 m³ (39.6 yd³) 26.5 m³ (34.7 yd³) 4 700 mm (15 ft 5 in) 4 300 mm (14 ft 1 in) 6 34 400 kg (75,180 lb) 1.8 t/m³ (3.030 lb/yd³)

Hydraulic Shovel—6060/6060 FS Gross weight 4 7 900 kg (105,600 lb) 2 100 mm (6 ft 11 in)

9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in)

6 tracks consisting of 14 pad links; each Width 1 400 mm (4 ft 7 in) Gross weight (each) 1 1 500 kg (25,350 lb)

2 100 mmmm 2 100 (6 ft(611ft in) 11 in)

9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in) 9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in)

6 900 mm (22 ft 8 in)

330 mm (1 ft 1 in)

9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in) 9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in)

330 mm (1 ft 1 in)

6 900 mm (22 ft 8 in)

6 750

330 mm (1 ft 1 in)

6 900 mm (22 ft 8 in)

Gross weight 63 400 kg (139,770 lb)

10 500 mm (34 ft 5 in) 10 500 mm (34 ft 5 in)

10 500 mm (34 ft 5 in)

3 700 mm (12 ft 2mm in) (12 ft 2 in) 3 700

3 700 mm (12 ft 2 in)

3 3700 700mm mm(12(12ft ft2 in) 2 in)

Gross weight 7 500 kg (16,530 lb)

4 4 200 mm (13 4 200 mm (13 ft

10 500 mm (34 ft 5 in) 10 500 mm (34 ft 5 in)

Cab pedestal module Width 2 700 mm (8 ft 10 in)

6 750 mm (22 ft 2 i 6 750 mm (22 ft 2 in)

3 450 mm 3(11 ft 4mm in) (11 ft 4 in) 450

Superstructure center frame Width 3 600 mm (11 ft 10 in)

3 450 mm (11(11 ft 4ftin) 3 450 mm 4 in)

6 900 mm (22 ft 8 in) 6 900 mm (22 ft 8 in)

3 450 mm (11 ft 4 in)

330 mm (1 ft 1 in) 330 mm (1 ft 1 in)

3 720 mm (12 ft 2 in)

3 720 mm (12 ft 2 in)

4 000 m

4 000 mm (13 ft 1 in 4 000 mm (13 ft 1 in)

3 500 mm (11 ft 6 in)

3in)500 mm (11 ft 6 in) 500 mm mm (11 (11 ftft 66 in) 33 500

2 250 mm (7 ft 5 in)

2 100 mm (6 ft 11 in)

3 500 mm (11 ft 6 in)

Undercarriage center frame with swing roller bearing Width 3 800 mm (12 ft 6 in)9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in)Gross weight 42 300 kg (93,250 lb) 6 750 mm (22 ft 2 in) 330 mm (1 ft 1 in)

3 820 mm (12 ft 6 in)

3 450 mm (11 ft 4 in)

6 900 mm (22 ft 8 in)

Above values are approximate. Details may vary depending on scope of supply and destination.

Exact data subject to selected machine configuration and final packing list.

10 500 mm (34 ft 5 in)

4 200 mm (13 ft 9 in)

1 750 mm (5 ft 9 in)

11750 750mm mm(5(5ftft99in)in)

Gross weight 3 500 kg (7,720 lb)

3 070 mm (10 ft 1 mm in) (10 ft 1 in) 3 070

33070 070 mm mm(10 (10ftft11in)in)

Crate with cabin and FOPS Width 2 610 mm (8 ft 7 in)

3 070 mm (10 ft 1 in)

3 720 mm (12 ft 2 in) 3 720 mm (12 ft 23in) 720 mm (12 ft 2 in)

mm (5 ft 9 in) 1 750 mm (51 ft750 9 in)

Crawler side frame (2 units) Width 2 100 mm (6 ft 0 in)

2 100 mm2 100 mm (6 ft 11 in)(6 ft 11 in)

General Packing List

1 580 mm (5 ft 2 580mm mm(5(5ftft2 2in)in) 11580

330 mm (1 ft 1 in) 6 900 mm (22 ft 8 in)

750ftmm 6 750 mm6(22 2 in)(22 ft 2 in)

330 mm (1330 ft 1mm in) (1 ft 1 in)

Hydraulic Shovel—6060/6060 FS

200ftmm 4 200 mm4(13 9 in)(13 ft 9 in)

Gross weight 10 100 kg (22,270 lb)

4 000 mm (13 ft 1 in)

000ftmm 4 000 mm4(13 1 in)(13 ft 1 in)

720ftmm 3 720 mm3(12 2 in)(12 ft 2 in)

2 700 mm (8 ft 10 in)

2 700 mm (8 ft 10 in) 2 700 mm (8 ft 10 in)

1 550 mm (5 ft 1 in)

1 550 mm (5 ft 1 in)

Height

Height Height

1 580 mm1(5580 ft 2mm in) (5 ft 2 in) 1 550 mm1(5550 ft 1mm in) (5 ft 1 in)

1 580 mm (5 ft 2 in)

3 500 mm (11 ft 6 in)

1 580 mm (5 ft 2 in)

2 700 mm (8 ft 10 in)

500ftmm 3 500 mm3(11 6 in)(11 ft 6 in)

1 750 mm (5 ft 9 in)

Gross weight 36 000 kg (79,370 lb) 18 400 kg (40,560 lb)

1 750 mm (5 ft 9 in)

3 070 mm (10 ft 1 in)

3 070 mm (10 ft 1 in) 3 070 mm (10 ft 1 in)

Width 7 000 mm (23 ft) 7 0003 500 mm mm(23 (11 ft 6ft) in)

3 070 mm (10 ft 1 in)

Counterweight

1 750 mm (5 ft 9 in) 1 750 mm (5 ft 9 in)

4 000 mm (13 ft 1 in)

3 720 mm (12 ft 2 in)

Lower part Upper Part

3 750 mm (12 ft 4 in)

3 750 mm (12 ft 4 in)

3 700 mm (12 ft 2 in)

3 700 mm (12 ft 2 in) 3 700 mm (12 ft 2 in)

3 700 mm (12 ft 2 in)

10(34 500ftmm 10 500 mm 5 in)(34 ft 5 in)

3 720 mm (12 ft 2 in)

3 820 mm (12 ft 6 in)

4 200 mm (13 ft 9 in) 4 200 mm (13 ft 9 in)

10 500 mm (34 ft 5 in)

Oil cooler module Width 2 000 mm (6 ft 7 in)

3 820 mm (12 ft 6 in) 3 820 mm (12 ft 6 in)

55 000 kg (121,250 lb) 54 600 kg (120,370 lb)

3 750 mm (12 ft 4 in) 3 750 mm (12 ft 4 in)

10 500 mm (34 ft 5 in)

3 820 mm (12 ft 6 in)

Engine module with diesel engines Width 7 000 mm (23 ft) Gross weight 3512C Gross weight QSK45

3 450 mm (11 ft 4 in)

General Packing List

3 450 mm (11 ft 4 in) 3 450 mm (11 ft 4 in)

3 450 mm (11 ft 4 in)

900ftmm 6 900 mm6(22 8 in)(22 ft 8 in)

Length Length

Height

Length

Crates Content

Length

Length

Width

Height

Gross Weight

Two radiators with fan

3 000 mm (9 ft 10 in)

1 950 mm (6 ft 7 in)

1 670 mm (5 ft 6 in)

2 460 kg (5,420 lb)

Swing ring cover

2 200 mm (7 ft 3 in)

1 300 mm (4 ft 3 in)

1 030 mm (3 ft 5 in)

390 kg (860 lb)

Four swing gear

Bolts, tools, accessories, etc.

Catwalks and other parts

Grease container with pump Air filters, mufflers

1 350 mm (4 ft 5 in)

3 300 mm (10 ft 10 in)

4 960 mm (16 ft 3 in) 1 700 mm (5 ft 7 in)

3 600 mm (11 ft 10 in)

1 350 mm (4 ft 5 in) 1 600 mm (5 ft 3 in) 1 900 mm (6 ft 3 in)

1 900 mm (6 ft 3 in) 1 260 mm (4 ft 2 in)

1 770 mm (5 ft 10 in)

2 100 mm (6 ft 11 in)

1 050 kg (2,310 lb) 740 kg (2,510 lb)

1 750 mm (5 ft 9 in)

1 780 mm (5 ft 10 in)

5 570 mm (18 ft 3 in)

1 100 mm (3 ft 7 in)

1 660 mm (5 ft 5 in)

Barrels (hydraulic oil)

2 500 mm (8 ft 2 in)

1 300 mm (4 ft 3 in)

1 270 mm (4 ft 2 in)

Barrels (engine oil; antifreeze; grease)

5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in) 2 500 mm (8 ft 2 in)

3 500 kg (7,720 lb)

3 400 kg (7,500 lb)

1 300 mm (4 ft 3 in)

Retractable ladder (on pallet) Emergency ladder (on pallet)

5 340 kg (11,770 lb)

900 mm (2 ft 11 in)

1 300 mm (4 ft 3 in)

Above values are approximate. Details may vary depending on scope of supply and destination.

Exact data subject to selected machine configuration and final packing list.

1 620 kg (3,570 lb)

2 090 mm (6 ft 10 in)

500 kg (1,100 lb)

1 270 mm (4 ft 2 in)

1 700 kg (3,750 lb)

1 900 kg (4,190 lb)

Hydraulic Shovel—6060/6060 FS

3 200 mm (10 ft 6 in)

3 200 mm (10 ft 6 in)

Boom with TriPower linkages and rods Width 3 050 mm (10 ft) Gross weight 40 000 kg (88,180 lb)

3 200 mm (10 ft 6 in)

TriPower Shovel Attachment

9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in) 9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in)

4 070 mm (13 ft 4 in)

4 070 mm (13 ft 4 in)

Face shovel incl. pin for stick Capacity (2:1) Width Gross Weight 3 3 34.0m (44.5 yd ) 5 700 mm (18 ft 8 in) 51 600 kg (113,760 lb)

4 070 mm (13 ft 4 in)

9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in)

4 700 mm (15 ft 5 in) 4 700 mm (15 ft 5 in) 4 700 mm (15 ft 5 in)

800 mm (2 ft 7 in) 800 mm (2 ft 7 in) 5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in) 5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in)

2 Bundles with 1 boom cylinder each Width 500 mm (1 ft 8 in) Gross weight 4 140 kg (9,130 lb)

2 350 mm (7 ft 9 in)

3 200 mm ft 6mm in) 3(10 200 (10 ft 6 in)

3 200 mm (10 ft 6 in)

11 500 mm (37 ft 9 in) 11 500 mm (37 ft 9 in) 6 100 mmmm (20 (20 ft) ft) 6 100

3 200 (10 ft 6 in)

2 350 mm ft 9mm in) 2(7350 (7 ft 9 in) 3 200 (10 ft 6 in)

3 200 (10 ft 6 in)

5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in)

Stick Width 2 300 mm (7 ft 7 in) Gross weight 16 300 kg (35,930 lb) 9 000 mmmm (29 (29 ft 6 ftin)6 in) 9 000

4 550 m

800 mm (2 ft 7 in)

7 25

11 500 mm (37 ft 9 in) 9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in)

Height

Length Length 4 750 mm (15 ft 7 in) 4 750 mm (15 ft 7 in)

3 850 mm (12 ft 8 in)

3 850 mm (12 ft 8 in)

4 070 mm (13 ft 4 in)

4 070 mm (13 ft 4 in) 4 070 mm (13 ft 4 in)

Crates with value block, catwalks, railings and other parts Length Width Height Gross weight 4 000 mm 2 250 mm 1 950 mm 6 000 kg (13 ft 1 in) (7 ft 5 in) (6 ft 5 in) (13,230 lb) 4 270 mm 1 900 mm 1 700 mm 3 260 kg (14 ft) (6 ft 3 in) (5 ft 47700 in) (7,190 lb) mmmm (15 (15 ft 5 ftin)5 in) 4 700

Height Height 3 850 mm (12 ft 8 in)

6 100 mm (20 ft)

Length 4 750 mm (15 ft 7 in) 4 700 mm (15 ft 5 in) 850 mm (2 ft 9 in) 850 mm800 (2 800 ftmm 9 in) (2 ft(27 ftin)7 in) mm

800800 mmmm (2 ft(27 ftin)7 in) 6 250 mm (20 ft 6 in) 6 250 mm (20 ft 46 550 in)4 550 mmmm (14 (14 ft 11ft in) 11 in)

5 100 mmmm (16 (16 ft 9 ftin)9 in) 5 100 800 mm (2ea. ft 7 in) 2 Bundles with 2 stick cylinders and 2 bucket cylinders Width 1 200 mm (3 ft 11 in) Gross weight 5 200 kg (11,460 lb) 5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in)

800 mm (2 ft 7 in) 6 250 mm (20 ft 6 in)

200 (10 ft 6 in)

7 250 mmmm (23 (23 ft 9 ftin)9 in) 7 250

50 mm (9 ft 4 in)

2 850 mm (9 ft 4 in) 2 850 mm (9 ft 4 in)

3 200 (10 ft 6 in) 3 200 (10 ft 6 in)

4 550 mm (14 ft 11 in)

Above values are approximate. Details may vary depending on scope of supply and destination.

Exact data subject to selected machine configuration and final packing list.

11 500 mmmm (37 (37 ft 9 ftin)9 in) 11 500

850 mm (2 ft 9 in)

5 200 m

5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in)

Hydraulic Shovel—6060/6060 FS

45

4 700 mm (15 ft 5 in)

800 mm (2 ft 7 in) 5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in)

4 550 mm (14 ft 11 in)

Backhoe Attachment

800 mm (2 ft 7 in) 5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in)

3 200 (10 ft 6 in)

4 55

3 200 mm (10 ft 6 in)

3 200 (10 ft 6(7 in)ft 9 in)

2 350 mm

Monoboom with main valve block Width 5 000 mm (16 ft 5 in) Gross weight 42 800 kg (94,360 lb)

7 3 200 (10 ft 6 in)

500mm mm(20 (37 ft 611 100 ft)9 in)

9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in)

Backhoe bucket incl. pins for stick and linkage Capacity (2:1) Width Gross Weight 3 3 34m (44.5 yd ) 4 750 mm (15 ft 7 in) 36 000 kg (79,370 lb) 9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in)

Height

4 750 mm (15 ft 7 in)

4 750 mm (15 ft 7 in) 6 100 mm (20 ft) Length 850 mm (2 ft 9 in)

9 000 mm (29 ft 6 in)

4 700 mm (15 ft 5 in)

800 mm (2 ft 7 in)

2 pallets with 1 boom cylinder each (16 ft 9 in) Width 800 mm (2 ft 7 in)5 100 mmGross weight 6 700 kg (14,770 lb)800 mm (2 ft 7 in)

5 200 mm (17 ft 1 in)

850 mm (2 ft 9 in)

4 070 mm (13 ft 4 in)

4 550 mm (14 ft 11 in) Height

6 250 mm (20 ft 6 in)

800 mm (2 ft 7 in)

Length

7 250 mm (23 ft 9 in)

11 500 mm (37 ft 9 in)

2 850 mm (9 ft 4 in)

3 200 (10 ft 6 in)

Height

3 850 mm (12 ft 8 in)

7 250 mm (23 ft 9 in)

Length 850 mm (2 ft 9 in) 5 200 mm (17 ft 1 in)

930 mm (3 ft 1 in)

Length

930 mm (3 ft 1 in)

850 mm (2 ft 9 in)

2 pallets with 1 stick cylinder each 850 mm (2 ft 9 in) Width 800 mm (2 ft 7 in) Gross weight 4 200 kg (9,260 lb) 6 250 mm (20 ft 6 in)

Height

3 850 mm (12 ft 8 in)

Length

4 750 mm (15 ft 7 in)

6 250 mm (20 ft 6 in)

Height

7 250 mm (23 ft 9 in)

3 850 mm (12 ft 8 in)

6 250 mm (20 ft 6 in)

2 850 mm (9 ft 4 in)

800 mm (2 ft 7 in) 4 550 mm (14 ft 11 in)

11 500 mm (37 ft 9 in)

Crates with value block, catwalks, railings and other parts 11 500 mm (37 ft 9 in) Length Width Height Gross weight 4 900 mm 2 400 mm 2 130 mm 5 9004 750kgmm (15 ft 7 in) (16 ft 1 in) (7 ft 10 in) (7 ft) (13,010 lb) 4 270 mm 1 900 mm 1 700 mm 3 100 kg (15 ft 7 in) (14 ft) (6 ft 3 in) (54 750 ft mm 7 in) (6,830 lb)

2 850 mm (9 ft 4 in)

3 200 (10 ft 6 in)

3 200 (10 ft 6 in)

4 700 mm (15 ft 5 in)

800 mm (2 ft 7 in)

5 20

800 mm (2 ft 7 in)

4 550 mm (14 ft 11 in)

Stick with linkage and bucket cylinder 5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in) Width 2 359 mm (7 ft 9 in) Gross weight 28 800 kg (65,490 lb)

Length

850 mm (2 ft 9 in)

6 250 mm (20 ft 6 in)

6 250 mm (20 ft 6 in)

5 100 mm (16 ft 9 in)

Height

2 350 mm (7 ft 9 in)

4 700 mm (15 ft 5 in)

Length

4 750 mm (15 ft 7 in)

4 070 mm (13 ft 4 in)

3 200 mm (10 ft 6 in)

6 100 mm (20 ft)

7

3 850 mm (12 ft 8 in)

3 850 mm (12 ft 8 in)

4 070 mm (13 ft 4 in)

11 500 mm (37 ft 9 in)

7 250 mm (23 ft 9 in)

2 350 mm 3 850 mm (12 ft 8 in) (7 ft 9 in)

3 200 mm (10 ft 6 in)

11 500 mm (37 ft 9 in)

5 200 mm (17 ft 1 in)

Above values are approximate. Details may vary depending on scope of supply and destination.

Exact data subject to selected machine configuration and final packing list.

930 mm (3 ft 1 in) 5 200 mm (17 ft 1 in)

5 200

Hydraulic Shovel—6060/6060 FS Component Accessibility on Superstructure 1. Diesel Engines 4. Oil coolers 2. Gearboxes with hydraulic pumps 5. Hydraulic tank 3. Engine radiators with hydraulically driven fan 6. Swing drives

7. Rotary distributor 8. Travel valves 9. Switch cabinet and battery box

10. Operator’s seat 11. BCS tower 12. Auxilliary seat

Optional Equipment General

Cab

• Export crating • Finishing as per end user’s corporate colors • Customizing of logos as per customer’s specification

• Various heating and air-conditioning systems • Roller blinds at all windows • Rear windscreen wiper • Additional instrumentation

Superstructure • Hydraulic service crane on superstructure with auxilliary engine • Mesabi radiators instead of standard radiators • Oil change interval extension for engine oil up to 1.000 hrs (Cummins engines only) • Folding access stairway, stairway angle approx. 45° • Round container with a standard 200 l grease barrel (instead of 1 000 l grease container) • Lubricated pinion for greasing of internal gearing of swing ring • Various cold-weather packages

Additional optional equipment available on request

Undercarriage • Track pad width 1 600 mm (5 ft 3 in) or 1 800 mm (5 ft 11 in) • Automatic lubrication of rollers by central lube system • Cover plate under carbody (belly plate)

Attachment • Guards for shovel cylinders of FS-attachment • Xenon lighting on boom • Special wear packages

Hydraulic Shovel—6060/6060 FS

For more complete information on Cat products, dealer services, and industry solutions, visit us on the web at mining.cat.com and www.cat.com © 2012 Caterpillar Inc. All rights reserved CAT, CATERPILLAR, their respective logos, “Caterpillar Yellow” and the “Power Edge” trade dress, as well as corporate and product identity used herein, are trademarks of Caterpillar and may not be used without permission.

AEHQ6526-01

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex NOTES .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. .............................................................................................................................................................................. ..............................................................................................................................................................................

5-39

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Annex

This page intentionally left blank.

5-40

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Index 6 INDEX Operation and Maintenance Manual

Target group

Part 1 INTRODUCTION FUNDAMENTAL SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 2 OPERATION

Operating personnel The operating personnel must have knowhow relevant to the operation and the application of this or comparable machines.

Part 3 INSPECTION AND SERVICING Part 4 REPAIR WORK

Inspection and servicing personnel The inspection and servicing personnel must have know-how relevant to the inspection and servicing of this or comparable machines.

Repair personnel The repair personnel must have know-how and experience relevant to the repair of this or comparable machines.

Part 5 ANNEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

Part 6 INDEX

Operating personnel + Inspection and servicing personnel + Repair personnel

6-1

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Index

This page intentionally left blank.

6-2

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Index

A ABBREVIATIONS...................................... 5-35 About this Operation and Maintenance Manual1-1 Access ladder lighting................................ 2-18 Activating the electronic excavator control 2-91 After daily operation................................... 2-95 Air conditioner (optional)............................ 2-77 Air-intake lines ........................................... 3-58 AIR-INTAKE SYSTEM............................... 3-55 Alternator - Instructions ............................. 3-65 Appropriate disposal of batteries ............... 4-14 ASSEMBLING WORKING EQUIPMENT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS ..................... 2-96 Automatic fire-extinguishing system .......... 2-30 Automatic fire-extinguishing system (optional2-31 Automatic reset to idling .............................. 2-9 Avoid mixing of different hydraulic fluids3-29, 3-88

B Back-up heating (option), filling in fuel ...... 2-65 Back-up heating (optional)......................... 2-79 Back-up heating operator’s cab (optional). 2-78 Selection and qualification of personnel...... 1-7 Battery isolator switch, shutting off supply voltage2-26 Battery storage ........................................ 3-135 Battery, checking the state of charge ........ 3-69 Battery, removing and installing ................ 3-70 BCS III, interfaces...................................... 5-23 BCS III, what’s that? .................................... 5-3 BCSIII, cleaning ......................................... 5-27 BCSIII, disposal ......................................... 5-27 BCSIII, the start screen ............................... 5-5 Bearing flushing for main pumps, replace filter3-87 Bearing races........................................... 3-120 Before starting work................................... 2-91 Board-control-system .................................. 5-3 Board-Control-System (BCS) ...................... 2-9 Braking the superstructure ........................ 2-92 Breather filter fuel tanks, replace............... 3-60 Breather filter grease container, check / replace3-124 Bypass valves, clean / replace .................. 3-81

Checking the greasing pressure ..............3-125 Checking the hydraulic oil level..................3-75 Cleaning the fuel tanks...............................3-61 Cleaning the hydraulic oil cooler ................3-93 Code table screen ......................................5-21 Cold-starting fluid (ether) – Replacing the pressure vessel......................................................3-47 Combustion engine - Fault table ................5-29 confined spaces - Safety instructions ..........4-4 Control and Monitoring Platform (CAMP) ....2-8 Controls adjustment data screen ...............5-15 Coolant for use on all combustion engines 3-36 Cooling liquid, change................................3-52 COOLING SYSTEM ...................................3-48 Cooling-liquid level check...........................3-49 Corrosion protection for pins and bearings (bushings and hubs) ........................................2-98 CRAWLER TRACKS................................3-116

D Demand control / Zero-flow regulation.........2-9 Depressurizing the hydraulic system .........3-74 DESCRIPTION OF THE EXCAVATOR .......2-6 Design ......................................................3-122 Designated use .................................... 1-3, 1-4 Dismantling and removal instructions ........4-12 Disposal at the end of the service life ........4-12 Disposing of the machine without polluting the environment ............................................4-13 Drive unit ......................................................2-8 Dust trap, cleaning .....................................3-55

E

Electrical circuit diagrams ..........................3-65 Electrical system ..........................................2-9 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM .............................3-65 Electrical system - Safety instructions .......3-65 Electrical system switch-cabinets ..............3-65 Electronic excavator controls, clean / lubricate3-94 Emergency exit in operator’s cab and escape ladder...........................................................2-21 Emergency lowering of the working equipment2-94 Emergency off switch .................................2-68 Emergency shut-off function ......................2-24 C Emergency Stop, reset function ...................5-9 CENTRAL LUBRICATING system .......... 3-122 Engine ......................................................3-128 Central lubricating system – Fault table .... 5-33 ENGINE......................................................3-38 Changing the engine oil............................. 3-41 Engine - Safety instructions .......................3-38 Changing the gearbox oil........................... 3-98 Engine 1 (LH), control and monitoring .......2-43 Changing the hydraulic oil ......................... 3-88 Engine 2 (RH), control and monitoring.......2-45 Changing the swing gearbox oil .............. 3-103 Engine data screen ....................................5-12 Charging batteries inside the machine, safety inEngine oil reservoir, checking the oil level .3-40 structions................................................ 3-71 Engine oil reservoir, filling in /draining off the oil3-43 Checking the engine oil level / Topping up 3-39 Engines – adjusting the speed ...................2-75 Checking the gas charging pressure in the presEngines, emergency shut-off .....................2-73 sure accumulator ...................... 3-119, 3-132 Entering and leaving the machine, Safety instrucChecking the gearbox oil level / Topping up with oil3-96 tions ........................................................2-18 3

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Index Excavator layout .......................................... 2-7 Extract from the German regulations ...... 3-132

F FAULT TABLES......................................... 5-29 Filling ....................................................... 3-124 Filling quantities - Grease.......................... 3-25 Filling quantities - oil .................................. 3-28 Filling quantities - other ............................. 3-28 Filters (pilot control circuit), replace........... 3-83 Filters for swing circuits, replace ............... 3-86 Filters for swing pump charge circuit, replace3-85 Fire and explosion hazard .................. 1-11, 2-5 Folding ladder (optional)............................ 2-20 FUEL SYSTEM.......................................... 3-59 Fuel system - Safety instructions............... 3-59 Fuel tank supply valve – function .............. 3-59 Function ................................................... 3-123 Further hazardous substances.................. 4-13 Further machine documentation.................. 1-1

G Gas, dust, steam and smoke....................... 1-9 Gearbox venting ...................................... 3-102 Grease filter replace (filling the grease container)3-127 Grease filter replace (Grease lines) ........ 3-127 Grease for bearings, slew rings and track system (Central lubrication system) ................... 3-34 Grease for idlers, track rollers and support rollers (Lifetime lubrication)............................... 3-35

H Harness (optional) ..................................... 2-32 Heating and air conditioning .................... 3-129 Hose line for oil and cooling liquid changes3-37 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ............ 5-34 Hydraulic data screen................................ 5-13 Hydraulic equipment.................................. 1-10 Hydraulic hoses – Instructions .................... 4-7 Hydraulic LADDER .................................. 3-131 Hydraulic oil filters for working hydraulics, replace3-84 Hydraulic oil return-flow filters, replace ..... 3-77 Hydraulic oil return-flow filters, replace (from machine no. 340173) .................................. 3-79 Hydraulic oil tank breather filters, replace . 3-82 Hydraulic system ......................................... 2-8 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM .............................. 3-74 HYDRAULIC SYSTEM ................................ 4-7 Hydraulic system - Safety instructions ...... 3-74

I Important Safety Information ........................... ii Information given on the Service screen ... 5-11 Information given on the start screen, central section ........................................................... 5-7

4

Information given on the start screen, lower section ..................................................................5-8 Information given on the start screen, top section5-6 Inspection and servicing - Safety instructions3-3 Inspection and Servicing plans - Instructions3-9 inspection and servicing work, Fire and Explosion Hazard ......................................................3-7 INSPECTION PLAN - OIL..........................3-26 Inspection plan – Oil (legend) ....................3-27 Instructions on troubleshooting ..................5-28

L Layout of the fault table..............................5-28 Lighting systems in LED technonogy, instructions3-68 LUBRICANTS / Consumables ...................3-29 LUBRICATING CHART – GREASE ..........3-24 Lubricating chart – Grease (legend) ..........3-25 Lubrication data screen..............................5-14

M Main filter elements ....................................3-56 Maximum machine inclinations, information2-80 Measures....................................................5-28 Monitoring cameras..................................2-102 MONITORING, WARNING AND CONTROL ELEMENTS ...................................................2-36

N Noise emission information ..........................1-5 Notes ............................1-13, 2-103, 3-137, 5-4 NOTES .......................................................4-15 Notes on the selection of oils and greases 3-29

O Oil for hydraulic system..............................3-31 Oilfilter replace (hydraulic circuit grease pump)3126 Oils / Greases...............................................3-9 Oils for combustion engines and compressors3-30 Oils for pump distribution gearboxes and tarvel gearboxes ...............................................3-32 Oils for swing gearboxes............................3-33 ON-BOARD CRANE (OPTIONAL) ............2-99 On-Board crane, – blocking the boom in position of rest........................................................2-101 On-board crane, checking........................2-101 On-Board crane, checking tightness of fastening bolts ......................................................3-134 On-board crane, drive unit .......................3-133 On-board crane, drive unit .......................2-100 On-board crane, lubricating .....................3-134 On-board crane, monitoring, warning and control elements .................................................2-99 On-board crane, putting into operation ....2-100 Operating hours meter ...............................2-29 Operation - Safety instructions.....................2-3

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Index Operation and Maintenance Manual, where to store it in the operator’s cab..................... 2-4 Operator’s seat .......................................... 2-27 Organizational measures............................. 1-6 Other elements on the front side ................. 5-4 OTHER MAINTENANCE......................... 3-128

P Plan A - E................................................... 3-17 Plan N ........................................................ 3-13 Plan T / Plan W.......................................... 3-15 Plan V ........................................................ 3-11 Possible causes......................................... 5-28 Pre-chamber breather valve, replace ...... 3-100 Pre-chambers, changing the gearbox oil... 3-99 Pre-chambers, checking oil level / topping up with oil............................................................ 3-97 Preface ........................................................ 1-1 Pressure accumulator - Emergency lowering3-95 PRESSURE ACCUMULATORS - SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.......................................... 4-8 Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations3-119 Pressure-accumulator inspection regulations3-132 Product specification sheet.......................... 5-2 PUMP Drive GEARBOX ............................ 3-96 Pump drive gearbox breather valve, replace3-99 Pump drive gearbox lube oil filters, replace3-101 Putting the excavator out of operation..... 3-135 PUTTING THE EXCAVATOR OUT OF OPERATION AND RECOMMISSIONING........ 3-135 Putting the machine back into operation, reset of emergency shut off function................... 2-25 PUTTING THE MACHINE INTO OPERATION2-64

R Radiators ................................................... 3-49 Recommissioning .................................... 3-135 Reducing operators exposure to vibrations2-29 Reducing the operator's exposure to noise2-64 Refuelling................................................... 2-65 Repair instructions....................................... 4-7 Repair work - Safety instructions................. 4-3 repair work, ENGINE ................................... 4-6 repair work, Fire and Explosion Hazard ...... 4-5 Replacing lamps and bulbs ....................... 3-65 Replacing the fuel filter .............................. 3-60 Replacing the oil filter ................................ 3-46 Reservoirs for used grease at the A-frame, emptying ........................................................ 3-129 Risk of deflagrations .................................. 4-12 Risk of fire.................................................. 4-12

S Safety instructions governing specific operational phases...................................................... 1-7 Saving data to a USB stick ........................ 5-24 Saving data to a USB stick, continued5-25, 5-26

Secondary filter element ............................3-58 Section .......................................................5-28 Securing the machine ................................2-97 Service station (tanklift)..............................2-66 SERVICING WORK ...................................3-37 Shutting off the engines .............................2-76 Signal table screen.....................................5-17 Signal table screen, diagram......................5-19 Signal table screen, diagram configuration 5-20 Signal table screen, location ......................5-18 Signs ..........................................................2-10 Slew brake test screen...............................5-22 Special work in conjunction with utilization of the machine and maintenance and repairs as well as troubleshooting during work disposal of parts and consumables .....................................1-8 Starter isolator switch, shutting off starter voltage2-26 Starting and stopping the engines .............2-74 Starting the engines ...................................2-74 Starting the engines at low temperatures ..2-75 Superstructure..............................................2-8 Superstructure basic position.....................2-83 Superstructure holding brake.....................2-87 Swing circuit lock-out function....................5-10 SWING GEARBOX ..................................3-102 Swing gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil..............................................3-102 Swing mechnism – Fault table ...................5-32 SWING RING ...........................................3-120 Swing ring - Instructions...........................3-120 Swinging ladder..........................................2-19 Swinging the superstructure ......................2-92 Switchgear cabinet.....................................3-72 Switching the cab interior lighting on and off2-22 Switching the electrical system on and off .2-73 Switching the maintenance lights on and off2-23

T Temperature...............................................3-48 Testing the cooling liquid composition .......3-54 The keys on the front side............................5-4 Track drive – Fault table.............................5-31 Track parking brake ...................................2-87 Track roller, lubricating.............................3-117 Track tensioner ........................................3-118 Trainer's / instructor's seat .........................2-29 Transport - Safety instructions ...................2-88 Transporting the machine ..........................2-88 Travel gearbox - Breather filter3-107, 3-111, 3-115 Travel gearbox - Changing oil3-106, 3-110, 3-114 Travel gearbox - Checking the oil level / Topping up with oil....................... 3-105, 3-108, 3-112 TRAVEL GEARBOX (Gearbox P/N 3683483)3-105 TRAVEL GEARBOX (Gearbox P/N 3683496)3-108 TRAVEL GEARBOX (Gearbox P/N 3749598)3-112 TRAVELLING .............................................2-83 Travelling forwards/backwards ..................2-83 TRAVELLING, SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS.2-82 TROUBLESHOOTING ...............................5-28

5

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Index U Unblocking a grease line ......................... 3-125 Undercarriage .............................................. 2-8 USB interface, data storage ...................... 5-23

V Venting the fuel system ............................. 3-60 Venting the hydraulic system..................... 3-92 Vibration data............................................. 5-34 Vibration information.................................... 1-5 View documents screen ............................ 5-16

W Warning of special dangers ......................... 1-9

6

Warnings and symbols.................................1-3 Warranty.......................................................1-2 Water trap (option), clean / replace............3-63 Welding and flame cutting works - Safety instructions ..........................................................4-9 Windscreen washer....................................2-29 Working ......................................................2-93 Working equipment, check for cracks ......3-130 Working hydraulics – Fault table................5-30 WORKING OPERATION ...........................2-91 Working operation - Safety instructions .....2-89

X Xenon floodlight projector (optional), replacing the lamp ........................................................3-66

BA RH340B(3 847 013.01)-EN

Index

This page intentionally left blank.

6-2

© Copyright Caterpillar Global Mining HMS GmbH 2013

The reproduction, distribution and utilization of this manual / file as well as the communication of its content to others without express authorization is prohibited.

Offenders will be held liable for the payment of damages. All rights reserved in the event of the grant of a patent, utility model or design.

Printed in Germany